You are on page 1of 232

Owners Manual

Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the BOSS


BR-900CD Digital Recording Studio.
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled:
USING THE UNIT SAFELY (page 23)
IMPORTANT NOTES (page 45)
These sections provide important information concerning
the proper operation of the unit.
Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a
good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit,
Owners manual should be read in its entirety. The manual
should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
Owners Manual

Printing Conventions in This Manual


Text or numerals enclosed in square brackets [ ] indicate buttons.
[PLAY]
PLAY button
[REC]
REC button
Reference such as (p. **) indicate pages in this manual to which
you can refer.
Copyright 2005 BOSS CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of BOSS CORPORATION.

**********

4SX

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.

Used for instructions intended to alert


the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers
other adverse effects
respect to the home
furnishings, as well
animals or pets.

The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.

to damage or
caused with
and all its
to domestic

The symbol alerts the user to things that must be


carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

001

009

Before using this unit, make sure to read the


instructions below, and the Owners Manual.

Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,


nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements and
short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock
hazards!
...........................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................
002c

Do not open (or modify in any way) the unit or its


AC adaptor.
..........................................................................................................
003

Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts


within it (except when this manual provides
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the Information sheet.
..........................................................................................................
004

Never use or store the unit in places that are:


Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or
are
Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are
Humid; or are
Exposed to rain; or are
Dusty; or are
Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
007

Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is


level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
..........................................................................................................
008c

Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with


the unit. Also, make sure the line voltage at the
installation matches the input voltage specified on
the AC adaptor's body. Other AC adaptors may
use a different polarity, or be designed for a
different voltage, so their use could result in
damage, malfunction, or electric shock.
..........................................................................................................

010

This unit, either alone or in combination with an


amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
audiologist.
...........................................................................................................
011

Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material,


coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft
drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.

...........................................................................................................
012c

Immediately turn the power off, remove the AC


adaptor from the outlet, and request servicing by
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or
an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the
Information sheet when:
The AC adaptor or the power-supply cord has
been damaged; or

For the U.K.


IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
BLUE:
NEUTRAL
BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.

For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.

For the USA

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION


RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada

NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

AVIS

If smoke or unusual odor occurs


Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or

Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada.
For the USA

The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise


has become wet); or

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement

The unit does not appear to operate normally or


exhibits a marked change in performance.
...........................................................................................................

Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :

BR-900CD
Digital Recording Studio
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S.Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938
(323) 890-3700

013

107d

In households with small children, an adult


should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for the
safe operation of the unit.
..........................................................................................................

Never handle the AC adaptor body, or its output


plugs, with wet hands when plugging into, or
unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................

014

Protect the unit from strong impact.


(Do not drop it!)

108b

Before moving the unit, disconnect the AC adaptor


and all cords coming from external devices.
..........................................................................................................
109b

..........................................................................................................
015

Do not force the units power-supply cord to share


an outlet with an unreasonable number of other
devices. Be especially careful when using
extension cordsthe total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cords outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
..........................................................................................................
016

Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult


with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the Information sheet.
..........................................................................................................

Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and


unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet.
..........................................................................................................
110b

Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning


in your area, disconnect the AC adaptor from the
outlet.
..........................................................................................................
111: Selection

If used improperly, batteries may explode or leak


and cause damage or injury. In the interest of
safety, please read and observe the following
precautions (p. 23).
Carefully follow the installation instructions for
batteries, and make sure you observe the correct
polarity.
Avoid using new batteries together with used
ones. In addition, avoid mixing different types
of batteries.

019

Batteries must never be recharged, heated, taken


apart, or thrown into fire or water.

Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to


remain unused for an extended period of time.
If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of cloth
or paper towel to wipe all remnants of the
discharge from the battery compartment. Then
install new batteries. To avoid inflammation of
the skin, make sure that none of the battery
discharge gets onto your hands or skin. Exercise
the utmost caution so that none of the discharge
gets near your eyes. Immediately rinse the
affected area with running water if any of the
discharge has entered the eyes.

..........................................................................................................
023

DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional


audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a
level that could cause permanent hearing loss.
Damage to speakers or other system components
may result.

101b

The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so


their location or position does not interfere with
their proper ventilation.
..........................................................................................................
102d

Always grasp only the output plug or the body of


the AC adaptor when plugging into, or
unplugging from, this unit or an outlet.
..........................................................................................................
103b

Any accumulation of dust between the AC


adaptor and the power outlet can result in poor
insulation and lead to fire. Periodically wipe away
such dust with a dry cloth. Also, disconnect the
power plug from the power outlet whenever the
unit is to remain unused for an extended period of
time.
..........................................................................................................
104

Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming


entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
106

Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on


the unit.
..........................................................................................................

Never keep batteries together with metallic


objects such as ballpoint pens, necklaces,
hairpins, etc.
..........................................................................................................
112

Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance


with whatever regulations for their safe disposal that
may be observed in the region in which you live.
..........................................................................................................
118a

Should you remove screws, keep them in a safe


place out of children's reach, so there is no chance
of them being swallowed accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
120

Always turn the phantom power off when


connecting any device other than condenser
microphones that require phantom power. You
risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply
phantom power to dynamic microphones, audio
playback devices, or other devices that don't
require such power. Be sure to check the specifications of any microphone you intend to use by
referring to the manual that came with it.
(This instrument's phantom power: +48 V DC, 7
mA Max)
..........................................................................................................

IMPORTANT NOTES
291a

In addition to the items listed under USING THE UNIT SAFELY on page 23, please read and observe the following:

Power Supply: Use of Batteries

Repairs and Data

301

452

Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any
device that will generate line noise (such as an electric
motor or variable lighting system).

Please be aware that all data contained in the units


memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs.
Important data should always be backed up on a memory
card/computer, or written down on paper (when
possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the
loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when
circuitry related to memory itself is out of order), we
regret that it may not be possible to restore the data, and
Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.

302

The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long


hours of consecutive use. This is normal, and is not a
cause for concern.
303a

The use of an AC adaptor is recommended as the units


power consumption is relatively high. Should you prefer
to use batteries, please use the alkaline type.
304a

When installing or replacing batteries, always turn off the


power on this unit and disconnect any other devices you
may have connected. This way, you can prevent
malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
307

Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the


power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/or damage to speakers or other devices.

Placement
351

Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment


containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To
alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or
move it farther away from the source of interference.
352a

This device may interfere with radio and television reception.


Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.
352b

Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices,


such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit.
Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or
while conversing. Should you experience such problems,
you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a
greater distance from this unit, or switch them off.
354a

Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near


devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
355b

When moved from one location to another where the


temperature and/or humidity is very different, water
droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage
or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in
this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must
allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation
has completely evaporated.

Maintenance
401a

For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth
or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To
remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a
mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe
the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
402

Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind,


to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.

Additional Precautions
551

Please be aware that the contents of memory can be


irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against
the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that
you periodically save a backup copy of important data
you have stored in the units memory on a memory card /
computer.
552

Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents


of data that was stored in the units memory or a memory
card once it has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no
liability concerning such loss of data.
553

Use a reasonable amount of care when using the units


buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
554

Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.


556

When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the


connector itselfnever pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cables
internal elements.
558a

To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the units


volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you (especially when it is late at night).
559a

When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box


(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise,
you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
561

Use only the specified expression pedal (Roland EV-5 or


BOSS FV-300L; sold separately). By connecting any other
expression pedals, you risk causing malfunction and/or
damage to the unit.
562

Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using


some other make of connection cable, please note the
following precautions.
Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this
unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level
to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications, contact the manufacturer of the cable.

IMPORTANT NOTES

Handling CD-ROMs

Copyright

801

851

Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded


surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may
not be read properly. Keep your discs clean using a
commercially available CD cleaner.

Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public


performance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or in part,
of a work (musical composition, video, broadcast, public
performance, or the like) whose copyright is held by a
third party is prohibited by law.
853

Before Using Memory Cards


(CompactFlash)
Using Memory Cards

Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a


copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of
third-party copyrights arising through your use of this
unit.

704

Carefully insert the Memory card all the way inuntil it is


firmly in place.

705

Never touch the terminals of the Memory card. Also,


avoid getting the terminals dirty.
707

This units memory card slot accepts CompactFlash


memory cards. Microdrive storage media by IBM are not
compatible.
708

CompactFlash cards are constructed using precision


components; handle the cards carefully, paying particular
note to the following.
To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity,
be sure to discharge any static electricity from your
own body before handling the cards.
Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with
the contact portion of the cards.
Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong shock or
vibration.
Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles,
or other such locations (storage temperature: -25 to 85
C).

204

* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of


Microsoft Corporation.
206e

* Screen shots in this documents are reprinted with


permission from Microsoft Corporation.
206j

* Windows is known officially as: Microsoft


Windows operating system.
207

* Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple


Computer, Inc.
209

* MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.


220

* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Do not allow cards to become wet.


Do not disassemble or modify the cards.

Before Using CD-R/RW Discs


Two different types of recordable disc can be used with the
BR-900CDnamely, CD-R discs and CD-RW discs.

Do not touch the lens.

When the lens is dirty, clean the lens with a commercial


lens blower.

If a write error occurs, carry out cleaning using a


commercially available CD-RW drive lens cleaner.

What is a CD-R disc?


CD-R (Compact Disc Recordable) is a CD to which data can
be written. It is not possible to erase or move the data that
has been written.
This type of disc should be used to create audio CDs that will
be played on standard CD players. Playback of CD-RW discs
will not be possible on this type of equipment. In addition,
even if you have created an audio CD using a CD-R disc,
playback will only be possible on players that support the
playback of recordable discs.

What is a CD-RW disc?


CD-RW (Compact Disc ReWritable) is a CD that can be
written and erased. As a result, this type of recordable disc
can be used again and again.
While you can create audio CDs using CD-RW discs, it will
not be possible to play these CDs on a standard CD player.
(You will, however, be able to play these discs using the BR900CD's CD-R/RW drive.)

Handling the CD-R/RW disc drive


When you use the CD-R/RW drive, you must use only the
supplied AC adaptor.
The CD-R/RW drive cannot be used while running on
battery power.

* Never use commercially available cleaner intended for


standard CD players. This type of cleaner cannot be used to
clean the BR-900CD's write lens.
* Even if the recommended type of CD-R/RW disc is used in a
perfectly normal CD-R/RW drive, the possibility of write
errors cannot be completely eliminated. Please be aware that
this type of problem can still occur as a result of variations in
CD-R/RW drives and CD-R/RW disc manufacturing
differences.

Handling CD-R/RW discs


* In addition to the following precautions, please also read the
instructions provided with the CD-R/RW discs.

DO NOT play a CD-R/RW disc (CD-R/RW disc on


which song data has been backed up) on a conventional
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a level
that could cause permanent hearing loss. Damage to
speakers or other system components may result.

Upon handling the discs, please observe the following.

Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free


from vibration. If the unit must be installed at an angle,
be sure the installation does not exceed the permissible
range.
Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been
moved to a location with a level of humidity that is
greatly different than its former location. Rapid changes
in the environment can cause condensation to form
inside the drive, which will adversely affect the
operation of the drive and/or damage CD-R/RW discs.
When the unit has been moved, allow it to become
accustomed to the new environment (allow a few hours)
before operating it.

Avoid using the CD-R/RW drive in locations with high


temperatures. Failure to observe this precaution can
result in the drive becoming unable to operate correctly
or in write errors. In addition, this type of environment
can also reduce the lifespan of the CD-R/RW drive.

Remove any disc from the drive before powering up or down.

To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert


only CD-R/RW discs into the disc drive. Never insert
any other type of disc. Avoid getting paper clips, coins,
or any other foreign objects inside the drive.

* Note that some commercially available cleaners are intended


for CD-R drives, while others are intended for CD-RW drives.
Be sure to select a cleaner for CD-RW drives.

Do not touch the recorded surface of the disc.

Do not use in dusty areas.

Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an


enclosed vehicle.

Keep the disc in the case.

Compatibility of CD-R/RW discs


and drives

Ensure that the recommended type of CD-R/RW discs


are always used. Failure to observe this precaution can
lead to an increase in the frequency of write errors.

Even when the recommended type of disc is used, there


is still a possibility that write errors can occur. Please be
aware that this type of problem can still result from
variations in CD-R/RW drives and CD-R/RW disc
manufacturing differences.

The usage of discs with printable labels is not


recommended, even if these discs are of the
recommended type. Certain storage conditions can cause
discs with printable labels to warp, and write errors can
occur as a result.

Notes When Using Mics

When you insert a CD-R/RW disc


to built in CD-R/RW drive...
When you insert a CD-R/RW disc to built in CD-R/RW
drive, lock the CD-R/RW disc at correct position according
to Insert a CD-R/RW disc below. Please be careful to lock a

Removing a CD-R/RW disc


1. Hold the stopper downward and remove a CD-R/RW
disc from outer rim.
fig.CD eject

CD-R/RW disc correctly. Unless, it is possible that the disc


tray is stuck and unable to remove a CD-R/RW disc.

Inserting a CD-R/RW disc


1. Press the eject button and open a disc tray.
2. Pull out a disc tray.
3. Locate the position of center hole of CD-R/RW disc at
stopper of CD-R/RW drive.
4. Press the CD-R/RW disc downward. The CD-R/RW
disc will be locked by 3 clips of the stopper.
fig.CD set

If a disc tray does not open


If the power is turned off with the disc still in the drive (such
as due to a power failure), the disc tray cannot be opened by
pressing the eject button. In this case, you can insert a piece
of wire to force the tray open.
fig.Hole

Emergency eject hole

Make sure the BR-900CDs power has been turned OFF


before attempting to use the emergency eject hole. If you
insert something while the power is on, the disc could get
damaged, or unexpected problems may occur.
* As a certain amount of force must be applied for insertion,
always confirm that the CD-R/RW disc has been correctly
inserted. Failure to properly and fully insert a disc can result
in an inability to carry out writing correctly.
5. Press disc tray until it is locked in the BR-900CD.

Notes When Using Mics


Always be sure to switch the phantom power off except when connecting condenser mics requiring a phantom power supply.
Supplying phantom power to dynamic mics, audio playback equipment, and other devices that do not use phantom power may
cause damage to your equipment.
For mic specifications, please refer to the owners manual for whatever model of mic you are using.
* BR-900CD Phantom Power: +48 V DC, 7 mA Max.
Phantom power is supplied to the XLR connectors for MIC 1 and MIC 2 simultaneously. The phantom power cannot be switched
on or off for each connector individually.
If simultaneously using mics that require phantom power with those that don't, then connect any mic that does not need phantom
power to one of the 1/4 phone jacks. Phantom power is supplied only to the XLR connectors, not to the 1/4 phone jacks.
To connect mics to the 1/4 phone jacks, use a commercially available XLR-to-phone adapter cable or other form of adapter.

Contents
USING THE UNIT SAFELY ...................2

(5) Using Insert Effects ..............................................35

IMPORTANT NOTES ..........................4

Switch effect patches ...........................................35

Before Using CD-R/RW Discs.............6

Recording without insert effects........................36


(6) Using the Rhythm ................................................37

Notes When Using Mics ....................7

Playing the Rhythm .............................................37

Introduction to the BR-900CD..........14

Changing arrangements......................................37

Features .......................................................................14

Changing patterns ...............................................38

Memory Cards Supported by Your BR-900CD.....16

Changing the tempo of the arrangements or


patterns ..................................................................38

How to remove the card protector ....................16

Panel Descriptions ..........................17

Tapping to change the tempo of the


arrangements or patterns....................................38

Front Panel..................................................................17

(7) Basic Recording ....................................................39

Rear Panel ...................................................................22

Selecting the recording track ..............................39

Inserting Batteries......................................................23

About the recording (REC) modes ....................39


Procedure ..............................................................40

Quick Start ............................ 25

(8) Playing Back Recorded Music............................41

Connecting Peripheral Devices ........26

Silencing the sound of specific tracks


(Track Mute) .........................................................41

Inserting a Memory Card .........................................27

Turning On / Off the BR-900CD ......28


Turning On the Power ..............................................28
Turning Off the Power..............................................28

(9) Overdubbing
(Recording an additional performance while
listening to an existing performance) .....................41
(10) Adjusting the Sound for Each Track ...............42
Setting the positioning (pan) of the sound .......42

Listening to a Demo Song ...............29

Adjusting the tone (Track EQ) ...........................43

Selecting a song (Song Select) ............................29

Adding width to the sound (Loop Effect) ........43

Playing back a song .............................................29

(11) Bouncing (Putting multiple tracks together) ..... 45

Changing the current position ...........................30

Recording/Playing Back a Song .....31


(1) Preparing the Memory Card ..............................31
(2) Turning On the Power ........................................31
Formatting the memory card (Initialize) ..........31
(3) Selecting the Song to Record ..............................32
Recording a new song (Song New) ...................32
(4) Connecting Instruments .....................................33
Choose which jack you will use to connect your
instrument.............................................................33
Press the INPUT SELECT button of the
instrument that you want to record ..................34
Turning on the internal microphone.................34
Adjusting the input sensitivity ..........................35
Adjusting the input level ....................................35

(12) Turning Off the Power ......................................45


(13) Removing the Memory Card............................45

Section 1 Recording and Playback.. 47

Section 2 Editing ....................63

Recording.......................................48

Registering Time (Locator) .............. 64

Selecting the Recording Track .................................48

Registering a Locator Point ......................................64

Changing V-Tracks....................................................49

Moving to the Locator Point ....................................64

Changing the Position of the Input Sound (Pan).......49

Deleting a Locator Point ...........................................64

Recording Operations ...............................................50

Repeating Playback (Repeat)..........51

Search for the Musics Start and End


(Scrub/Preview) ............................. 65

Setting the Repeat Portion........................................51

Scrubbing to Find the Music Starting/Ending Point..... 65

Setting the Repeat Portion with Accurate Timing.....52

Changing the Scrub Points .......................................66

Re-recording Only a Mistake


(Punch-in/out) ................................53

Enabling Use of the Preview Function with [REW]


and [FF] .......................................................................66

Manually Punching In/Out .....................................53


Manually punching in and out using [REC] ........53

Editing the Performance on a Track


(Track Editing) ................................ 67

Manually punching in and out using


a foot switch..........................................................54

Copying Data (Track Copy) .....................................67

Auto Punching In and Out.......................................54

Copying by specifying the time (TME/MES)...... 68

Specifying the area for auto punching in/out .....54

Copying a complete track (ALL) .......................69

Erasing a registered auto punch in/out location ..... 55

Moving Data (Track Move) ......................................70

How to record ......................................................55

Moving the repeated portion (AB) ....................70

Repeatedly Recording Over the Same Location


(Loop Recording).......................................................56

Moving by specifying the time (TME/MES)....... 71

Setting the portion to be repeated .....................56

Erasing Data (Track Erase) .......................................73

How to record ......................................................56

Erasing the repeated portion (AB).....................73

Canceling an Operation (Undo/Redo) ... 57

Erasing by specifying the time (TME/MES)........ 74

Reversing the Last Operation (Undo) ....................57

Erasing a complete track (ALL) .........................75

Canceling the Undo (Redo)......................................57

Exchanging Data (Track Exchange) ........................76

Putting Multiple Tracks Together


(Bounce) .........................................58

Organizing the Songs Youve


Recorded........................................ 77

Bouncing Directly to a CD-R/RW Disc


(Direct CD Bounce) ...................................................59

Copying a Song (Song Copy)...................................77

Selecting the Input Source and Bouncing the


Recording to a CD-R/RW ........................................60

Saving Memory on the Memory Card


(Song Optimize) .........................................................78

Loading Songs Created with the


BR-864/BR-532 ..............................61

Naming Songs (Song Name)....................................78

Loading Songs Created with the BR-864................61

Saving the Current Settings to the Song (Song Save) .... 79

Loading Songs Created with the BR-532................61

Creating a Master Tape / Disc ........ 80

Displaying the Song Information ....62

Recording to a Cassette Tape Recorder


(Analog Connection) .................................................80

Displaying the Remaining Available Recording


Time.............................................................................62
Displaying the Memory Card Usage ......................62

Copying the repeated portion (AB)...................67

Moving a complete track (ALL).........................72

Erasing Songs (Song Erase) ......................................77

Protecting a Song (Song Protect) .............................79

Recording to a Digital Recorder (Digital Connection)... 80


Disabling digital copying (Digital Copy Protect)..... 80

Section 3 Using Effects ........... 83


Using the Insert Effects ...................84

Equalizer................................................................96
Flanger ...................................................................96
Foot Volume .........................................................96

Effect Patches and Banks ..........................................84

Lo-Fi Box ...............................................................96

Editing Insert Effect Settings....................................85

Noise Suppressor .................................................97

Saving Insert Effects Settings (Write) .....................86

Octave ....................................................................97

Changing How the Insert Effects are Used


According to the Mode .............................................87

Phaser.....................................................................97

Insert Effect Parameter Functions ....88

Preamp...................................................................98

Algorithm List............................................................88

Ring Modulator ....................................................99

BANK: GUITAR ........................................................88

Slow Attack ...........................................................99

1. COSM GTR AMP .............................................88

Speaker Simulator..............................................100

2. ACOUSTIC SIM ...............................................88

Tremolo/Pan ......................................................100

3. BASS SIM ..........................................................89

Voice Transformer .............................................100

4. COSM COMP GTR ..........................................89

Wah ......................................................................101

5. ACOUSTIC GTR ..............................................89

Mastering .................................... 102

6. BASS MULTI ....................................................89

Editing the Mastering Tool Kit Settings ...............103

7. COSM BASS AMP ...........................................90

Saving the Mastering Tool Kit Settings (Write)....... 104

8. COSM COMP BSS............................................90


BANK: MIC ................................................................90
9. VOCAL MULTI................................................90
10. VOICE TRANS ...............................................90
11. COSM COMP VCL ........................................91
BANK: LINE...............................................................91
12. STEREO MULTI.............................................91
13. LO-FI BOX.......................................................91
BANK: SIMUL ...........................................................92
14. VO+GT AMP ..................................................92
15. VO+AC.SIM....................................................92
16. VO+ACOUSTIC.............................................92
Parameter List ............................................................93
Acoustic Guitar Simulator ..................................93
Acoustic Processor...............................................93
Bass Simulator ......................................................93

Mastering Tool Kit Parameter


Functions...................................... 105
Algorithm..................................................................105
Parameter List ..........................................................105
Equalizer..............................................................105
Bass Cut Filter.....................................................106
Enhancer..............................................................106
Input.....................................................................106
Expander .............................................................106
Compressor.........................................................107
Mixer ....................................................................107
Limiter .................................................................107
Output .................................................................107

Using the Loop Effects/Track EQ ... 108


Selecting the Loop Effect ........................................108

Chorus ...................................................................94

Adjusting How the Loop Effect is Applied .........109

Compressor...........................................................94

Setting the Track EQ................................................110

COSM Comp (compressor)/Limiter.................94

Loop Effect Parameter Functions ... 111

De-esser .................................................................95

Parameter List ..........................................................111

Defretter ................................................................95

CHORUS/DELAY/DBLN (Doubling)...........111

Delay......................................................................95

REVERB...............................................................111

Doubling................................................................95
Enhancer................................................................95

10

Pitch Shifter...........................................................98

Track EQ Parameter Functions ......112

Creating Original Patterns ............ 126

Parameter List ..........................................................112

Note concerning creation of patterns..............126

Fixing the Pitch of Vocals


(Pitch Correction) ..........................113

Creating Patterns in Realtime Recording.............126

The Pitch Correction ...............................................113

Deleting unneeded drum sounds ....................129

Makeup of the Pitch Correction ............................113

Changing the metronome volume...................129

Pitch Correction Patches.........................................113

Creating Patterns in Step Recording.....................130

Precautions for Pitch Correction Usage ...............113


Using the Pitch Correction .....................................114
Setting the Correction Method for Vocal Pitch
(Pitch Correction Edit) ............................................115

Rehearsing recordings.......................................128

Changing the velocity .......................................132


Deleting unneeded drum sounds ....................132
Naming Patterns ......................................................132
Copying Patterns .....................................................133

Saving the Pitch Correction Settings (Write).......115

Erasing Patterns .......................................................133

Making Detailed Settings for Pitch Correction


(Correction Event Map) ..........................................116

Using the Drum Kits ..................... 134

Section 4 Using the Rhythm . 119


Using the Rhythm .........................120
About the Patterns...................................................120
Types of patterns................................................120

Performing the Drums ............................................134


Selecting Drum Kits.................................................134
Creating Original Drum Kits (Tone Load)...........135
Loading from the tracks ....................................135
Copying drum sounds from other drum kits.... 137
Changing the position (pan) of the drum sounds.. 138

About the Arrangements........................................120


Types of arrangements......................................120
Switching the Rhythm Mode .................................121
Recording Rhythm Performances .........................121
Performing Arrangements and Patterns..............121
Selecting arrangements .....................................121
Performing arrangements.................................121
Selecting patterns...............................................122
Performing patterns...........................................122
Changing the tempo of the arrangements or
patterns................................................................122
Tapping to change the tempo of the
arrangements or patterns..................................122

Creating Original Arrangements ...123


Inserting a Step ........................................................124
Erasing a Step...........................................................124
Naming Arrangements...........................................124
Copying Arrangements ..........................................125
Erasing Arrangements ............................................125

11

Section 5
Using the CD-R/RW Drive..... 139

Section 6 Using MIDI ............155

Creating Audio CD ........................140

What is MIDI? ..........................................................156


MIDI Connectors .....................................................156
MIDI Channels .........................................................156
MIDI Implementation Charts ................................156

Precautions ...............................................................140
Setting the Time Between Songs (Pre-Gap) .........140
Writing Songs to Discs............................................140
Viewing the Remaining Time for Recording on
Audio CDs ................................................................142
Playing Back Audio CDs ........................................142
Enabling Playback on CD Players (Finalize) .......143

Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange


Data.............................................145
Saving Recorded Songs to CD-R/RW Discs
(Backup) ....................................................................145
Backing up a song to a CD-R/RW disc one at a
time (Song Backup)............................................145

MIDI Fundamentals ...................... 156

Synchronizing with MIDI Devices .. 157


Using the Rhythm to Play an External MIDI Sound
Module ......................................................................157
Synchronizing Playback with a MIDI Sequencer.... 158

Synchronized playback with the BR-900CD


as the master .......................................................158
Setting the MTC offset.......................................159
Using MMC ..............................................................160
Operating MMC-compatible devices with the
BR-900CD ............................................................160

Saving all of the songs on a memory card to


a CD-R/RW disc (All Backup).........................146

Section 7 Using USB .............161

Loading Saved Songs to a Memory Card (Recover) .... 147

Before Using USB (Overview) ....... 162

Loading saved songs to a memory card one at a


time (Song Recover)...........................................147

Compatible OS .........................................................162
Composition of Data on Memory Cards ..............162
Connecting a Computer..........................................163
Notes on Using USB ................................................163

Loading all saved songs to a memory card


(All Recover).......................................................147
Copying and Writing Waveform Data.................148
Copying waveform data from a computer to the
audio tracks (WAV/AIFF Import) ..................148
Copying WAV/AIFF files as drum sounds
(Tone Load).........................................................149
Copying audio track waveform data to
computers (WAV/AIFF Export)......................150
Using SMF ................................................................151
Playing SMFs using external MIDI instruments
(SMF Player) .......................................................151
Loading drum patterns from the CD-R/RW drive
(SMF Import)........................................................ 152
Erasing Data from a CD-RW Disc (CD-RW Erase).... 153

Importing Songs from CDs to Audio


Tracks ..........................................154

12

With Windows ............................. 164


Backing Up the BR-900CDs Data .........................164
Saving BR-900CD Track Data in WAV/AIFF Format
(WAV/AIFF Export) ...............................................165
Loading WAV/AIFF Files in BR-900CD Tracks
(WAV/AIFF Import)...............................................167
Importing SMFs and Creating Patterns................169
Loading Drum Sounds from WAV/AIFF Files
(Tone Load) ..............................................................171
Using the BR-864 / BR-532s Data.........................173

With Macintosh ............................ 175


Backing Up the BR-900CDs Data .........................175
Saving BR-900CD Track Data in WAV/AIFF Format
(WAV/AIFF Export) ...............................................176
Loading WAV/AIFF Files in BR-900CD Tracks
(WAV/AIFF Import)...............................................178
Importing SMFs and Creating Patterns................179
Loading Drum Sounds from WAV/AIFF Files
(Tone Load) ..............................................................181
Using the BR-864 / BR-532s Data.........................183

Section 8
Other Convenient Functions . 185

Section 9 Appendices ...........201

Adjusting the Display Contrast......186

Mastering Tool Kit Patch List ......... 205

Using a Foot Switch or


Expression Pedal..........................187

Pitch Correction Patch List ............. 205

When Using a Foot Switch .....................................187


When Using an Expression Pedal .........................187

Tuning an Instrument (Tuner) ........188


Changing to the Tuner............................................188
Explanation of the indications that appear while
tuning...................................................................188
Tuning .......................................................................189
Setting the Reference Pitch of the Tuner ..............189

Mixing the Output from an External


MIDI Device with the Output from Your
BR-900CD (Audio Sub Mix) ...........190
Using Condenser Microphones
(Phantom Power) .........................191

Effect Patch List ............................ 202

Arrangement / Pattern List ........... 206


Preset Arrangement List.........................................206
Preset Pattern List....................................................207

Parameter List.............................. 208


Troubleshooting ........................... 211
Error Messages ............................ 213
MIDI Implementation .................... 216
MIDI Implementation Chart........... 219
Specifications ............................... 220
Index ........................................... 222
Track Sheet .................................. 230

Copying Difficult Songs


(Phrase Trainer)............................192
Slowing Down the Speed (Time Stretch) .............192
Canceling the Center Sound (Center Cancel)......192

Initializing the BR-900CDs Settings .... 194


Initializing All the BR-900CDs Settings ..............194
Initializing the System Settings .............................194
Initializing the Effect Settings ................................195
Initializing the Rhythm Arrangements/Patterns/
Drum Kits .................................................................195
Initializing the Memory Card ................................196

Conserving Battery Power


(Power Save)................................197
Deactivating the power save function ............197

Utility Parameter List ....................198


About the System Parameters ...............................198
About the Sync Parameters....................................198
About the Scrub Parameters ..................................199

13

Introduction to the BR-900CD


Features
Simple operation
The BR-900CD is designed to be operated as easily as a
cassette tape recorder, even by beginners.
The BR-900CD allows anyone to readily enjoy the benefits of
digital recording as soon as its taken out of the box. So,
youll surely have listened to the demo songs, if not gone
ahead and produced an entire audio CD, all on your first day
with your new unit.
In addition, it comes equipped with a CD-R/RW drive,
making it easy to keep recorded works stored on audio CDs.

Digital audio workstation


All processes are fully digital
In addition to a digital mixer and digital recorder, the BR900CD contains five digital effects processors.
It is possible to perform all steps needed for recording, including
editing, bouncing tracks, using effects, and mixing down,
entirely within the digital realm, so there is no deterioration in
the signal quality.
Using the USB connector also allows you to save the song
data you create to a computer.

Equipped with V-Tracks


The BR-900CD has eight audio recording tracks, which
provides for simultaneous recording on two tracks, or
simultaneous playback from eight tracks.
Moreover, each track incorporates eight virtual tracks, called
V-Tracks, for a total recording capability of 8 x 8 = 64
tracks! This increased versatility allows you to do things such
as record numerous takes of a guitar solo, which you can
later choose from when putting it all together. Also, while
playing back eight tracks, you can use the bounce mode to
bounce to a V-Track and perform stereo bouncing without
needing to erase any data.

What are V-Tracks?


Each track consists of eight virtual tracks, and you can
choose any one of these tracks for recording or playback.
This means that you can record to up to a maximum of
64 tracks, and then select any eight of them to play back.
These virtual tracks that make up the actual tracks are
called V-Tracks.

A Track Sheet is provided at the rear of this manual (p.


230), which you make copies of, and fill in when
recording music to V-Tracks.

Equipped with CD-R/RW Drive


The BR-900CD features a CD-R/RW drive capable of both
reading and burning CD-R and CD-RW discs, making it easy
to produce audio CDs of the performances you record.
In addition, you can back up performance data stored on
memory cards to CD-R/RW discs for even more efficient and
effective use of your memory cards.

When you use the CD-R/RW drive, you must use only the
supplied AC adaptor.
The CD-R/RW drive cannot be used while running on
battery power.

Rhythm function
The Rhythm function makes it easy to capture phrases or
musical ideas that come to mind. Simply select an
appropriate Rhythm pattern, and set the tempo.
In addition to the internal preset Rhythm patterns already
provided, you can also create your own original Rhythm
patterns. By recording using the Rhythm function, editing
one measure at a time is greatly simplified.
Section 4 Using the Rhythm (p. 119)

Five versatile digital effects processors


The BR-900CD comes with five different types of effects
processors. These systems, including recording effects (Insert
effects), send/return (Loop Effects), tone adjustment (Track
EQ), vocal pitch correction (Pitch Correction), and mastering
effects (Mastering Tool Kit) can be used independently for
each application as needed. This enables high-quality song
production in a single device, with no need to connect any
external effects.
The BR-900CD has many built-in simulations and effects,
including amp modeling with COSM for a wide variety of
insert effects. Many effects for vocal, keyboard, and guitar
tracks are also included for a vast array of applications.

fig.00-101

The loop effects include spatial effects such as chorus and


reverb, which are vital for proper stereo mixdown.
V-Track1
V-Track2
V-Track3
V-Track4
V-Track5
V-Track6
V-Track7
V-Track8

14

The Track EQ is a built-in, two-band EQ whose utility is most


fully exhibited in making tone adjustments during mixdown.

Introduction to the BR-900CD

The Pitch Correction feature allows you to freely adjust the


pitch of vocals, assuring that you can obtain reliable, highquality performances.
The Mastering Tool Kit allows you add compression to songs
that have been mixed down and provides a variety of other
effects.
Using the Insert Effects (p. 84)
Using the Loop Effects/Track EQ (p. 108)
Fixing the Pitch of Vocals (Pitch Correction) (p. 113)
Mastering (p. 102)

What is COSM (Composite Object Sound Modeling)?


Technology that virtually reconstructs an actually
existing structure or material using a different means is
called modeling technology. COSM is proprietary
Roland technology that creates new sounds by
combining various sound modeling technologies.

Editing functions
With the BR-900CD, you can perform editing operations such
as copying, moving, and erasing, which cannot be done with
multitrack recorders that use tapes. This means operations
such as copying and repeating a multiple-bar phrase, moving
a multiple-bar phrase to another track, and erasing the data
of a track, whole or in part, can be performed with ease.

Non-destructive editing
Being a digital recorder, the BR-900CD offers non-destructive
editing. With non-destructive editing, after performing any
editing and recording operations, you can still return your
data to its previous state (undo and redo functions).
Canceling an Operation (Undo/Redo) (p. 57)

Quick movement to a point


You can assign a marker to any point in a track that you wish
(locator function). If you assign markers to locations such as
the end of the opening or the beginning of a solo, you will be
able to move instantly to the point where you wish to begin
listening.
Registering Time (Locator) (p. 64)

Equipped with chromatic tuner


(A0 to B6 sound range)
Your BR-900CD is also equipped with a chromatic tuner so
that you can tune your guitar or bass while it is still
connected to the BR-900CD (p. 188).

Phrase Trainer function


When you play back a song you have recorded from the CD
player or the MD player, you can slow down the tempo
without changing the pitch. Also, you can remove the sound
you hear at the center (such as vocals and guitar solo) from
the song. (p. 192)

Full complement of input connectors


(jacks)
Your BR-900CD is equipped with the input jacks shown below.

GUITAR/BASS:
This high-impedance input jack allows you to directly
connect your guitar or bass (accepts 1/4 phone plugs).

MIC1:
These jacks allow a mic to be connected. Both a TRS phone
jack and an XLR jack are provided. Connect your mic here if
recording vocals or narration.
A built-in microphone is also included, so you can perform
recordings with the BR-900CD even when you dont have a
microphone connected.
* The built-in microphone can be turned on or off (p. 34).
* Phantom power can be supplied via the XLR connector (p. 191).

MIC2:
This is XLR-type microphone input connector. If recording
using two mics, with one mic connected to the MIC 1 input,
connect the second mic here.
* Phantom power can be supplied via the XLR connector (p. 191).

LINE:
These jacks accept stereo input from keyboards, CD players,
and other devices at line level (RCA phono jacks).
The LINE OUT jacks (stereo RCA phono jacks) are also
provided for output.

USB:
Connecting your computer here allows you to exchange data
between the BR-900CD and a computer.

Two-way power supply allows


you to record anywhere
You can use the BR-900CD powered by batteries (six size AA
dry cells) or with the AC adaptor.
And, thanks to its built-in microphone, you can make
recordings anywhere and anytime you desire.

15

Introduction to the BR-900CD

Memory Cards Supported by


Your BR-900CD
The BR-900CD uses CompactFlash cards as the storage
media for recording and playback.

How to remove the card


protector
To prevent theft of the memory card (CompactFlash), the BR900CD is shipped from the factory with a card protector.
fig.00-103

The BR-900CD uses 32 MB to 1 GB CompactFlash cards with


a 3.3 V power supply.
Card Protector

For more on supported memory cards (CompactFlash) for


the BR-900CD, refer to About Memory Cards (separate
sheet).

Card Cover

CompactFlash Type II cards are not compatible.

CompactFlash cards are available at your nearest computer


or digital camera shop.

Formatting the memory card


(CompactFlash)
CompactFlash cards bought at a computer shop, or ones
previously used with a digital camera cannot be used as is
with the BR-900CD.
These CompactFlash cards must first be initialized for use
with the BR-900CD.
For more details regarding initializing, see p. 31, p. 196.

234

* CompactFlash and
are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation and licensed by CompactFlash association.
235

* BOSS Corporation is an authorized licensee of the


CompactFlash and CF logo (

) trademarks.

To remove the card protector, use the following procedure.


1. Make sure the card cover is closed, then the BR-900CD
over.
* When turning the unit upside-down, get a bunch of
newspapers or magazines, and place them under the four
corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and
controls. Also, you should try to orient the unit so no buttons
or controls get damaged.
* When turning the unit upside-down, handle with care to avoid
dropping it, or allowing it to fall or tip over.
2. Using a coin or
flathead screwdriver,
unscrew and remove
the coin screw from
the bottom panel.
3. Pull out the card
cover in the direction
indicated by the
arrow.
4. To prevent loss of the
card protector after it
is removed, place it as
shown in the figure.
Insert the card
protector in the slot as
indicated by the
arrow.
5. Turn the BR-900CD
back over to its
original position.

Should you remove the screws, make sure to put them in a


safe place out of childrens reach, so there is no chance of
them being swallowed accidentally.

16

Panel Descriptions
Front Panel

5
6

11
1

10
9

2
13

3
4
12
1 Input section
SENS knob
Use this knob to adjust the sensitivity at the input jacks (e.g.,
GUITAR/BASS, MIC1, MIC2, and LINE).

PEAK indicator
This indicator shows how strong the input level is at the
various input jacks (e.g., GUITAR/BASS, MIC1, and MIC2).
This indicator lights at a level -6 dB lower than where sound
distortion occurs. Adjust the input sensitivity with the SENS knob
so that this indicator lights only occasionally, at those moments
when you play your guitar (or other instrument) at its loudest.

INPUT SELECT buttons


Use these buttons to select the input source (input jack) that
you wish to record. The indicator of the selected button will
light. You can mute (silence) the input sound by pressing a
button that is lit.
[GUITAR/BASS/MIC2]
For selecting either guitar or bass use of the GUITAR/BASS
jack, or the MIC 2 jack.
[MIC]
For selecting either the MIC1 jack, or the internal
microphone.
* You can turn on and off the internal microphone. (p. 34)

[LINE]
For selecting the LINE jack (stereo) for the line inputs, such
as keyboards or CD players.
SIMUL
By pressing [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] and [MIC]
simultaneously, you can record from both inputs at the same
time.
* If the INPUT SELECT setting is changed, the insert effect
bank (p. 35, p. 84) changes automatically.

INPUT LEVEL knob


Use this knob to adjust the volume of the input source for
recording.
* If you use the INPUT LEVEL knob to turn down the volume
of the input source during recording, the sound will be
recorded in the audio track at a low volume, so that noise will
be more apparent when you raise the volume of the audio track
for playback.If you want to lower the sound of the input source
that you are monitoring, lower the volume with the MASTER
fader. To change the volume of the music being played back,
use the TRACK fader for the respective tracks.

[TUNER]
Use this button to turn on and off the tuner (p. 188).
This allows you to tune your instrument connected to the
GUITAR/BASS jack.

17

Panel Descriptions

[FF]
The song will fast-forward while you hold down the button.

[EFFECTS]

[REPEAT]

Use this button to turn on and off the insert effects (p. 35, p.
84) or call up the screen for editing the various settings.

You can specify a region that you wish to hear, and hear it
repeatedly (p. 51).

This button is used to make settings for the Mastering Tool


Kit.

This feature is useful if you want to repeatedly play back the


recording between the punch-in and out locations (p. 53)
until you are satisfied or use the phrase trainer (p. 192) to try
to copy a difficult phrase recorded from a CD or the like.

3 REC/PLAY section
AUTO PUNCH
This button is used to make settings for the automatic punch
in/out function.
[ON/OFF]
This turns the auto punch-in/out function on/off. When this
is on, the button indicator will light.
[IN]
For setting the auto punch-in location. Press this button to set
the punch-in point. When set, the indicator on this button
will light. After the punch-in location is set, you can press
this button to automatically move to the punch-in location.
* Press this button while holding down [ON/OFF] to clear the
set punch-in location.
[OUT]
For setting the auto punch-out location. Press this button to
set the punch-out location at the current location in the track.
When set, the indicator on this button will light. After the
punch-out location is set, you can press this button to
automatically move to the punch-out location.
* Press this button while holding down [ON/OFF] to clear the
set punch-out location.

[STOP]
Stops recording or playback of the song.

[PLAY]
Plays back songs. When [REC] is pressed and the REC
indicator is flashing, press [PLAY] to start recording. During
recording or playback, the indicator on the button lights in
green.

[REC (Recording)]
This is the Record button. In addition to the Recording
operation, it is also used for manual punch-in/out. While in
recording standby, the indicator on this button flashes in red,
and during recording, it lights in red.

4 Track/Fader section
TRACK MIXER fader 16, 7/8
For controlling the volumes of each track during playback.
* Hereafter, the TRACK MIXER faders shall be referred to as
the TRACK faders.

RHYTHM fader
Adjusts the volume of the Rhythm.

[LOCATOR]

MASTER fader

Use this button to store any location that you desire. Then, by
pressing this button, you can automatically move to that
location.

Controls the overall volume of the BR-900CD.

When a location is set, the indicator on this button will light


and you will jump to the location each time this button is
pressed.
* Press this button while holding down AUTO PUNCH [ON/
OFF] to clear the set location.

[ZERO]
Moves you to the time location 00:00:000.0.

[REW]
The song will rewind while you hold down the button.

18

[V-TRACK]
Use this button to call up the screen for selecting a V-Track.

What are V-Tracks? (p. 14)


Changing V-Tracks (p. 49)

REC TRACK (Recording Track) buttons 16, 7/8


Use these buttons to select to which track you will record.
The button of the track selected will flash in red and then
light in red when recording begins. When recording is
finished, the button of the selected track will light alternately
in orange and green.

Panel Descriptions

The relationship between the indicator and the track


conditions is given below.
Off:
This track contains no recorded data.
Green:
An audio track that contains recorded data.
Flashing in red:
The track is selected as the recording destination, and is in
recording standby.

[UNDO/REDO]
For undoing the last-performed recording or editing
operation and returning the data to its previous state. By
pressing this button once again, you can bring back the
canceled recording or re-execute the editing operation (p. 57).

[EXIT/NO]
Press this button to return to the previous screen or cancel
the last entry.

[ENTER/YES]

Red:

Press this button to confirm a selection or a value being entered.

This track currently being recorded.

CURSOR buttons

Lighting alternately in orange and green:

Press these buttons to move the cursor within the screen.

This track contains recorded data and is selected for recording.

6
During creation of Rhythm patterns (p. 126), a rhythm
instrument is assigned to each button.

[CD-R/RW]

[TAP (TEMPO)]

The BR-900CD uses this drive unit to read from, write to, and
play CD-R/RW discs.

By tapping this button, you can set the tempo for the
Rhythm.

[DELETE/MUTE]
By holding down this button and pressing a REC TRACK
button whose indicator is lit in green and orange alternating
or green, you can mute that track during playback,
regardless of the position of its TRACK fader (p. 41).
When you repeat the same action, muting will be defeated.
While muted, the REC TRACK button of that track will flash
in green and orange alternating.
* If a recording track was muted, muting will be defeated when
recording ends.

7 Rhythm section
Here you can make settings for the Rhythm function.

[ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF]
Pressed to cycle the Rhythm function through the available
selections: Arrangement Pattern Off.

[EDIT]
This calls up the screen for programming arrangements and
patterns.

[RHYTHM PAD]
This button switches the TRACK button functions to Rhythm input.

During creation of Rhythm patterns (p. 126), you can delete


rhythm sounds you have input by holding down this button
and pressing the REC TRACK button.

5
TIME/VALUE dial
You can use this dial to shift the current position within a
song (e.g., fast forwarding and rewinding). It is also used to
change the values of the various function settings.

Section 4 Using the Rhythm (p. 119)

8
[PHRASE TRAINER]
Use this button to perform the settings for the phrase trainer
function.

[UTILITY]

When using the phrase trainer, you can turn on or off the
center cancel function (for removing vocals at the center), or
the time stretch function (for slowing down playback).

This button calls up various functions offered by your BR900CD, such as track editing, song management, and
memory card operations.

Canceling the Center Sound (Center Cancel) (p. 192)


Slowing Down the Speed (Time Stretch) (p. 192)

19

Panel Descriptions

12

[PAN/EQ]

MIC (Internal microphone)

Pressed to access a screen where you can set the pan (left/
right location of the sound) for the playback of each track or
for the input sound (p. 42, p. 49).

This microphone can be used for recording with the BR900CD.

This, also, adjusts the tone (Low, High) for each track (p. 42,
p. 110).

Press the INPUT SELECT button of the instrument that you


want to record (p. 34)

[LOOP EFFECTS]

Turning on the internal microphone (p. 34)

Use this button to call up the screen for setting the send level
of each track respective to the loop effects (p. 43, p. 108),
switching between reverb and chorus, setting the various
parameters, and more.

Headphones jack (

Using the Loop Effects/Track EQ (p. 108)


Loop Effect Parameter Functions (p. 111)

[PITCH CORRECTION]

Headphones (sold separately) are connected here. When


headphones are connected, the same output as that from
LINE OUT can be heard from the headphones.
* The headphone volume is adjusted with the MASTER fader.

13 MEMORY CARD slot


fig.00-202

Use this button to turn on and off the Pitch Correction. This
function adjusts the pitch of recorded vocals.
Eject button

Using the Pitch Correction (p. 114)

10
[REC MODE (Recording Mode)]
This button is used for selecting the recording mode.

Basic recording (p. 39, p. 48)


Bounce (Putting multiple tracks together) (p. 45, p. 58)
Mastering (p. 102)

11
MEMORY CARD indicator
This indicator will light up whenever data is being read from
or written to a memory card.

Never turn off the power while the indicator is lit. This may
corrupt the data on the memory card, possibly rendering the
card unusable.

20

This slot is where memory cards (CompactFlash) are inserted


when you want to save data. You cannot record unless you
have a memory card inserted here.

Eject button
Press this button to eject the memory card.

Panel Descriptions

CD-R/RW drive

1
2

Before you use the CD-R/RW drive, it is important that you first of all read Before Using CD-R/RW Discs (p. 6).

1.

Disc tray

Place the CD-R/RW discs on this tray.

2.

If excessive force is used to extract a disc, you risk causing


damage to the drive.

Access indicator

This indicator will light up whenever data is being read from


or written to a CD-R/RW disc.

3.

EJECT button

Press this button to eject a CD-R/RW disc from the drive


unit. Note that it will only be possible to eject the CD-R/RW
disc while the BR-900CD is powered up.

4.

Emergency eject hole

This hole is used when the disc tray must be opened in an


emergency.
It must not, therefore, be used on a regular basis and should
be treated as a last resort only when the disc cannot be
ejected in any other way (p. 7).

Display
4.

fig.00-203d

Displays the frame number of the current position of the


song.

4
5

Displays the menu screen, parameter setting screen, or other


information, depending on the type of settings being made.
If the screen is difficult to view, see Adjusting the Display
Contrast (p. 186).

1.

MEAS (MEASURE)

Displays the current position within the song. Indicated from


left to right are the measure, beat, and clock.

2.

TEMPO

The Rhythm tempo is indicated here.

3.

FRAME

TIME

At the factory settings, one second is set to 30 frames (nondrop). This is one type of a specification known as MTC
(MIDI Time Code), and when you use the BR-900CD to play
in synchronization with another MIDI device, you will need
to set both devices to the same MTC type.

Synchronizing Playback with a MIDI Sequencer (p. 158)

5.

REC MODE

The recording mode is indicated here.

6.

Level Meter

During play mode, the volume levels of instruments being


input, and volume levels of each track are displayed.
The levels displayed are the levels after the adjustments are
made with the INPUT LEVEL knob and TRACK fader (i.e.,
post fader). You can select the level meter to display each
type of level being set.

Displays the time of the current position of the song (hoursminutes-seconds).

21

Panel Descriptions

Rear Panel
fig.00-204

13

12

9
11

5 4

10

14

1.

GUITAR/BASS jack

High-impedance input jack to directly connect your guitar or


bass.

2.

MIC2 jack (XLR types)

These jack allows a mic to be connected. XLR jack is


provided.
The BR-900CD can supply phantom power to a condenser
microphone connected to this connector (p. 191).
* If the connection has been made to the GUITAR/BASS and the
MIC2 jacks, the GUITAR/BASS jack is given priority.

3.

MIC1 jacks (TRS/XLR types)

These jacks allow a mic to be connected. Both standard TRS


jacks (p. 26) and XLR jacks are provided.
The BR-900CD can supply phantom power to a condenser
microphone connected to this connector (p. 191).
* If microphones are connected to both jacks, the TRS jack is
given priority.

4.

LINE IN jacks

These are input jacks for analog audio signals.These jacks are
used to connect CD players and other audio devices and
keyboards, rhythm machines, and other external sound
modules.

5.

LINE OUT jacks

These are output jacks for the analog audio signal. You can
connect tape recorders, or other recording devices to record
the output analog signal from the BR-900CD.

6.

DIGITAL OUT connector

Optical connector for outputting digital audio signals. The


same sound that is output from LINE OUT is also output
from DIGITAL OUT. You can connect a DAT recorder or CD
recorder to this connector and make digital recordings of the
BR-900CDs output.

7.

USB connector

This is the connector for connecting your computer to the BR900CD with a USB cable.

22

8.

FOOT SW/EXP PEDAL jack

This is an input jack for connecting a separately sold foot


switch (BOSS FS-5U, Roland DP-2) or expression pedal
(BOSS Roland EV-5, BOSS FV-300L).
By using this FOOT SW jack, you can start/stop playback,
punch in/out, and more.
When an expression pedal is used, you can control the depth
of insert effects with your foot.

Using a Foot Switch or Expression Pedal (p. 187)

9.

MIDI OUT connector

Connector for sending MIDI data.Connect it to the MIDI IN


connector of an external MIDI device (rhythm machine or
sound module).

10. POWER switch


This is the power switch. It turns the power of the BR-900CD
on/off.

11. DC IN (AC Adaptor) jack


Connect the supplied AC adaptor (PSC-series) to this jack.

You must use only the PSC-series AC adaptor. Use of any


other adaptor may cause overheating or malfunctions.

12. Cord Hook


Wrap the cable around this hook so that the AC adaptor
cable is not pulled out accidentally.
* If the AC adaptor is disconnected during operation, your
important recorded data may be lost.

13. Security Slot (

http://www.kensington.com/

Panel Descriptions

Inserting Batteries
Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup,
you may experience a discomforting sensation, or
perceive that the surface feels gritty to the touch when
you touch this device, microphones connected to it, or
the metal portions of other objects, such as guitars.
This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge, which is
absolutely harmless. However, if you are concerned
about this, connect the ground terminal (rear panel: see
figure 14 ) with an external ground. When the unit is
grounded, a slight hum may occur, depending on the
particulars of your installation.
If you are unsure of the connection method, contact the
nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the Information sheet.
Unsuitable places for connection
Water pipes (may result in shock or electrocution)
Gas pipes (may result in fire or explosion)
Telephone-line ground or lightning rod (may be
dangerous in the event of lightning)

1. Make sure that the power of the BR-900CD is turned


off.
2. Remove the battery cover on the rear panel.
* When turning the unit upside-down, get a bunch of
newspapers or magazines, and place them under the four
corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and
controls. Also, you should try to orient the unit so no buttons
or controls get damaged.
* When turning the unit upside-down, handle with care to avoid
dropping it, or allowing it to fall or tip over.
3. Being careful not to reverse the polarity (+/-), insert six
AA dry-cell batteries into the battery compartment.
* BOSS recommends using longer-life alkaline batteries.
* Do not mix new batteries with partially used batteries, and do
not mix batteries of differing types.
* Do not use rechargeable batteries.
4. Close the battery cover.
fig.00-205

When the battery power becomes low, Battery Low!


appears in the display. When this message appears, replace
the existing batteries with new ones as soon as possible.

23

MEMO

24

Quick
Start

25

Connecting Peripheral Devices


Make connections as shown in the diagram below. When making any connections, make sure that all devices are turned off.
fig.00-301

Mic

Electric Guitar
or
Electric Bass

CD Recorder etc.

Rhythm Machine etc.

AC Adaptor
(PSC-series)

Foot Switch
(FS-5U etc.)

CD Player etc.
Audio Set etc.

Expression Pedal
(Roland EV-5 etc.)

Keyboard etc.

To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other


devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the
power on all devices before making any connections.

To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your


unit (should the plug be pulled out accidentally), and to
avoid applying undue stress to the AC adaptor jack,
anchor the power cord using the cord hook, as shown in
the illustration.

fig.00-302

Feedback could be produced depending on the location


of microphones relative to speakers. This can be
remedied by:
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from
speakers.
3. Lower the volume.

* Two types of MIC inputs are included, TRS phone type jacks
compatible with balanced input, and XLR type connectors.
The pin assignment for the MIC jack is as shown below. Before
making any connections, make sure that this pin assignment is
compatible with that of all your other devices.
fig.00-303

26

Connecting Peripheral Devices

* When using the FS-5U foot switch (sold separately), set the
polarity switch as shown below. If the polarity switch is not set
correctly, the foot switch may not operate properly.
fig.00-304

Polarity Switch

* You can also use an FS-6 (optional) for the foot switch. If
using an FS-6, connect to only one of the FS-6's jacks, either
the A or B jack. Additionally, set the polarity switch to FS5U. The A&B jack cannot be used.
* If using an expression pedal (EV-5 or FV-300L), set the MIN
volume level to 0.

Inserting a Memory Card


Insert the memory card (CompactFlash) with the goldcolored contacts facing downward (the side without contacts
should be facing upward).

Quick Start

* Carefully insert the memory card all the way in-until it is


firmly in place.
* Do not touch the contacts of the memory card or allow them to
become dirty.
fig.00-305

Before inserting the memory card, be sure to first turn off the
BR-900CD. If a memory card is inserted when the power is
turned on, the data in the memory card may be destroyed, or
the memory card may become unusable.

27

Turning On / Off the BR-900CD


Turning On the Power

Turning Off the Power

Once the connections have been completed, turn on power to


your various devices in the order specified. By turning on
devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction
and/or damage to speakers and other devices.

1. Make sure that playback of the song is stopped.

1. Before you turn the power on, make sure of the


following points.

Are all external devices connected properly?

Is the volume on the BR-900CD and all other devices


completely lowered?

Is the memory card inserted?

* The BR-900CD is shipped with a memory card already


inserted in the slot.
2. Lower the MASTER fader on the BR-900CD.
fig.00-306

Always make sure that the recorder is stopped before


turning off the power to the BR-900CD. Turning off the
power while recording or playback is in progress may result
in the deletion of (song) data, mixer settings, and/or effect
patch data.
2. Turn off the power to each device in the reverse order
used for powering up.
3. Turn the BR-900CDs POWER switch off.

Play Screen
The Play screen is the most fundamental screen of the
BR-900CD, and is the first screen that appears when the
BR-900CD is turned on (see below).
fig.00-308d

3. Turn on the devices connected to the input jacks (i.e.,


GUITAR/BASS, MIC 1, MIC 2, or LINE IN).
4. Turn on the POWER switch located on the rear panel.
fig.00-307

* Always make sure to have the volume level turned down before
switching on power. Even with the volume all the way down,
you may still hear some sound when the power is switched on,
but this is normal, and does not indicate a malfunction.
* This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval
(a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will
operate normally.
5. Turn on the device connected to the output jack (i.e.,
LINE OUT or DIGITAL OUT).

If you are using the AC adaptor, make sure that the AC


adaptor does not become unplugged during operation. If the
AC adaptor becomes unplugged accidentally, the recorded
data may become damaged.

28

Listening to a Demo Song


Selecting a song (Song Select)

If you have changed the recording or editing

Upon power-up, the song that was selected before the power
was turned off is selected, and the data of that song is loaded.
As soon as the data has been loaded, the Play screen appears
in the display.

Since the BR-900CD automatically updates the recorded data


and operation content if the recording or editing have been
changed, you do not need to perform any special operations
for saving.

To listen to a demo song, follow the procedure given below.

During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper


line of the display, while the lower line shows what is being

fig.00-312

processed.

* If you try to record or edit data using a protected demo song,


Protected! appears.

3
2,4
2

Playing back a song


1. Move the TRACK faders 16, 7/8 and the RHYTHM
fader to the positions shown in the figure below, and
lower the MASTER fader.
fig.00-315

1. Press [UTILITY].
] to move the cursor to SEL,

Quick Start

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

The Song Select screen appears.


2. Press [PLAY].

fig.00-313d

fig.00-316

The song starts. Slowly increase the MASTER fader and


adjust the volume to the desired level.

3. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select 01: SOLOBANG.


Title

Composer

SOLOBANG!

Yutaka Nakano

Copyright
Copyright 2005
BOSS Corporation

Use of the demo song supplied with this product for any
purpose other than private, personal enjoyment without the
permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law.
Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a
secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the
copyright holder.

By adjusting the TRACK faders, you can listen to the


individual sounds recorded to each track one at a time or
listen to them at the balance you desire.

4. Press [ENTER].
Press [FF] to fast-forward the song and press [REW] to
rewind the song. Press [ZERO] to move to the time
location 00:00:00-00.0.

29

Listening to a Demo Song

In addition to the procedures given above, you can also


change your current position in the song using the
procedures given below.

Changing the current position


Elapsed time display
The value given at TIME in the display shows the elapsed
time into the song using MTC (MIDI time codes) and is
expressed as follows: hours-minutes-seconds-frames-sub
frames.
The time code specifications can differ depending on the
device. To synchronize operation with another device using
MTC, you will first need to match the time code
specifications of both devices. At the factory settings, one
second is set to 30 frames (non-drop) (p. 158).

Moving to the start of a play


To move to the time where the first sound of a song is
recorded, press and hold [STOP] and press [REW].
Each V-Track of the selected track is checked and you move
to the time of the first recorded sound for the song.
Press [ZERO] to move to the time location 00:00:00-00.0.

Moving to the end of a play


To move to the time where the last sound of a song is
recorded, press and hold [STOP] and press [FF].
Each V-Track of the selected track is checked and you move
to the time of the last recorded sound for the song.
fig.00-317

TIME
00:00:00-00.0

23:59:59-29.9

Section of the song recorded


[ZERO]

30

[STOP] + [REW]

[STOP] + [FF]

Moving through a song using hours,


minutes, seconds, frames, or sub
frames
Press [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to hours, minutes,
seconds, frames, or sub-frames display, and turn the TIME/
VALUE dial to change the current time in the song.

Moving through a song in measures or


beats
The current positions measure beatclock are displayed at
the location MEAS (measure) in the display.
* For the demo songs, a Arrangement (p. 37, p. 120) has already
been created and it is set so that measure, beat, clock, and song
is properly synchronized.
Press [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to measure or beat
display, and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
current measure or beat in the song.
* You cannot move the cursor to Clock (cannot be altered).

Recording/Playing Back a Song


(1) Preparing the Memory Card

fig.00-401

1 4
The BR-900CD writes the recorded data directly to the
inserted memory card. Therefore, for recording or playback,
the memory card must be inserted.

2,3,4

Memory Cards Supported by Your BR-900CD (p. 16)

2,3
Inserting the memory card
Before inserting the memory card (CompactFlash), be sure to
first turn off the BR-900CD. If a memory card is inserted
when the power is turned on, the data in the memory card
may be destroyed, or the memory card may become
unusable.
1. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot.
The supplied memory card still has some remaining
space; however, for extended recording, you will need to
erase some of the demo song or prepare a new memory
card (64 MB or greater is recommended).

1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to INI,

fig.00-402d

Quick Start

* The demo songs are protected.


To delete the demo songs, first remove the protections, then
carry out the deletion.

Protecting a Song (Song Protect) (p. 79)


Erasing Songs (Song Erase) (p. 77)

(2) Turning On the Power


Use the procedure described in Turning On the Power (p.
28).

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


CARD, and press [ENTER].
Are you sure? appears.
fig.00-403d

Formatting the memory card


(Initialize)
* This is not necessary for memory cards that have already been
used with the BR-900CD.
Newly purchased memory cards, or memory cards that have
been used previously with a computer will need to be
prepared so they can be used with the BR-900CD.
Carry out the following steps in the order given to complete
the procedure (this preparation process is called
Initializing).

31

Recording/Playing Back a Song

4. To continue with the initializing, press [ENTER] (YES).


To cancel the operation, press [EXIT] (NO) (or
[UTILITY]).
When [ENTER] (YES) is pressed, initializing begins.
When the initializing has been completed, Completed!
appears in the display.
Keep power on! Song creating... then appears in the
display, and a new song is automatically created.
In this case, the data type selected is HiFi (MT2).
When creation of the song is finished, the play screen
returns to the display.
* Depending on the capacity of the memory card, initializing
may take more than ten minutes to complete. This is not a
malfunction. The progress of the initializing is shown in the
display. Do not turn off the BR-900CD until the initializing
has been completed.

Do not remove the memory card or turn off the BR-900CD


while the display shows Keep power on! Doing so can
destroy the data on the memory card and/or render the
memory card itself unusable.

(3) Selecting the Song to Record


When the memory card contains more than one song, the
song that was recorded last is automatically selected.
To record a new song, follow the procedure given below.

Recording a new song (Song New)


About data types
When you record a new song, the BR-900CD allows you to
set the data type. This enables you to select the combination
of audio quality and recording time that is most suitable for
the material you are recording. The following data types can
be selected.
* The data type of a song cannot be changed after it is created.

HiFi (MT2) (multitrack 2):


For high-quality recordings. This data type is recommended
when you will be doing a lot of track bouncing. Normally
you should select this type. Use this type for most of your
recordings.

STD (LV1) (live 1):


For recordings that will take longer than what can be
provided with the MT2 data type. This is the most suitable
setting for recording live performances.

LONG (LV2) (live 2):


Of the three data types, this provides the longest recording
time. This is convenient when the card has little recording
capacity.

Recording time
The recording times possible for each data type on one
memory card are given below (when recording one track).
Data type
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
1 GB

Recording time (times approximate)


HiFi (MT2)
STD (LV1)
LONG (LV2)
16 min.
19 min.
24 min.
32 min.
39 min.
49 min.
65 min.
78 min.
98 min.
130 min.
156 min.
196 min.
260 min.
312 min.
392 min.
520 min.
624 min.
784 min.

* The recording times shown above are approximate. Depending


on the number of songs, the allowable recording time may
decrease.
* The recording times shown above are for when only one track
is used. For example, if you record on all eight tracks, the
recording time for each track will be 1/8th of the time shown
above.
* The CompactFlash memory cards supported by your BR900CD are 32 MB to 1 GB CompactFlash cards for use with a
3.3 V power supply voltage.

32

Recording/Playing Back a Song

(4) Connecting Instruments

fig.00-405

3
2,4,5
2

Choose which jack you will use


to connect your instrument
Your BR-900CD is equipped with a number of input jacks to
match the type of instrument that you will connect. Select an
instrument appropriate for your purposes.
fig.00-408

1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to NEW,

Type appears in the display.


fig.00-406d

GUITAR/BASS:
An electric guitar or bass can be connected to this jack. Since
this is a high-impedance input, a guitar or bass can be
connected directly.

MIC1:
These jacks allow a mic to be connected. Both standard TRS
and XLR jacks are provided.

* If both jacks are being used, the TRS jack is given priority.
* If you are recording an electric acoustic guitar using a shielded
connection, use the GUITAR/BASS jack.
* Phantom power can be supplied via the XLR connector (p.
191).
3. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the desired data
type.
* The BR-900CD uses a sample rate of 44.1 kHz. It is not
possible to change the sample rate.
4. Press [ENTER].
Are you sure? appears.
fig.00-407d

MIC2:
This jack allows a mic to be connected. XLR jack is provided.
* If the connection has been made to the GUITAR/BASS and the
MIC2 jacks, the GUITAR/BASS jack is given priority.
* Phantom power can be supplied via the XLR connector (p.
191).

LINE:
When connecting to the output of a CD player, cassette
player, or other audio device, or to a rhythm machine,
external sound module, keyboard, or other sound source, use
the stereo input jacks.

5. Press [ENTER].
When the new song is ready, you are returned to the
Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

33

Quick Start

The standard TRS type allows for both balanced and


unbalanced connections.

Recording/Playing Back a Song

Press the INPUT SELECT button of the


instrument that you want to record

Turning on the internal microphone


fig.00-410

13

Select the input source to record. The indicator of the selected


button will light.

fig.00-409

[GUITAR/BASS/MIC2]
Select to record the instrument connected to the GUITAR/
BASS jack or MIC 2 jack.

[MIC]
Select to record the signal from a microphone connected to
the MIC1 jack or from the internal microphone.
When the MIC indicator for the INPUT SELECT button is lit,
you can use both the microphone connected to the MIC1 jack
and the internal microphone simultaneously.

1. In the Play screen, press the [MIC] INPUT SELECT


button.
The Mic Select screen appears while [MIC] is held down.
fig.00-411d

* Your BR-900CD is shipped with its internal microphone


turned off. When not using the internal microphone, be sure to
turn it on (see next section).

[LINE]
Select this when you wish to record the sound of an
instrument or CD player connected to the LINE jacks.

2. While still holding down [MIC], use the TIME/VALUE


dial to select ONBRD+EXT.
ONBRD+EXT:

[SIMUL]
To record the vocal and guitar at the same time, press
[GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] and [MIC] simultaneously. Both
indicators light, telling you that simultaneous recording is
now possible.
You can select the source even when you have two mics
connected simultaneously to the MIC 1 and MIC 2 inputs.
When two recording tracks are selected, the GUITAR/BASS/
MIC2 is recorded to Track 1, 3, 5, 7, and the MIC1 is recorded
to Track 2, 4, 6, 8.
When one recording track is selected, the GUITAR/BASS/
MIC2 and MIC1 are mixed and then recorded.

The built-in mic is switched on, and the input is a mix of


the sounds from the internal mic and the external mic
connected to MIC 1.
EXTERNAL:
The built-in mic is switched off, and the input consists
only of the sounds from the external mic connected to
MIC 1.
3. Release [MIC].
The internal mic is switched on.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
* You can also make the internal mic settings in the [UTILITY]
system parameters. For more details, refer to the Utility
Parameter List (p. 198).

34

Recording/Playing Back a Song

Adjusting the input sensitivity


When input from GUITAR/BASS/MIC2 or MIC1 is selected,
adjust their input sensitivity with the relevant SENS knob.
fig.00-412a

(5) Using Insert Effects


The BR-900CD comes with five onboard effects processors:
an insert effect, loop effects, track EQ, pitch correction and
mastering tool kit. Below is an explanation of the operations
related to the insert effects.

What is an insert effect?

In order to record at a good sound level, you should adjust the


input levels so that the PEAK indicator lights momentarily
when a guitar is strummed strongly or vocals are sung loudly.

An effect added directly to a specific signal (with the BR900CD, this refers to the instrumental sounds from an INPUT
jack) is called an insert effect. The effect pedals that a
guitarist connects between his guitar and amp are a type of
insert effect. Loop effects, on the other hand, are effects
connected to the send/return jack of mixers and other similar
devices. (refer to p. 43)

Adjusting the input level


Adjust the volume of the input source for recording.
1. Lower the MASTER fader.
2. Turn the INPUT LEVEL knob to its center position and
then slowly increase the MASTER fader.
ig.00-421b

The volume level is adjusted with the MASTER fader


and INPUT LEVEL knobs.

Level meter display

The BR-900CD provides numerous effects for vocals, guitar,


etc., and two or more of these effects can be used
simultaneously. Such a combination of effects (i.e., the types
of the effects used and the order in which they are connected)
is called an algorithm.
Each effect in an algorithm offers a certain number of parameters,
which allow the sound to be altered (similar to tweaking the knobs
on a stomp pedal). The algorithm and its parameter settings are
bundled into units called effect patches.
By changing the effect patch, you can simultaneously change
the stored effect combinations, their on/off status, and the
parameter settings, and completely change the sound.

This shows the volume levels for each track.

1. Press [EFFECTS] to display the currently selected effect


patch.

fig.00-413d

fig.00-414d

P: Preset / S: Song / U: User


Algorithm
Name

Bank

Number

Patch Name

IN:
The level meter shows the input from INPUT.

18:
The level meter shows the output of Tracks 18.

RHYTHM:
The level meter shows the output of Rhythm.

LR:
The Level meter shows the post-MASTER fader output level.
When monitoring the sound with headphones, use the
MASTER fader to adjust the volume to the level you desire.

Your BR-900CD allows you to automatically select the


most suitable banks by pressing an INPUT SELECT
button.
For example, pressing the [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2]
INPUT SELECT button changes you to a guitar bank
patch, and pressing [LINE] changes you to a line bank
patch.
Banks are a collection of effect patches.

35

Quick Start

At this time, use the INPUT LEVEL knob to adjust the


input level so that the level changes in the -12 (between
-24 and -6)0 dB range of the IN level meter.

Switch effect patches

Recording/Playing Back a Song

GTR:
Effect patches for use with guitars.
MIC:
Effect patches for use on the sound from the MIC input
(i.e., vocals).
LIN (LINE):
Effect patches for use on the sound from CDs, MDs, and
other external devices from the LINE input.

Effect patches for recording vocals and a guitar together.

Effect Patches and Banks (p. 84)


][

Preset patches (P)


The preset patches contain preset data. Their settings can
be changed, but you cannot create a new preset patch.
User patches (U)
User patches can be rewritten, and are stored in internal
memory. If you have created a patch that you would like
to use for other songs as well, it is convenient to store it
as a user patch.
Song patches (S)
Like user patches, song patches can be written; however,
the data for song patches are stored along with the song
data to the memory card. This is convenient when you
have created a patch for a specific recorded performance,
and would like to store that patch together with the
song.
fig.00-415

BR-900CD

Memory Card
Song

User
Patch

Song
Patch

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to align the cursor up with


the patch number, and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the patch number.
4. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.

For more details regarding the use of insert effects, refer to


Using the Insert Effects (p. 84).

36

Press [EFFECTS] repeatedly to turn off the insert effects.


The indicator goes out, and the sound will be recorded
without insert effects.

] to align the cursor up with

the effect patch, and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to


change the effect patch.

Preset
Patch

Effect Patch List (p. 202)


Algorithm List (p. 88)

Recording without insert effects

SML (SIMUL):

2. Press CURSOR [

Some effect patches are particularly effective for stereo


recording.
For recording in stereo, refer to Selecting the recording
track (p. 39).

Selecting INPUT <REC DRY> as the point to which the


insert effects are connected allows you to record the sounds
without the insert effects while listening to the sounds with
the insert effects applied.

Changing How the Insert Effects are Used According to the


Mode (p. 87)

Recording/Playing Back a Song

(6) Using the Rhythm

Playing the Rhythm

What is the Rhythm?

Each time you press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] of the


Rhythm, the status changes as shown below.

When you record, it is convenient to use the built-in Rhythm.

fig.00-417

The Rhythm is a dedicated Rhythm track that can not only


play back Rhythm sounds as a guide during recording, you
can also use it to play internal Rhythm patterns and original
user-created Rhythm patterns and to play and record these
patterns as your own Rhythm part performances.
By using the Rhythm during recording, you can use the track
editor to edit in units of measures, synchronize outputs with
an external device, and perform other useful operations. For
more details, refer to Editing the Performance on a Track
(Track Editing) (p. 67) and Synchronizing Playback with a
MIDI Sequencer (p. 158).
You can also change the tempo or Rhythm pattern during a
song. For more details, refer to Section 4 Using the Rhythm
(p. 119).
The Rhythm features two modes, Pattern mode and
Arrangement mode.

ARRANGE: Lit (Arrangement Mode)


When you press [PLAY] to start playback or recording the
Rhythm arrangement. When [STOP] is pressed, the Rhythm
arrangement stops as well.

PATTERN: Flashing (Pattern Mode)


When you press [PLAY] to start playback or recording the
Rhythm pattern. When [STOP] is pressed, the Rhythm
pattern stops as well.
No sound plays if BREAK is selected for the pattern (p. 207).

OFF: Unlit
The Rhythm is turned off.
* When you adjust the volume of the Rhythm, use the Rhythm fader.

Pattern Mode

Quick Start

fig.00-418a

You can perform patterns and create your own original


patterns.

Arrangement Mode
You can perform arrangements and create your own original
arrangements.
Patterns and arrangements are composed as shown below.

Pattern
These are drum performance phrases from one to several
measures in length.

Changing arrangements
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator lights up.
fig.00-418

Internal patterns (preset patterns) include prepared patterns


for intros, verses, fill-ins, and endings.

Arrangement
Patterns arranged in the order they are performed (for
example, intro, verse, fill-in, and ending) and played at the
selected tempo comprise a song.
fig.00-416

Intro

Verse

Fill

Verse

Ending

2. Select an arrangement.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the Preset/Song and number.
fig.00-419d

P: Preset / S: Song
Number Arrangement Name

The Rhythm is preset with a wide variety of arrangements,


including the sound of a normal metronome. For more
details regarding the preset arrangements, refer to
Arrangement / Pattern List (p. 206).

37

Recording/Playing Back a Song

Preset Arrangements (P)


The preset arrangements contain preset data.
Their settings cannot be changed, and you cannot create
a new preset arrangement.
Song Arrangements (S)
Song arrangements can be written; however, the data for
song arrangements are stored along with the song data
to the memory card.
fig.00-420

BR-900CD

Memory Card
Song

Preset
Arrangement

Song
Arrngement

Changing the tempo of the


arrangements or patterns
You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or
pattern being played by carrying out the following
procedure while the Play screen is displayed.
* The arrangements tempo setting is temporarily disabled.
1. Use [CURSOR] and align the cursor up with TEMPO
in the display.
2. Rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the tempo.
fig.00-421d

Tempo

3. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.

Changing patterns
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.00-420a

* The change in tempo is only temporary. If you want to change


the arrangements actual tempo, refer to Changing the tempo
of the arrangements or patterns (p. 122).
* Tempos cannot be saved to patterns.

2. Select a pattern.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the Preset/Song and number.
fig.00-420bd

P: Preset / S: Song
Number Pattern Name

Tapping to change the tempo of


the arrangements or patterns
You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or
pattern by the timing with which you press [TAP].
Tap on [TAP] four or more times to change the tempo of the
arrangement or pattern. The tempo becomes that in which
you tapped.
* The arrangements tempo setting is temporarily disabled.
fig.00-422

Preset Patterns (P)


The preset patterns contain preset data.
Their settings cannot be changed, and you cannot create
a new preset pattern.
Song Patterns (S)
Song patterns can be written; however, the data for song
patterns are stored along with the song data to the
memory card.
fig.00-420c

BR-900CD

Memory Card
Song

Preset
Pattern

Song
Pattern

3. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.

38

* The change in tempo is only temporary. If you want to change


the arrangements actual tempo, refer to Changing the tempo
of the arrangements or patterns (p. 122).
* Tempos cannot be saved to patterns.

Recording/Playing Back a Song

(7) Basic Recording

fig.00-425

(Recording in Mono)

Selecting the recording track


1. Press either [1][7/8] at REC TRACK to select the
recording track.
If the button flashes in red, that track is ready for
recording.

(Recording in Stereo)

fig.00-423

If INPUT SELECT [LINE] or [SIMUL] are lit


The status of each track can be determined from the
indicator on the button.
Off:

No recorded data exists on the track.

Green:

Recorded data exists on the track.

Red:

The track is selected for recording.

fig.00-426

or

If a track with existing data is selected for recording, the


indicator will light alternately in orange and green.

fig.00-424

or

However, if you want to mix together the left and right


channels being input onto one track, with tracks 1 and 2
selected, press REC TRACK [1] again to select track 1. Using
the same procedure, you can select any track 1 to 6 to be the
track to which to record.
In addition, Tracks 7/8 are stereo tracks, so they always
produce stereo recordings.

Since the input is mono, the recording is normally performed


as a mono recording onto one track. Press one of TRACK [1]
[6] at REC TRACK to select the one track to which to record.
However, if you want to record in stereo to increase the effect
of insert effects, you can simultaneously press the [1] and [2],
[3] and [4] or [5] and [6], REC TRACK buttons for stereo
recording onto two tracks.

About the recording (REC) modes


Recording on the BR-900CD is separated into three main
modes.
Use whichever mode is suitable in the course of bringing
your song to completion.
fig.00-427

In addition, Tracks 7/8 are stereo tracks, so they always


produce stereo recordings.

INPUT
1
2
3
.
.
.
8

Guitar
Bass
Vocal

BOUNCE
1
2

L
R

Mixing down
to two tracks

MASTERING
1
2

L
R

Finishing the song


with levels optimized

Keyboard

39

Quick Start

If INPUT SELECT [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2]


or [MIC] are lit

Since the input is stereo, the recording is normally performed


on two tracks. Press either REC TRACK [1] or [2] to select
tracks 1 and 2, or [3] or [4] to select tracks 3 and 4.

Recording/Playing Back a Song

INPUT:
Only the instrument sounds or other input sources are
recorded to the tracks. Sounds played back from other tracks
are not recorded.

Procedure
fig.00-428a

BOUNCE:
As the sounds on different tracks are played back, they are
recorded together onto another track. In Bounce mode, you
can play back eight tracks simultaneously and record them
all to a single, separate V-Track.
When the input source is selected with INPUT SELECT, you
can also include those sounds in the recording.
You can further include the sounds from the Rhythm in the
recording as well.
You can also select the CD-R/RW drive as the recording
destination (p. 59).

MASTERING:

4 3 2
1. Press [REC MODE] repeatedly until INPUT is
indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen.
fig.00-428d

Here, you apply the Mastering Tool Kit to the two tracks to
which other tracks have been bounced to finish up with a
song with levels (volume) optimized.
* The Rhythm cannot be used in this mode.

What is a Mastering Tool Kit?


When creating an audio CD from your recorded songs, or
recording to an MD or similar media, the overall volume
needs to be restrained, so that even the loudest portions of the
songs are handled appropriately on the CD or MD. However,
this often results in an overall lowering of the volume,
resulting in a CD or MD that lacks excitement and impact.
Moreover, in the low-frequency range, to which the human
ear is not very sensitive, the sound actually produced might
be perceived as being somewhat low in volume, even though
the meter shows that its at the maximum level. This also
makes it difficult to create powerful sounds.
With the Mastering Tool Kit, however, you can smooth out
the differences in volume that occur over the course of a
song, while also correcting the balance in the low end.

2. Press [REC].
[REC] flashes in red and the BR-900CD enters the
recording standby state.
fig.00-429

Flash

3. Press [PLAY].
The [REC] and REC TRACK buttons stop flashing in red
and instead light solidly, and recording starts.
fig.00-430

Lit

We recommend mastering with the Mastering Tool Kit in the


final stage of creating songs.
4. When you finish recording, press [STOP].
Mastering (p. 102)
Mastering Tool Kit Patch List (p. 205)

The REC TRACK button lights alternately in orange and


green, indicating that track contains recorded data.
* You cannot play back sounds recorded for less than one
second.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

40

Recording/Playing Back a Song

(9) Overdubbing
(Recording an additional performance
while listening to an existing performance)

How the Tracks Are Organized


The BR-900CD features eight audio tracks that can be
used for recording and playback. Tracks 1 through 6 are
independent mono tracks. Tracks 7 and 8 are linked as
stereo tracks.
Tracks 7 and 8 are fixed as left and right tracks,
respectively, while fader movements, Loop Effects, and
other processes are applied in common to both tracks.
These two tracks thus make a convenient bounce
destination (p. 58).
Tracks 7 and 8 also become dedicated mastering tracks
during mastering (p. 102).

The tracks for which the REC TRACK button is lit in green
(or alternately in orange and green) are tracks that already
have data recorded on them.
The process of listening to a previously recorded
performance while you record additional material on
another track is called overdubbing. By recording the bass,
guitar, and vocals on different tracks, you can then adjust the
volumes of each instrument with respect to one another,
change the left-right sound balance, exchange data, and
perform other operations.
fig.00-434a

In addition to, and separate from the audio tracks, the


BR-900CD also includes dedicated stereo tracks for
playback of the internal rhythms (p. 37).

(8) Playing Back Recorded Music


fig.00-431

5 4 3

2. Press [PLAY].
Use the TRACK faders to adjust the volume separately
for each track.

Silencing the sound of specific


tracks (Track Mute)
During playback, hold down [DELETE/MUTE] and press a
REC TRACK button that is lit in green and orange alternating
or green.
The REC TRACK button will change to blinking in orange or
green, and the sound of that track will be muted (silenced).
If you repeat the same operation, the button will return to its
previous lit state and the sound of that track will once again
be heard.

1. Press one of REC TRACK [1][7/8] to select the track to


which to record.
By selecting a different track to record from the track
that you previously recorded, you can record a new part
while listening to the previously recorded part.
The status of each track can be determined from the
indicator on the button.
Off:

No recorded data exists on the track.

Green:

Recorded data exists on the track.

Red:

The track is selected for recording.

If a track with existing data is selected for recording, the


indicator will light alternately in orange and green.
* If you choose a track to record that already contains data
(where the REC TRACK button is lit in green), the indicator
lights alternately in orange and green, and the new music
overwrites the previously recorded data.

fig.00-433

2. Adjust the faders so the tracks being played back are at


a suitable level.
3. Press [REC].
[REC] flashes in red and the BR-900CD enters the
recording standby state.

41

Quick Start

1. Press [ZERO] to move to the time location 00:00:00-00.0.

Recording/Playing Back a Song

4. Press [PLAY].
The [REC] and REC TRACK button indicators change
from flashing in red to being continually lit and
recording begins.
[PLAY] lights up.
Only what you are currently playing is recorded to the
new track. The music that is being played back is not
recorded.
* If you use the INPUT LEVEL knob to turn down the volume
of the input source during recording, the sound will be
recorded in the audio track at a low volume, so that noise will
be more apparent when you raise the volume of the audio track
for playback.If you want to lower the sound of the input source
that you are monitoring, lower the volume with the MASTER
fader.
To change the volume of the music being played back, use the
TRACK fader for the respective tracks.

(10) Adjusting the Sound for


Each Track
You can adjust the tone, panning, and volume balance for
each track individually.

Setting the positioning (pan) of the sound


1. Press [PAN/EQ].
fig.00-434b

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to PAN,

The Pan settings screen appears.


fig.00-434d

5. When you finish recording, press [STOP].


* You cannot play back sounds recorded for less than one
second.

Some tips for overdubbing


When you record new material while listening to a
recorded performance, your playing may tend to be
buried in the existing performances, making it difficult
for you to play. In this case, you can slightly lower the
faders of the playback tracks, or pan the playback tracks
to left (or right) and the sound you are playing to right
(or left) to make it easier to hear yourself.

Setting the positioning (pan) of the sound (p. 42)


Changing the Position of the Input Sound (Pan) (p. 49)

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and turn the TIME/VALUE


dial to change each track pan settings.
* Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track
corresponding to the button pressed.
* Pressing [ENTER] sets this to C00 (Center).
4. Press [EXIT] (or [PAN/EQ]) to return to the Play screen.

Tracks 7 and 8 are stereo tracks, and any pan settings that are
made apply to both of the tracks as a pair.
When set to C00: Track 7 is panned left, and Track 8 is
panned right.
When set to L50: Both Track 7 and Track 8 are panned
left.
When set to R50: Both Track 7 and Track 8 are panned
right.

42

Recording/Playing Back a Song

Adjusting the tone (Track EQ)

Adding width to the sound (Loop Effect)

Track EQ is an independent two-band equalizer featured


on each track that allows you to adjust the high- and lowfrequency tonal qualities separately.

The BR-900CD features chorus, delay, and doubling (any one


of these three can be selected at any one time) as loop effects,
and includes reverb as well. Effective use of these allows you
to add greater breadth to the sound.

1. Press [PAN/EQ].
fig.00-435a

What is a loop effect?


Effects connected to the send and return of mixer effects are
called loop effects. You can adjust the depth of the effect by
changing the send level of each mixer channel (equivalent to
the tracks of the BR-900CD).

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to EQ,

The EQ settings screen appears.


fig.00-435d

Since the send levels for each track are separate, you can
change the depth individually. This allows you to, for
example, have a deep reverb on the vocals and slight reverb
on the drums, or any such combination.
Opposed to insert effects (p. 35), which are applied to specific
sounds, loop effects are applied to the complete track.
* You cannot use chorus, delay, and doubling simultaneously.
Any one may be selected while loop effects are in use.
1. Press [LOOP EFFECTS].
fig.00-437a

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and turn the TIME/VALUE


dial to turn each Track EQ on or off.

fig.00-437d

* Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track


corresponding to the button pressed.
4. When changing the EQ settings, press CURSOR [
]
repeatedly to display the parameter screen, then use the
[CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to change the
settings value.
fig.00-436d

For more on the settings content, refer to Track EQ


Parameter Functions (p. 112).

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] until FX Type or Type is


displayed, then turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
loop effect.

5. When you have finished making the settings, press


[EXIT] (or [PAN/EQ]) to return to the Play screen.

43

Quick Start

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to CHO/


DLY or REV, and press [ENTER].

Recording/Playing Back a Song

When using CHO/DLY


Select from CHORUS, DELAY, or DBLN (doubling).

6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


adjust each tracks send level.

fig.00-438d

* Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track


corresponding to the button pressed.
The send level is the volume level of the signal sent
from each respective track to each effect, and you can
change the amount of effect applied by adjusting the
send level.
When using REV
Select from HALL or ROOM.
fig.00-439d

The send level for each track is also indicated in the


lower row of the display.
fig.00-443d

4. If you want to change the settings for the selected


effect, press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the parameter,
then change the settings value with the TIME/VALUE
dial.

Send level of the each tracks

7. After you have completed adjusting the send level,


press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen

fig.00-440d

You can switch screens in the following sequence, with the


screen cycling to the next screen each time [LOOP EFFECTS]
is pressed.
Loop Effects selection screen Send Level screen
Type screen Play screen

For more on the settings content, refer to Loop Effect


Parameter Functions (p. 111).
5. Press CURSOR [
settings screen.

][

When using CHO/DLY


fig.00-441d

When using REV


fig.00-442d

44

] to display the Send Level

Recording/Playing Back a Song

(11) Bouncing

4. Press [PLAY].
The [REC] and REC TRACK buttons stop flashing in red
and instead light solidly, and recording starts.

(Putting multiple tracks together)


fig.00-444a

fig.00-447

Lit

5. When you finish recording, press [STOP].


* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

To prepare for further recording after the bouncing has been


completed, the BR-900CD automatically switches to an
empty V-Track at the bounce destination.

5 4 3
1. Press [REC MODE] repeatedly until BOUNCE is
indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen.
fig.00-444d

Recording Destination

After bouncing down to two tracks, you can use the


Mastering Tool Kit to eliminate discrepancies in volume
levels throughout the song and to achieve the proper lowend balance. Refer to Mastering (p. 102).

Quick Start

(12) Turning Off the Power


:

V-Tracks with recorded data.

V-Tracks without data.

What are V-Tracks? (p. 14)


2. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track/V-track to which you want to record.

You can also select the CD-R/RW drive as the recording


destination. For more details, refer to Bouncing Directly to a
CD-R/RW Disc (Direct CD Bounce) (p. 59).
3. Press [REC].
[REC] flashes in red and the BR-900CD enters the
recording standby state.
fig.00-446

Flash

To turn off the power, use the procedure described in


Turning Off the Power (p. 28).

Before you turn off the BR-900CD, make sure to first stop any
recording. If the BR-900CD is turned off during playback/
recording where the memory card is being accessed, the
recorded data, mixer settings, and effect patch data may be
lost.

(13) Removing the Memory Card


The power of the BR-900CD must be turned off before
removing a memory card. If a memory card is inserted when
the power is turned on, the data in the memory card may be
destroyed, or the memory card may become unusable.

45

MEMO

46

Section 1
Recording
and
Playback

47

Recording
Selecting the Recording Track
1. Press either [1][7/8] at REC TRACK to select the
recording track.

If INPUT SELECT [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2]


or [MIC] are lit
fig.01-102

If the button flashes in red, that track is ready for


recording.
or

fig.01-101

The status of each track can be determined from the


indicator on the button.
Off:

No recorded data exists on the track.

Green:

Recorded data exists on track.

Red:

The track is selected for recording.

If a track with existing data is selected for recording, the


indicator will light alternately in orange and green.

Since the input is mono, the recording is normally performed


as a mono recording onto one track. Press one of TRACK [1]
[6] at REC TRACK to select the one track to which to record.
However, if you want to record in stereo to increase the effect
of insert effects, you can simultaneously press the [1] and [2],
[3] and [4], or [5] and [6], REC TRACK buttons for stereo
recording onto two tracks.
In addition, Tracks 7/8 are stereo tracks, so they always
produce stereo recordings.
fig.01-103

(Recording in Mono)

(Recording in Stereo)

If INPUT SELECT [LINE] or [SIMUL] are lit


fig.01-104

or

Since the input is stereo, the recording is normally performed


on two tracks. Press either REC TRACK [1] or [2] to select
tracks 1 and 2, or [3] or [4] to select tracks 3 and 4.
However, if you want to mix together the left and right
channels being input onto one track, with tracks 1 and 2
selected, press REC TRACK [1] again to select track 1. Using
the same procedure, you can select any track 1 to 6 to be the
track to which to record.
In addition, Tracks 7/8 are stereo tracks, so they always
produce stereo recordings.

48

Recording

The BR-900CD is a eight-track multitrack recorder, and each


track consists of eight V-Tracks. You can select any one of
these V-Tracks for recording or playback.
Therefore, by making use of the many V-Tracks, you can use
the BR-900CD just as if it were a 64-track multitrack recorder.
This allows a wide range of uses, such as recording one take
of a guitar solo or vocal, and then recording another take
without having to erase the first one. You can also then take
just the portions of the V-Tracks that you like and put them
together onto one track.

Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing) (p. 67))

Changing the Position of the


Input Sound (Pan)
When you record new material while listening to a recorded
performance, your playing may tend to be buried in the
existing performances, making it difficult for you to play.
If this is the case, you can change the positioning (or
panning) of the INPUT (the instrument you are playing) and
record it so that it is not buried underneath the other sounds.
1. Press [PAN/EQ].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to PAN,

The PAN settings screen appears.


fig.01-107d

1. Press [V-TRACK].
fig.01-105

The V-Track Selection screen appears. This screen shows


the numbers of the selected V-Tracks for each track.
fig.01-106d

V-Tracks with recorded data.

V-Tracks without data.

3. Press CURSOR [

] to display IN.

fig.01-108d

2. Use the REC TRACK [1][7/8] to select the track to be


altered.
* You can also select tracks with CURSOR [

][

].

3. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial and change the V-Track.


4. After you finish changing the V-Track,
press [V-TRACK] (or [EXIT]) to return to the Play
screen.

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to change the pan settings.


The pan settings made here are automatically applied to
the track that you are recording to, so that after
recording is complete, you can listen to the track with
the same pan as that when it was recorded.
5. Press [PAN/EQ] (or [EXIT]) to return to the Play screen.

Pan the playback tracks to left (or right) and the sound you
are playing to right (or left) to make it easier to hear yourself.

49

Section 1

Changing V-Tracks

Recording

Recording Operations
1. Press [REC MODE] repeatedly until INPUT is
indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen.

* The following operations cannot be used, or are disabled, while


the recorder is in use (during recording and playback).
Recording patterns
Editing arrangements

fig.01-109d

Selecting drum kits


Switching to the USB screen
Switching to the Tone Load screen
Switching to the Song Selection screen
Switching to the Song New screen
Switching to the Song Information screen
2. Press [REC].

Switching to the Edit Song screen

[REC] flashes in red and the BR-900CD enters the


recording standby state.
fig.01-110

Flash

Track Editing
Switching to the Sync screen
Switching to the Initialize screen
Operating the CD-R/RW

3. Press [PLAY].
The [REC] and REC TRACK buttons stop flashing in red
and instead light solidly, and recording starts.
fig.01-111

Lit

4. When you finish recording, press [STOP].


The REC TRACK button lights alternately in orange and
green, indicating that track contains recorded data.
* You cannot play back sounds recorded for less than one
second.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

50

Repeating Playback (Repeat)


2. After registering the repeat start point (A), register the
repeat end point (B).

The position in the song where [REPEAT] is pressed first


becomes repeat start point (A), and the position where it is

fig.01-203

Move to the position where you want the repeat to end


and press [REPEAT].

pressed a second time becomes repeat end point (B). The


portion between the two points is then repeated during
playback.
fig.01-201

That position becomes repeat end point (B).

Repeat

The [REPEAT] indicator lights, telling you that the


repeat end point (B) has been registered.
Time
Repeat Start
(A)

Repeat End
(B)

Press [REPEAT] again to cancel the repeat function and


delete the start and stop points.

Setting the Repeat Portion


1. Enter the repeat start point (A).
Move to the position where you want the repeat to start
and press [REPEAT].
fig.01-202

To re-do the registration, press [REPEAT] once again.


The [REPEAT] indicator goes out, and the registered
repeat start point (A) and end point (B) are deleted.
Then press [REPEAT] again and register repeat start
point (A) and end point (B) as desired.
* There must be at least one second between repeat start point
(A) and repeat end point (B). It is not possible to set the end
point less than one second away from the start point.
* If you press [REPEAT] at a position before the repeat start
point (A), that earlier position is then set as the repeat start
point (A).
3. If you want to save the settings in the currently selected
song, hold down [STOP], and press [REC].

Saving the Current Settings to the Song (Song Save) (p. 79)

The position is set as repeat start point (A).


The [REPEAT] indicator begins to flash, telling you that
the repeat start point (A) has been registered.

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

If you wish to re-do the registration, you can cancel the


registered location by pressing [REPEAT] when the
current location is the same as the repeat start point (A).
If the current location is beyond the repeat start point
(A), press [REPEAT] twice to cancel the registration.
The [REPEAT] indicator goes out, and the registered
repeat start point (A) and end point (B) are deleted.

51

Section 1

By using the Repeat function you can repeatedly play back


a specified part. Repeating playback allows you to check the
mixing balance or perform loop recordings (p. 56) with the
punch in/out functions.

Repeating Playback (Repeat)

Setting the Repeat Portion


with Accurate Timing
Normally, the repeat start and end points are registered at
the exact position where [REPEAT] is pressed. This may
make it difficult for you to set the repeat portion exactly as
you desire.
If this is the case, you can use the quantize function to have
the time [REPEAT] is pressed be adjusted to the timing of the
song.
The quantize function allows you to set the timing in onemeasure units.
Perform the procedure given below to use the quantize
function.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SYS,

fig.01-204d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select AB Qtz, and turn


the TIME/VALUE dial to turn the setting on.
When off, the quantize function will not work.
fig.01-205d

4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return


to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
* Changing the tempo after having made the quantize function
settings in a repeated portion will result in timing
discrepancies between the repeat start and end points and the
beginnings and ends of measures.
* You can set the repeat portion to one measure by pressing
[REPEAT] twice at the same position.

52

When the repeat portion is set, you can use the following
functions to edit your recorded track data.
Copying the repeat portion (p. 67)
Moving the repeat portion (p. 70)
Erasing the repeat portion (p. 73)
Before using these functions, you can use the quantize
function to set the repeat portion with accurate timing.

Re-recording Only a Mistake (Punch-in/out)


Manually punching in and out
using [REC]

Changing to recording during the playback of a song is


referred to as punching in, and changing from recording to

As an example of use, the explanation below assumes you


are manually punching in and out to re-record a portion of
track 1, which is a track to which you have already recorded.

playback is referred to as punching out.

1. Press REC TRACK [1].

Therefore, punch in at the location where you want to begin


the re-recording, and punch out at the location where you
want the re-recording to end.

REC TRACK [1] lights alternately in orange and green.


2. Place the fader for track 1 at the location shown below.
fig.01-302

fig.01-301

Playback

Recording

Playback
Time

Start

Punch-In

Punch-Out

Stop

[PLAY]

[REC]

[REC]

[STOP]

With your BR-900CD, you can choose from manual or


automatic punching in/out.
* You can use the Undo function (p. 57) to revert to the
condition before re-recording.
* The data prior to punch-in/out will remain on the memory
card without being erased. If this data is no longer needed, in
order to use the memory card effectively, use the song optimize
function (p. 78) to delete unneeded data from the memory card.

3. Start playback and adjust the volume of the input


source using the INPUT LEVEL knob.
Listen to the track you will be re-recording and the input
source and adjust the volume of the input source using
the INPUT LEVEL knob so that it is the same level as the
track.
4. Move to a position before where you want to start rerecording and press [PLAY] to start playback.
5. Press [REC] to punch in at the location where you want
to start recording.

Manually Punching In/Out


You can use the button on the BR-900CD or a foot switch to
punch in or out.
When you are playing an instrument and performing the
recording by yourself, it may be difficult to punch in or out
using the button on the BR-900CD. If this is the case, you can
use a separately sold foot-switch (BOSS FS-5U, Roland DP-2,
etc.) and use your feet to punch in and out.
* When using manual punch-in/out, you need to allow for an
interval of at least one second between the punch-in and
punch-out points.

The BR-900CD starts recording.


6. To punch out, press [REC] (or [PLAY]) again.
Each time you press [REC], you punch in and punch out,
so if there is another location that you want to redo, then
you can punch in again at that location using the same
procedure.
7. Press [STOP] to stop recording.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
8. Listen to the re-recorded results.
Return the song to a point earlier than you re-recorded,
and play it back.
Adjust the volume of track 1 using the TRACK fader.

53

Section 1

You may occasionally make a mistake while recording, or the


performance may not turn out as you expect. In this case, you
can punch in/out to re-record only the portion that is
mistaken.

Re-recording Only a Mistake (Punch-in/out)

Manually punching in and out


using a foot switch
In operating the foot switch during playback of a song
(manual patch in and out), press the foot switch once to
punch in, then press it again to punch out.

In order to use a foot switch

Auto Punching In and Out


Automatically punching in and out at predetermined
locations (or times) in the song is referred to as auto
punching in/out.
When you want to punch in and out at accurate times or
when you want to concentrate on playing rather than
punching in and out manually, the auto punch in/out
function is very useful.

When you are using a foot switch (BOSS FS-5U, Roland DP-2,
etc.) to punch in and out, connect the foot switch to the
FOOT SW jack on the BR-900CD and change the function of
the FOOT SW jack by following the procedure given below.

Specifying the area for auto


punching in/out

1. Press [UTILITY].

Before you begin recording, you must register the locations


at which punch-in and punch-out will occur automatically.

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SYS,

1. Register the location where you want to punch in.


Move the location where you want to punch in and press
AUTO PUNCH [IN] to register that location for
automatic punch in.

fig.01-303d

At this time, the AUTO PUNCH [IN] indicator lights,


telling you that the punch-in position is registered.
fig.01-305

3. Press CURSOR [

][

] and select Foot SW.

fig.01-304d

* If the AUTO PUNCH [IN] indicator is lit, you will


automatically move to the registered punch-in time when this
button is pressed.
2. Register the location where you want to punch out.

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial and select PUNCH


(PUNCH IN/OUT).
5. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.

Move the location where you want to punch out and


press AUTO PUNCH [OUT] to register that location for
automatic punch out.
At this time, the AUTO PUNCH [OUT] indicator lights,
telling you that the punch-out position is registered.
fig.01-306

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
* If the AUTO PUNCH [OUT] indicator is lit, you will
automatically move to the registered punch-out time when this
button is pressed.

If you want to punch in/out at a previously set locator point,


press [LOCATOR] to move to the locator point (p. 64), and
press AUTO PUNCH [IN] or AUTO PUNCH [OUT].

54

Re-recording Only a Mistake (Punch-in/out)

To erase an auto punch-in location, press and hold


AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] and then press [IN].
To erase an auto punch-out location, press and hold
AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] and then press [OUT].

When the settings are erased, the AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF],


[IN], and [OUT] indicators go out.
* If you want to save the auto punch in/out settings in the
currently selected song, hold down [STOP], and press [REC].
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

6. Press [REC] to place the BR-900CD in recording


standby and then press [PLAY].
Recording automatically starts at the auto punch-in
location, so start playing what you want to record.
At the point you specified for punch-out, the track will
automatically change back to play mode.
7. Press [STOP] to stop recording.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
8. Listen to the re-recorded results.
Return the song to a point earlier than you re-recorded,
and play it back.
Adjust the volume of track 1 using the TRACK fader.

How to record
As an example of use, the explanation below assumes you
are using the auto punch in/out to re-record a portion of
track 1, which is a track to which you have already recorded.
1. Press REC TRACK [1].
REC TRACK [1] lights alternately in orange and green.
2. Place the fader for track 1 at the location shown below.
fig.01-307

3. Make sure that the AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] indicator


is dark.
If it is lit, press AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] to make the
indicator go dark.
4. Start playback and adjust the volume of the input
source using the INPUT LEVEL knob.
Listen to the track you will be re-recording and the input
source and adjust the volume of the input source using
the INPUT LEVEL knob so that it is the same level as the
track.
5. Move to a position before where you want to start rerecording and press AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF].
The indicator lights up, showing that the auto punch in
and out have been set.

55

Section 1

Erasing a registered auto punch


in/out location

Re-recording Only a Mistake (Punch-in/out)

Repeatedly Recording Over the


Same Location (Loop Recording)
The repeat function (p. 51) allows you to play a certain
portion of a song (the loop portion) over and over again.
If you used auto punch in/out together with the repeat
function, the portion will be repeated so the result of the
recording can be heard right away.
If the recording did not sound as you wished, simply press
[REC] and redo the recording.

How to record
As an example of use, the explanation below assumes you
are using the auto punch in/out to re-record a portion of
track 1, which is a track to which you have already recorded.
1. Press REC TRACK [1].
REC TRACK [1] lights alternately in orange and green.
2. Place the fader for track 1 at the location shown below.
fig.01-309

Using the repeat function and auto punch in/out together in


this manner to repeatedly perform recording is known as
loop recording.
* For details on how to set the portion where recording will
occur (the portion between the punch-in and punch-out
positions), refer to Auto punching in and out above.

Setting the portion to be repeated


Before you begin recording, you will need to set the starting
and ending position of the portion to be repeated.
* The portion to be repeated should contain the portion that you
wish to re-record (the portion between the punch-in and
punch-out points).

3. Use the repeat function (p. 51) to repeat the playback of


the song and adjust the volume of the input source
using the INPUT LEVEL knob.
Listen to the track you will be re-recording and the input
source and adjust the volume of the input source so that
it is the same level as the track.
4. Press [STOP].
5. Press AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF].
The indicator lights, showing that the auto punch in and
out have been set.

fig.01-308

6. When you are ready to record, press [REC], then press


[PLAY] to begin recording.

Repeat

Playback

Recording

Playback
Time

Repeat Start
(A)

Punch-In

Punch-Out Repeat End


(B)

If the portion to be re-recorded is not fully contained in the


repeat portion, the recording may not start or end as desired.

After you press [PLAY], you can record from the time
the first punch-in is reached until the time the punch-out
is reached. Re-record the portion as desired.
When the song is repeated, you can check the result of
what you just recorded. If the recording is not
satisfactory, press [REC] and perform the recording
again.
7. Press [STOP] to stop recording.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
8. Press [REPEAT] to make the button indicator go dark.
9. Press AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] to make the indicator
go dark.

56

Canceling an Operation (Undo/Redo)

The Undo function reverses the action you have just


performed and returns you to the status you were in

Reversing the Last Operation


(Undo)
1. Press [UNDO/REDO].
UNDO? appears.
fig.01-401d

beforehand. To reverse an Undo, you must use the Redo


function.
For example, suppose you are punching in to loop record
and record over the same location twice. To undo the
recording you just performed and return to the first
recording, you would use the Undo function.
To then reverse the Undo and return to the condition that
you were in immediately after the second recording, you
would use the Redo function.
* After you have performed an Undo, you can only perform a
Redo (you cannot perform an Undo again).

2. To execute Undo, press [ENTER] (YES).


Press [ENTER] to reverse the last performed recording or
editing operation.
If you decide not to Undo, press [EXIT] (NO).

* If you record something, or carry out Track Edit after


performing an Undo, it will no longer be possible to perform a
Redo.

Canceling the Undo (Redo)

* Undos only affect audio data recorded to the tracks. You


cannot undo changes made to parameter settings, or data other
than audio data.

1. Press [UNDO/REDO].

To reverse the Undo you just executed, perform a Redo.

REDO? appears.
fig.01-402d

* Keep in mind that the history of all operations youve carried


out with respect to the recorded data will be cleared as soon as
you carry out a Song Optimize (p. 78). This means that once
you execute Song Optimize, youll no longer be able to perform
an undo.

2. To execute Redo, press [ENTER] (YES).


The Undo you just performed is reversed.
If you decide not to Redo, press [EXIT] (NO).

57

Section 1

Occasionally when the recording you make may not turn out
as you wish, or the settings you make for an editing
operation are incorrect, and you want to reverse what you
have done. At these times, you can use the Undo function.

Putting Multiple Tracks Together (Bounce)


Although the BR-900CD allows the simultaneous playback of
eight tracks, when you run out of tracks, the BR-900CD also
lets you copy the recordings of multiple tracks together onto
one track (V-Track). This is called bounce (also known as
bounce recording or ping-pong recording). By combining
multiple tracks in this way, you can free up other tracks in
order to record additional performances.

In bounce mode, you can play back eight tracks


simultaneously and record them all to a single, separate
V-Track.
When input sources are selected with INPUT SELECT,
you can have those sounds recorded together.
Furthermore, you can include the sounds from the
Rhythm in the recording.
fig.01-601

TRACK 8-V1
TRACK 7-V1
TRACK 6-V1
TRACK 5-V1
TRACK 4-V1
TRACK 3-V1
TRACK 2-V1
TRACK 1-V1

INPUT

Track 18

The explanation below uses an example of mixing the


monaural recording on tracks 1 and 2 and the stereo
recording on tracks 3 and 4, and bouncing them to V-Track 2
of tracks 3 and 4.
1. Set the pan for tracks 1 and 2 to the locations you
desire, set the pan for track 3 all the way to the left
(L50), and the pan for track 4 all the way to the right
(R50).

Setting the positioning (pan) of the sound (p. 42)


2. Play back the song and adjust the volumes for the
tracks 1 to 4 using the REC TRACK faders.
The overall volume is adjusted by the MASTER fader. At
this time, raise the volume as high as possible without
allowing the sound to distort.
Lower the faders for the tracks that you do not want to
mix.
* When using bounce recording, you can record the sounds with

RHYTHM

Rhythm

insert effects (p. 84), loop effects (p. 108), Track EQ (p. 110),
or Pitch Correction (p. 114) applied. When using the insert
effects, refer to Changing How the Insert Effects are Used
According to the Mode (p. 87).
3. Press [STOP].
4. Press [REC MODE] repeatedly until BOUNCE is
indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen.

TRACK 8-V2
TRACK 7-V2

Separate V-Track

The INPUT SELECT indicator goes out, and the input


source is automatically muted. This prevents the input
source from being mixed in and recorded during bounce
recording.
* If you wish to mix an input source as part of the bounce
recording, press [INPUT SELECT] to select the desired input
source. At this time, you can apply loop effects (p. 108) to the
sound of the input source.
5. If you want to mix in the sound of the Rhythm as well,
increase the Rhythm fader.
If you do not want to record the Rhythm, lower the
fader.

58

Putting Multiple Tracks Together (Bounce)

Here, set this to 34V2 (V-Track 2 of Tracks 3 and 4).


fig.01-602d

Recording destination

V-Tracks with recorded data.

V-Tracks without data.

(When bouncing while recording in mono)


If you turn the TIME/VALUE dial at this time, the
screen for specifying the track for mono recording is
displayed.
fig.01-603d

Bouncing Directly to a CD-R/RW Disc


(Direct CD Bounce)
With the BR-900CD, you can bounce data directly to a CD-R/
RW disc instead of the audio tracks. This is a convenient way
to keep a copy of song sketches after recording them.

The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used


when tracks are bounced directly to a CD. Only the
audio tracks are bounced.
Due to differences in the characteristics of CD-R/RW
discs, there is no way to ensure 100% error-free writing.
For this reason, the bouncing may be discontinued if an
error occurs in writing to the CD-R/RW disc. Never use
this feature with your important recordings.
1. Prepare a blank CD-R/RW disc or a CD-R/RW disc to
which data has been written on the BR-900CD, but that
is not yet finalized (p. 143).
2. Place the CD-R/RW disc in the tray.
The CD-R/RW drives indicator begins flashing.
Wait until the indicator stops flashing.

7. After pressing [ZERO] to return to the time location


00:00:00-00.0, press [REC] and then press [PLAY] to start
bounce recording.

3. Press [REC MODE] a number of times until the


BOUNCE indicator lights.
The BR-900CD is switched to BOUNCE mode.
fig.01-604d

8. When you are finished recording, press [STOP].


* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
9. Lower all TRACK faders except those for Tracks 3 and
4, press [PLAY], and then check the sounds bounced to
Tracks 3 and 4.
* The pan for tracks 3 and 4, where the music was bounced, is
set all the way to the left and right respectively.

4. Use CURSOR [
select CD.

][

] and the TIME/VALUE dial to

fig.01-605d

10. If you want to save the settings in the currently selected


song, hold down [STOP], and press [REC].
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
* If you wish to mix an input source as part of the bounce
recording, press [INPUT SELECT] to select the desired input
source. See Selecting the Input Source and Bouncing the
Recording to a CD-R/RW (p. 60).

59

Section 1

6. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the recording-destination track/V-Track.

Putting Multiple Tracks Together (Bounce)

5. Press [REC].
The CD-R/RW drives motor begins spinning.
Now Checking... appears in the display.
The message disappears approximately ten seconds
later, indicating that preparations for bouncing have
been completed.

In contrast to normal recording, you cannot press [REC]


(manual punch in) after first pressing [PLAY].
The moment [REC] is pressed, a region with a minimum
of one song is created on the disc. Note that even if you
press [STOP] at this point without bouncing any tracks,
the song cannot be deleted.
6. Press [PLAY].
[PLAY] and [REC] light, and bouncing to the CD-R/RW
disc begins.
The sounds are written to the CD-R/RW disc exactly as
they are played back.
7. Press [STOP] when you reach the end of the song.
Keep power on! Closing Track... appears in the
display. The message disappears, indicating that the
bouncing have been completed.
Several seconds may be necessary before you can
proceed with the next operation.
8. To check the results of the bouncing, play the disc back
as an audio CD (p. 142).
9. To enable playback of the bounced tracks on a
conventional audio CD player, finalize the disc (p. 143).

Finalizing the CD-R/RW disc allows the content to be heard


using a regular CD player but prevents any further bouncing
or writing of tracks to the disc. Do not finalize the disc if you
want to bounce or write other tracks to it.

60

Selecting the Input Source


and Bouncing the Recording
to a CD-R/RW
You can simultaneously select the input source sounds and
record when bouncing directly to a CD, just as you can when
bouncing tracks in the normal manner.

1. Carry out Steps 14 in Bouncing Directly to a CD-R/


RW Disc (Direct CD Bounce) (p. 59).
2. Press one of the INPUT SELECT buttons to select the
input source you want.
The button for the selected input source lights up, and
the sounds of the input source become audible.
3. Carry out Step 5 and the subsequent steps in
Bouncing Directly to a CD-R/RW Disc (Direct CD
Bounce) (p. 59)
The input source sound is mixed with the sounds played
back from the tracks and bounced to the CD-R/RW disc.

You can also bounce only the input source sound to the CD
by completely lowering track faders 16 and 7/8 and the
RHYTHM faders.

Loading Songs Created with the BR-864/BR-532

Loading Songs Created with


the BR-864
First, save the song data created with the BR-864 to a
memory card, then insert the memory card into the BR900CD.

Once you record, edit, or set parameters for imported BR-864


song data, that particular song data can no longer be used by
the BR-864.
To protect against accidental recording or editing, song
protect (p. 79) is automatically switched on for imported BR864 song data.
If you can accept the fact that you will no longer be able to
use the song data with the BR-864, you can switch song
protect off, then carry out recording or editing.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SEL,

To record or edit, turn off song protect (p. 79).


When you turn off song protect, Overwrite OK? appears in
the display; press [ENTER] (YES). Song protect is switched
off, and the data is simultaneously converted to BR-900CD
format. After this step is executed, the song data can no
longer be used with the BR-864.

Loading Songs Created with


the BR-532
When copying song data created with the BR-532 from
SmartMedia to a BR-900CD memory card, you can load the
data as a BR-900CD song.

Reading BR-532 data requires a PC with a SmartMedia


reader and CompactFlash writer connected.
First, copy the data on the BR-532 memory card
(SmartMedia) to the PC with the SmartMedia reader, and use
the CompactFlash writer to copy that data from the PC to a
BR-900CD memory card.

The Song Select screen is appeared.

Then insert the memory card containing the copy of the


desired data into the BR-900CD.

The song protect icon (

1. Press [UTILITY].

) is indicated for the BR-864 songs.

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SEL,

The Song Select screen is appeared.

3. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select the song to be


loaded.
3. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select the song to be
loaded.

4. Press [ENTER].
The song data is loaded.

4. Press [ENTER].
The song data is loaded.

Patches employing the Guitar Synth algorithm of the BR864 are replaced by P001 when loaded.

The data remains in BR-532 format immediately after


loading. Once the loaded song is saved, the data is converted
(p. 79) to BR-900CD format.

The Harmonist of the BR-864 are replaced by Flanger


when loaded.

61

Section 1

You can load songs created with the BR-864 or BR-532 into
the BR-900CD via memory cards.

Displaying the Song Information


Displaying the Remaining
Available Recording Time
Follow the procedure below to either display the elapsed
recording time in the recording standby and recording
screens.

Follow the procedure below to display the current condition


of the memory card being used.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

Displaying the Memory Card Usage

] to move the cursor to INF,

fig.01-904d

] to move the cursor to SYS,

fig.01-901d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select Remain Inf, and


turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select ON.
fig.01-902d

3. Press CURSOR [
displayed.

][

] to select the parameter to be

Name of the currently selected song


fig.01-905d

ON:

Displays the remaining available recording


time in minutes: seconds.

OFF:

Doesnt display the remaining available


recording time.

Songs data type and memory used (Size: MB)


fig.01-906d

4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return


to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
* When [REC] is pressed in the Play screen, putting the BR900CD into record standby ([REC] flashes), the remaining
recording time is displayed in the TIME area.
fig.01-903d

Data Type
HiFi (MT2):
STD (LV1):
LONG (LV2):

High-quality recording type


Standard recording type
Long recording type

Remaining memory
fig.01-907d

* The song sizes are displayed in units of 1M = 1,000,000 bytes.


The size displayed is an approximation.
4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.

62

Section 2
Editing

63

Registering Time (Locator)


Using the locator function, you can register any desired time
in a song as a locator point so that you can jump to that
point later with just the press of a button.
This function is quite useful during editing.

Registering a Locator Point


1. At the Play screen, move to the location where you
want to register the locator point.
2. Press [LOCATOR].
When the [LOCATOR] indicator lights up, registration is
complete.
fig.02-101

Moving to the Locator Point


1. Press [LOCATOR].
This moves you to the time in the song registered as a
locator point.

Deleting a Locator Point


1. Press and hold AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF], then press
[LOCATOR].
The locator point is deleted.

64

Search for the Musics Start and End (Scrub/Preview)


Scrub function
When editing a sound, some times you need to know exactly
where the sound starts, or exactly where the recording with
an auto punch in starts.
To enable you to find these points accurately, the BR-900CD
is equipped with the Scrub function.

Preview function
With the Preview function, you can playback the one-second
portion of the song before or after your current position.

1. Hold down [STOP] and press [PLAY].


The [PLAY] indicator begins flashing and scrubbing
starts.
At this time, the Track 17/8 level meters are displayed.
The
(SCRUB TO) and
(SCRUB FROM)
displayed at the TEMPO position in the screen are the
scrub points with respect to the current position.
When the cursor is set under the scrub point, it is
possible to change scrub point by TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.02-202d

By using this together with the Scrub function, at the same


time slowly moving your current position in the song, it
becomes easy to find the exact transition point from one
phrase to the next.
fig.02-201

Now Time
fig.02-203d

Sound Data

Time
SCRUB
TO

SCRUB
FROM

Approx. 45 msec

PREVIEW
TO
Approx. 1.0 msec

PREVIEW
FROM
Approx. 1.0 msec

You can press [PLAY] to preview the material to or from the


currently selected scrub point.
PREVIEW FROM
PREVIEW TO

To mute the sound of a particular track, hold down


[DELETE/MUTE] and press the relevant REC TRACK
button so it starts blinking.
2. Slowly turn the TIME/VALUE dial to move the current
position and search for the starting point of the phrase
(e.g., where sound is first emitted).
3. After you find the exact point where the music starts,
press [STOP] to stop scrubbing.

You can now press [LOCATOR] to register a locator point so


that you can find the point easily later.

65

Section 2

When you use the Scrub function during playback (called


scrubbing), the portion from your before or after the
current location (approximately 45 msec) is played back and
repeated.

Scrubbing to Find the Music


Starting/Ending Point

Search for the Musics Start and End (Scrub/Preview)

Changing the Scrub Points


Besides switching the scrub point in the Play screen (p. 65),
you can also use the following method to switch the scrub
point.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SCR,

fig.02-204d

Enabling Use of the Preview


Function with [REW] and [FF]
Besides using [PLAY] for the Preview function (p. 65), you
can also set the unit so that [REW] and [FF] can be used with
the Preview function.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SCR,

fig.02-206d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select FROM/TO, and


turn the TIME/VALUE dial to change scrub points.
fig.02-205d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] to select Preview SW, and turn


the TIME/VALUE dial to set ON.
fig.02-207d

TO:

Scrubs to your current position.

FROM:

Scrubs from your current position.

4. After completing the setting, press [UTILITY] (or press


[EXIT] repeatedly) to return to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

This enables use of the Preview function.


4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

You can temporarily switch to Preview during scrub with the


following operations.

66

Press [REW]:

PREVIEW TO

Press [FF]:

PREVIEW FROM

Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)


The BR-900CD allows you to edit your songs by performing
editing functions such as copying and moving data recorded
on the tracks.

About the Measure/Time Specification screen

Copying the repeated portion (AB)


Perform the procedure given below to copy the portion from
the repeat start (A) to the repeat end (B).
Ex. 1: Copying twice to the same track
fig.02-302

Section 2

Measures and time are specified in the S (Start), E


(End), and T (To) screens in Track Edit as shown
below.
fig.02-301d

S (Start) / E (End) / T (To)


(Ex.)

Repeat
Start (A)

Measure Beat

Repeat
End (B)

TO

Time

Ex. 2: Copying twice to another track


fig.02-303

Hours
Seconds
Sub Frame
Minutes
Frame
Repeat
Start (A)

Data is saved in its edited form when you return to the Play
screen from the Track Edit screen.
* During automatic updating, Keep power on! appears in the
upper line of the display, while the lower line shows what is
being processed.

Repeat
End (B)

TO

Time

1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to TRK,

fig.02-304d

To copy, move, or erase repeated portions, you first need to


set the portion to be repeated, using the procedure described
on p. 51.

Copying Data (Track Copy)


Track Copy allows you to copy a specific part of data and
then place it in a different location.
You can perform editing operations such as copying the data
on a track all at once, or copying the data from a specified
part as many times as you wish.
If, for example, you want to use a phrase from a certain track,
or have the same phrase repeated again and again, the copy
function will help save you time.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to CPY,

fig.02-305d

* If data exists at the position being copied to, that data will be
overwritten.
* The portion being copied must be longer than 1.0 seconds long.
If the copied portion is 1.0 seconds or less, no sound will be
heard even if the copy is carried out.
The three types of Track Copy are given below.

67

Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select AB and press


[ENTER].
fig.02-306d

Copying by specifying the time


(TME/MES)
Perform the procedure given below to copy the portion
between specific times.
Ex. 1: Copying twice to the same track
fig.02-309

5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track/V-Track to copy from, and track/VTrack to copy to.
6. Press [ENTER].

START

END

TO

Time

Ex. 2: Copying twice to another track


fig.02-310

fig.02-307d

7. Use [CURSOR] and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to


specify the time of the beginning of the location T
(To) where you want the copied data to be placed.

1. Press [UTILITY].

8. Press [ENTER].

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

fig.02-308d

START

END

TO

Time

] to move the cursor to TRK,

fig.02-311d

9. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of


copies you want to be placed.
10. When you are ready to execute the copy, press
[ENTER].
The display will ask Are you sure?, so that you can
confirm the operation.
11. Press [ENTER].
The copy is executed.
12. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to CPY,

fig.02-312d

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select TME/MES and
press [ENTER].

68

Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)

fig.02-319d

13. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of


copies you want to be placed.
14. When you are ready to execute the copy, press
[ENTER].

5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track/V-Track to copy from, and track/VTrack to copy to.
6. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-314d

7. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify


the beginning of the portion S (Start) of data you
want to copy.
8. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-315d

15. Press [ENTER].


The copy is executed.
16. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
* After specifying the time in the procedure above, a + may
appear to show that there is a discrepancy between the actual
current position and the position displayed. If you specify the
locations using measures, specify the locations at each screen
using the TIME/VALUE dial to eliminate the discrepancy.

You can also enter the time using [LOCATOR], [ZERO],


[STOP] + [REW], [STOP] + [FF], and AUTO PUNCH [IN/
OUT].

Copying a complete track (ALL)


Perform the procedure given below to copy the complete
recorded data from one track to another.
9. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the
ending of the portion E (End) of data you want to copy.

1. Press [UTILITY].

10. Press [ENTER].

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

fig.02-316d

] to move the cursor to TRK,

fig.02-318d

11. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify


the time of the beginning of the location T (To)
where you want the copied data to be placed.
12. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-317d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to CPY,

69

Section 2

The display will ask Are you sure?, so that you can
confirm the operation.

Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)

fig.02-319d

Moving Data (Track Move)


Track Move allows you to move a specific portion of data to
a different location.
* After the data is moved, the location it was in will be left
empty.

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select ALL and press


[ENTER].
fig.02-320d

The three types of Track Move are given below.

Moving the repeated portion (AB)


Perform the procedure given below to move the portion from
the repeat start (A) to the repeat end (B).
Ex. 1: Moving to the same track
fig.02-321

5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track/V-Track to copy from, and track/VTrack to copy to.
6. When you are ready to execute the copy, press
[ENTER].
The display will ask Are you sure?, so that you can
confirm the operation.

Repeat
Start (A)

Repeat
End (B)

TO

Time

Ex. 2: Moving to another track


fig.02-322

7. Press [ENTER].
The copy is executed.
8. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

Repeat
Start (A)

Repeat
Start (B)

TO

Time

1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-323d

70

] to move the cursor to TRK,

Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


MOV, and press [ENTER].

Moving by specifying the time


(TME/MES)

fig.02-324d

Perform the procedure given below to move the portion


between specific times.
Ex. 1: Moving to the same track

Section 2

fig.02-327

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select AB and press


[ENTER].
START

fig.02-325d

END

TO

Time

Ex. 2: Moving to another track


fig.02-328

5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track/V-Track to move from, and track/VTrack to move to.
6. Press [ENTER].

START

END

TO

Time

1. Press [UTILITY].

fig.02-326d

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to TRK,

fig.02-329d

7. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


specify the time of the beginning of the location T
(To) where you want the data to be moved.
8. When you are ready to execute the move, press [ENTER].
The display will ask Are you sure?, so that you can
confirm the operation.
9. Press [ENTER].
Move Event is executed.
10. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


MOV, and press [ENTER].
fig.02-330d

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select TME/MES and


press [ENTER].

71

Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)

fig.02-331d

5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track/V-Track to move from, and track/VTrack to move to.

* After specifying the time in the procedure above, a + may


appear to show that there is a discrepancy between the actual
current position and the position displayed. If you specify the
locations using measures, specify the locations at each screen
using the TIME/VALUE dial to eliminate the discrepancy.

You can also enter the time using [LOCATOR], [ZERO],


[STOP] + [REW], [STOP] + [FF], and AUTO PUNCH [IN/
OUT].

6. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-332d

Moving a complete track (ALL)


Perform the procedure given below to move the complete
data from one track to another.
1. Press [UTILITY].

7. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify


the beginning of the portion S (Start) of data you
want to move.

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to TRK,

fig.02-335d

8. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-333d

9. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the


ending of the portion E (End) of data you want to move.
10. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-334d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


MOV, and press [ENTER].
fig.02-336d

11. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify


the time of the beginning of the location T (To)
where you want the data moved.
12. When you are ready to execute the move, press [ENTER].
The display will ask Are you sure?, so that you can
confirm the operation.
13. Press [ENTER].
Move Event is executed.
14. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line of
the display, while the lower line shows what is being processed.

72

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select ALL and press


[ENTER].
fig.02-337d

Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track/V-Track to move from, and track/VTrack to move to.
6. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-338d

Erasing Data (Track Erase)

* Do not leave a portion of less than 1.0 seconds in length after


the erased portion. If a portion that short does remain, it will
end up being silent.
The three types of Track Erase are given below.
7. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the time of the beginning of the location T (To)
where you want the data to be moved.
8. When you are ready to execute the move, press [ENTER].
The display will ask Are you sure?, so that you can
confirm the operation.

Erasing the repeated portion (AB)


Perform the procedure given below to erase the portion from
the repeat start (A) to the repeat end (B).
fig.02-339

9. Press [ENTER].
Move Event is executed.
10. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

Repeat
Start (A)

Repeat
End (B)

Time

1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to TRK,

fig.02-304d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to ERS,

73

Section 2

Track Erase allows you to erase a specific part of data. Even if


data exists after the specified part, it will not be moved
forward to fill the gap left by the erasure. Like a normal tape
recorder, erasing can be considered covering unwanted data
by recording emptiness.

Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)

fig.02-341d

Erasing by specifying the time


(TME/MES)
Perform the procedure given below to erase the portion
between specific times.
fig.02-343

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select AB and press


[ENTER].
fig.02-342d

START

END

Time

1. Press [UTILITY].
5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the track/V-Track to erase from.

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to TRK,

fig.02-334d

6. When you are ready to execute the erasure, press [ENTER].


The display will ask Are you sure?, so that you can
confirm the operation.
7. Press [ENTER].
The erasure is executed.
8. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to ERS,

fig.02-345d

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select TME/MES and


press [ENTER].
fig.02-346d

74

Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)

5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track/V-Track to erase from.
6. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-347d

Erasing a complete track (ALL)


1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to TRK,

fig.02-349d

Section 2

7. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify


the beginning of the portion S (Start) of data you
want to erase.
8. Press [ENTER].
fig.02-348d4

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to ERS,

fig.02-350d

9. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify


the ending of the portion E (End) of data you want to
erase.
10. When you are ready to execute the erasure, press
[ENTER].
The display will ask Are you sure?, so that you can
confirm the operation.
11. Press [ENTER].

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select ALL and press


[ENTER].
fig.02-351d

The erasure is executed.


12. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
* After specifying the time in the procedure above, a + may
appear to show that there is a discrepancy between the actual
current position and the position displayed. If you specify the
locations using measures, specify the locations at each screen
using the TIME/VALUE dial to eliminate the discrepancy.

5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track/V-Track to erase.
6. When you are ready to execute the erasure, press
[ENTER].
The display will ask Are you sure?, so that you can
confirm the operation.
7. Press [ENTER].

You can also enter the time using [LOCATOR], [ZERO],


[STOP] + [REW], [STOP] + [FF], and AUTO PUNCH [IN/
OUT].

The erasure is executed.


8. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line of
the display, while the lower line shows what is being processed.

75

Editing the Performance on a Track (Track Editing)

Exchanging Data (Track Exchange)


Perform the procedure given below to exchange the data
between two tracks.
Example: exchanging all the data on track 1 with all the
data on track 2
fig.02-352

Track 1
A

Track 2
E

Track 2
B

Time

1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to TRK,

fig.02-353d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to XCG,

fig.R08-27

4. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the two tracks/V-Tracks to exchange data.

76

6. Press [ENTER].
The exchange is executed.

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

Track 1

The display will ask Are you sure?, so that you can
confirm the operation.

7. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return


to the Play screen.

5. When you are ready to execute the exchange, press


[ENTER].

Organizing the Songs Youve Recorded


Copying a Song (Song Copy)

Erasing Songs (Song Erase)

Follow the procedure below to copy the currently selected


song.

Follow the procedure below to erase a song from the


memory card.

1. Press [UTILITY].

1. Press [UTILITY].
] to move the cursor to EDT,

fig.02-401d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to EDT,

fig.02-403d

] to move the cursor to CPY,

The Copy Song screen appears.


fig.02-402d

If Card Full! appears


If this message appears before the copy, it means that
there is insufficient space on the memory card to
complete the copy. Delete any unnecessary recording
from the memory card.
4. Press [ENTER].
The copy is executed. When the copy has been
completed, Completed! appears in the display, and
you are returned to the Play screen.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to ERS,

The Erase Song screen appears.


fig.02-404d

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial and select the song to be


erased.
5. After selecting the song to erase, press [ENTER].
Are you sure? appears.
6. To continue with the erasure, press [ENTER] (YES).
To cancel the operation press the [EXIT] (NO) (or
[UTILITY]).
7. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly)
repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
* If you erase a song currently being used, the song on the
memory card with the lowest number is selected. If there are no
other songs on the card, a new song is created.

77

Section 2

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

Organizing the Songs Youve Recorded

Saving Memory on the


Memory Card (Song Optimize)
When you perform overdubbing or punch-in/out, the data
that you rewrite (replace) actually remains on the memory
card. In some cases, this unwanted data may occupy a
significant amount of space on the memory card. This will
cause the time available for recording to be less than it
should be.
By performing a Song Optimize, you can have the BR900CD erase any unnecessary data on the memory card and
increase the unused space.
1. Press [UTILITY].

* Depending on the situation, an appreciable length of time may


be required for Optimize to be completed. This is not a
malfunction. Do not turn off the power until Optimize has
completed.
* After you execute Optimize, it is not possible to undo/redo to
revert to the state before executing Optimize.

Naming Songs (Song Name)


When a new song is created, it is automatically given a name
such as SONG 0001. With your BR-900CD, you can use
Song Name to give each song a name, which helps you
manage and organize your songs.
1. Press [UTILITY].

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to EDT,


2. Press CURSOR [

][

] to move the cursor to EDT,

and press [ENTER].

fig.02-405d

fig.02-407d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to OPT,

Are you sure? appears in the display.


fig.02-406d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


NAM, and press [ENTER].
The name of the song (Song Name) appears in the
display.
fig.02-408d

4. To continue with the optimization, press [ENTER]


(YES).
The Song Optimize function is carried out. When
completed, Completed! appears in the display, and
you are returned to the Play screen.
To cancel the operation press the [EXIT] (NO) (or
[UTILITY]).

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to the


character you want to change.
5. Rotate TIME/VALUE dial to select the character.
* You can switch between upper case and lower case characters
by pressing [ENTER].
6. After the name is properly entered, press [UTILITY] (or
press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return to the Play screen.

78

Organizing the Songs Youve Recorded

Protecting a Song (Song Protect)


You can imagine situations where, after taking care to create
a song, you accidentally overwrite it with a recording,
deleting the performance itself.

5. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return


to the Play screen.
When a song is protected, the display will show the song
protect symbol.

Section 2

To prevent such accidents, you can protect song data so that


it cannot be rewritten accidentally (Song Protect).

4. Rotate TIME/VALUE dial to select the ON.

fig.02-411d

* The following operations are not available when a song is


protected.
Editing a song name
Erasing a song
Song Optimize
Editing a digital copy protect
Initializing the Rhythm (arrangements/patterns/
drum kits)
Initializing effects (song patches)
Initialize All
Arrangement/Pattern Edit

Saving the Current Settings


to the Song (Song Save)
The BR-900CD can save the following contents as song data.

Importing SMFs

Recorded data

Writing effects to song patches

Mixer settings (Pan, Track EQ, etc.)


Insert Effect song patches
Mastering Tool Kit song patches

1. Press [UTILITY].

Pitch Correction song patches


2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to EDT,

Rhythm Arrangements / Rhythm Patterns


Loop Effects

fig.02-409

Tuner
Utility (excluding LCD contrast)
These recorded data or mixer settings are not saved
immediately after recording, but are saved when songs are
saved, and when the screens are switched.
Ordinarily, if a situation calls for it, a message appears in the
display prompting you to confirm that you want to save the
data, so you need not pay particular attention to this, but if
you want to save the settings to the song in its current state,
use the following procedure.
1. Hold down [STOP] and press [REC].

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to PRT,

The Song Protect screen appears.


fig.02-410d

79

Creating a Master Tape / Disc


This process involves recording the finished song to your
recorder (cassette tape recorder, CD recorder, etc.) and
making a master tape or a master disc.

Recording to a Cassette Tape


Recorder (Analog Connection)

Recording to a Digital
Recorder (Digital Connection)
1. Connect the BR-900CDs DIGITAL OUT connector to
the digital recorder's input connector.
fig.02-501b

1. Connect the BR-900CDs LINE OUT jacks to the


cassette tape recorder's input jacks.
fig.02-501a

Digital Recorder
(CD Recorder etc.)

2. Set the digital recorder so it is ready to record digital


signals.
Cassette tape
Recorder

2. Put the cassette tape recorder in record mode.


3. Press [PLAY] on the BR-900CD and start the playback
of the recorded data.

3. Put the digital recorder in record mode.


4. Press [PLAY] on the BR-900CD and start the playback
of the recorded data.

Disabling digital copying (Digital


Copy Protect)
When recording from the BR-900CD to a digital recorder,
you can prevent further digital copying of the master tape or
disc to any other digital recorders.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].
fig.02-501d

80

] to move the cursor to EDT,

Creating a Master Tape / Disc

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


DPRT, and press [ENTER].
The Digital Copy Protect screen appears.
fig.02-502d

Section 2

4. Rotate TIME/VALUE dial to select the ON.


ON:

Digital copying will be prohibited.

OFF:

Digital copying is enabled.

5. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return


to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
* Some DAT recorders do not support SCMS, or do not allow
digital connections to a CD player. If you are using this type of
DAT recorder, it will not be possible to record the digital
output of the BR-900CD on a DAT recorder if Copy Prtct is
turned ON. In this case, you will need to turn off the Copy
Prtct setting.

What is SCMS?
SCMS stands for Serial Copy Management System.
This is a function of consumer digital audio devices such
as DAT recorders CD recorders that protects the
copyright of the producer by prohibiting secondgeneration and subsequent copies from being made
digitally.
If digital connections are made to a digital recorder that
has this function, SCMS flags will be recorded along
with the digital audio signals.
Digital audio data that contains this data cannot be
recorded again via a digital connection.

81

MEMO

82

Section 3
Using
Effects

83

Using the Insert Effects


The BR-900CD comes with five effects processors: an insert
effects, loop effects, Track EQ, Pitch Correction, and
Mastering Tool Kit.
An insert effects, loop effects, and Track EQ can be used
simultaneously, and you can make settings for each effect as
desired.
Here is an explanation of how to change the various
parameters for the insert effects and how to then save those
changes.

Preset patches (P)


The preset patches contain preset data. Their settings can be
changed, but you cannot create a new preset patch.

User patches (U)


User patches can be rewritten, and are stored in internal
memory. If you have created a patch that you would like to
use for other songs as well, it is convenient to store it as a
user patch.

Song patches (S)


Like user patches, song patches can be written; however, the
data for song patches are stored along with the song data to
the memory card. This is convenient when you have created
a patch for a specific recorded performance, and would like
to store that patch together with the song.

Insert Effect Parameter Functions (p. 88)


Loop Effect Parameter Functions (p. 111)
Track EQ Parameter Functions (p. 112)

Insert effects are applied during recording, in addition they


are applied during the mixing of the various tracks as well.
For more details, refer to Changing How the Insert Effects
are Used According to the Mode (p. 87).

Effect Patches and Banks


The effects used by insert effects and the parameters of each
effect are changed by calling up effect patches.
Your BR-900CD comes equipped with a number of preset
effect patches for use with vocals and instruments. These are
grouped according to different input sources and each group
is called a bank.
fig.01-501

INPUT SELECT
GUITAR/BASS

Preset
Patch

MIC

Guitar Bank Mic Bank


GTR
MIC
P01
P01
..
..
P99
P40

LINE

SIMUL

Line Bank Simul Bank


LIN
SML
P01
P01
..
..
P50
P50

User
Patch

U01
..
U99

U01
..
U40

U01
..
U50

U01
..
U50

Song
Patch

S01
..
S99

S01
..
S40

S01
..
S50

S01
..
S50

Your BR-900CD allows you to automatically change banks


by pressing an INPUT SELECT button. For example,
pressing the [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] INPUT SELECT button
changes you to a guitar bank patch, and pressing [LINE]
changes you to a line bank patch.
Also, within each bank, effect patches are further grouped as
shown below.

84

fig.01-502

BR-900CD

Memory Card
Song

Preset
Patch

User
Patch

Song
Patch

* Song patches (S) cannot be selected unless a memory card is


inserted.

Your BR-900CD is shipped with the user patches (U) and


song patches (S) containing the same patches as the preset
patches (P).

When you create a new song, copies of the patches in the


song patches (S) are made in the preset patches (P) for each
bank.

Using the Insert Effects

Editing Insert Effect Settings


If you wish to create a new effect sound, you should first
select an existing patch that is closest to the sound you want,
and then edit its settings. If you wish to save the effect settings
that you edited, save them as a user patch or song patch.
1. Press [EFFECTS].
The Effect screen appears.
fig.01-503d

P: Preset / S: Song / U: User


Algorithm
Name

Bank

Number

Patch Name

By pressing [ENTER] while the cursor is at a BankNumber,


you can display the Edit Effect screen directly.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to each
effect and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to turn each
effect on or off.
Blocks that are turned on are shown in uppercase letters,
while blocks that are turned off are shown in lowercase
letters.
Turn on the effects that you want to use.
fig.01-506d

Section 3

2. Select an effect patch.


Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the bank, Preset/Song/User, and patch number.
3. Press CURSOR [
press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to EDIT, and

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to the


effect with the parameter that you want to change and
press [ENTER].
The Parameter Setting screen for each effect appears.
fig.01-507d

The Edit Effect screen appears and the algorithm (the


connection sequence for the effects being used) is displayed.
fig.01-504d

6. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select a parameter, and turn


the TIME/VALUE dial to edit the value.
7. If you would like to edit another effect, press [EXIT] to
return to the previous screen, and repeat steps 56.
8. If you wish to save the current effect settings, perform
the procedure described in Saving insert effect
settings, next.

When effect patches in the SIMUL bank are selected,


GTR and MIC appear.
Move the cursor to GTR to modify a guitar-use effect,
or to MIC to modify an effect for use with a mic, then
press [ENTER].

fig.01-505d

Edited effect settings are temporary. If you exit the Edit


Effect screen without saving the effect patch you changed,
TMP appears next to the indication of the bank.
Be aware that if you select a new effect patch while TMP is
displayed, the altered effect patch is returned to its original
settings and the changes are lost.

85

Using the Insert Effects

Saving Insert Effects Settings


(Write)
Follow the procedure below to enter a name (patch name) for
an effect that youve modified, and save it as a new effect
patch.
* You cannot save an effect patch during the recording or
playback of a song.
* If you do not need to change patch name, go to step 4.
1. At the Effect screen, press CURSOR [ ] to move the
cursor to NAME, and press [ENTER].
The Patch Name Setting screen appears.
fig.01-508d

2. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to enter the


patch name.
* Press [ENTER] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.
3. After you have completed entering the effect settings
and patch name as desired, press [EXIT] to return to the
Effect screen.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
WRITE, and press [ENTER].
fig.01-509d

86

5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number to


which to write the new effect patch.
6. After youve selected the destination, press [ENTER].
After the save has been completed, you are returned to
the Effect screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

Using the Insert Effects

Changing How the Insert Effects are


Used According to the Mode
By default, the insert effect is inserted immediately after the
input source. The reason for this is to allow for the effectsprocessed (wet) sound to be recorded and monitored.
However, sometimes you want to change the connection
order.
On the BR-900CD, you can accommodate a wide variety of
situations by changing the point to which the insert effects
are connected.

1. Press [EFFECTS].

The sound is monitored through the insert effect but is


recorded without the effect (dry).
fig.01-512

TRACK 1
(REC)

TRACK 18, 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8:


The insert effect can be applied to the playback of a track
(or pair of tracks). Use this when you wish to try out
effects after recording the dry sound, or when you wish
to apply effects only to a specific track.
fig.01-513

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


LOCAT, and press [ENTER].

TRACK 1
(PLAY)

fig.01-510d

RHYTHM:
The insert effect can be applied to the playback of a
Rhythm.
fig.01-513a

RHYTHM

MASTER:
3. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to switch the point to
which the insert effects are connected.

Use this when you wish to apply effects to the entire


song, such as when adjusting the tone or applying a
special effect during mixdown.
fig.01-514

INPUT<NORMAL>:
The sound is monitored and recorded after it passes
through the insert effect. Normally you will use the BR900CD with this setting.
fig.01-511

TRACK 1
(PLAY)
TRACK 2
(PLAY)
TRACK 8
(PLAY)

TRACK 1
(REC)

RHYTHM

4. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.


* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

87

Section 3

Follow the procedure below to change where insert effects


are connected.

INPUT<REC DRY>:

Insert Effect Parameter Functions


Algorithm List
The algorithms (the available effects and their connection order) that can be used as an insert effect are shown below.
The algorithms that can be selected will differ for each bank. To select the algorithm that you wish to use, first select the effect
bank that includes that algorithm, and then refer to the Effect Patch List (p. 202) and select a patch that uses the desired
algorithm.
The line or lines connecting the algorithm indicate whether the effect features mono output (single line) or stereo output (two lines).
(Example)
fig.04-105a

Output: Mono

Output: Stereo

[COMP][PAMP]

[MOD]=[DLY]=

BANK: GUITAR
1. COSM GTR AMP

2. ACOUSTIC SIM

This is a multi-effect designed for electric guitar. This


provides an amp sound using a preamp and speaker
simulator.

This is a multi-effect designed for electric guitar. It allows


you to use an electric guitar to produce sounds similar to
those of an acoustic guitar.

* In case of Phaser, output will become monaural.

[ASIM][COMP][EQ][NS]

fig.04-106

[COMP][PAMP][SP][EQ/WAH]
[NS][FV][MOD]=[DLY]=

[FV][MOD]=[DLY]=
Acoustic Guitar Simulator

Compressor

Compressor

Preamp

4Band Equalizer

Speaker Simulator

Noise Suppressor

4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah

Foot Volume

Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
- Slow Attack
Delay

88

fig.04-107

Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

3. BASS SIM

5. ACOUSTIC GTR

Simulates the sound of a bass guitar. Obtain the sound of a


bass guitar while playing an electric guitar.

This is a multi-effect designed for acoustic guitar. Even when


an electric-acoustic is connected at line level, this provides a
warm sound similar to what is obtained through a
microphone.

* You should avoid playing chords when using the Bass


Simulator.

fig.04-111

fig.04-108

[ACP]=[COMP]=[EQ]=[NS]=[DLY]=

[BSIM][COMP/DEF][NS][FV][MOD]=
Bass Simulator

Acoustic Processor

Compressor/Defretter
- Compressor
- Defretter

Compressor

Noise Suppressor

Delay

Section 3

4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor

Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan

6. BASS MULTI
This is a multi-effect designed for bass guitar. Appropriate
for creating standard bass sound.
fig.04-112

[COMP/DEF][OCT][ENH][EQ/WAH]
[NS][FV][MOD]=[DLY]=

4. COSM COMP GTR


This is a multi-effect designed for electric guitar. In addition
to a COSM compressor/limiter, it uses a preamp and speaker
simulator for a characteristic amp sound.
fig.04-109

Compressor/Defretter
- Compressor
- Defretter
Octave
Enhancer

[COMP][PAMP][SP][EQ/WAH]
[NS][FV][DLY]=
COSM Comp/Limiter
Preamp

4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume

Foot Volume

Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan

Delay

Delay

Speaker Simulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor

89

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

7. COSM BASS AMP

8. COSM COMP BSS

This is a multi-effect designed for bass guitar. This features


an amp sound that uses a preamp and speaker simulator.

This is a multi-effect designed for bass guitar.

fig.04-113

[COMP][PAMP][SP][EQ/WAH]

In addition to a COSM compressor/limiter, it uses a preamp


and speaker simulator for a characteristic amp sound.
fig.04-114

[COMP/LIM][PAMP][SP]

[NS][FV][MOD]=[DLY]=

[EQ/WAH][NS][FV][DLY]=
Compressor
Preamp
Speaker Simulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan

COSM Comp/Limiter
Preamp
Speaker Simulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Delay

Delay

BANK: MIC
9. VOCAL MULTI

10. VOICE TRANS

This is a multi-effect designed for vocals.

This is a multi-effect designed for vocals.

It provides the basic effects needed for vocals.

This allows you to produce a unique effect using a voice


transformer.

fig.04-115

[COMP][DES][ENH][EQ]

fig.04-116

[VT][NS][FV][MOD]=[DLY]=
[NS][FV][MOD]=[DLY]=
Compressor
De-esser
Enhancer
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay

90

Voice Transformer
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

11. COSM COMP VCL


This is a multi-effect designed for vocals.
The COSM compressor/limiter is perfect for creating a basic
sound.
fig.04-117

[COMP/LIM][DES][ENH]
[EQ][NS][FV][DLY]=
COSM Comp/Limiter
De-esser

Section 3

Enhancer
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Delay

BANK: LINE
12. STEREO MULTI

13. LO-FI BOX

This algorithm connects seven types of effect, all in full


stereo.

This allows you to simulate sounds that appear to be playing


on an AM radio, the sounds of old records played on an oldfashioned gramophone, and even extreme deformations of
the sound produced by a Lo-Fi Digital.

fig.04-118

=[COMP]=[RNG]=[EQ/WAH]

fig.S02-14

[NS]=[FV]=[MOD]=[DLY]=

=[LOFI]=[NS]=

Compressor

Lo-Fi Box

Ring Modulator

Noise Suppressor

4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay

91

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

BANK: SIMUL
14. VO+GT AMP

15. VO+AC.SIM

This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a


vocal and electric guitar.

This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a


vocal and electric guitar.

For the guitar, you can produce an amp sound using a


preamp and speaker simulator.

For the guitar, you can make the electric guitar sound like an
acoustic guitar.

(GUITAR)
fig.04-121

(GUITAR)
fig.04-123

[COMP][PAMP][SP][NS][DLY]

[ASIM][COMP][NS][DLY]
(MIC)

(MIC)
fig.04-122

fig.04-120

[COMP][EQ][NS][DLY]

[COMP][EQ][NS][DLY]

(GUITAR)
Acoustic Guitar Simulator
Compressor
Noise Suppressor
Delay

(GUITAR)
Compressor
PreAmp
Speaker Simulator

(MIC)
Compressor
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Delay

Noise Suppressor
Delay
(MIC)
Compressor
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Delay

16. VO+ACOUSTIC
This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a
vocal and acoustic guitar.
For the guitar, you can produce a warm sound as though a
mic were being used, even when an electric-acoustic is
connected by a direct line.
(GUITAR)
fig.04-125

[ACP][COMP][NS]
(MIC)
fig.04-124

[COMP][NS]
(GUITAR)
Acoustic Processor
Compressor
Noise Suppressor
(MIC)
Compressor
Noise Suppressor

92

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

Parameter List
The trademarks listed in this document are trademarks of their respective owners, which are separate companies from BOSS.
Those companies are not affiliated with BOSS and have not licensed or authorized BOSSs BR-900CD. Their marks are used
solely to identify the equipment whose sound is simulated by BOSSs BR-900CD.

Acoustic Processor

This simulates the sound of an acoustic guitar. It allows you to use


an electric guitar to produce sounds similar to those of an acoustic
guitar.
If you set the pickup selector of your guitar to the front position, the
desired effect will be easier to achieve.

With this feature, you can change the sound from a pickup on an
electric-acoustic guitar into a richer sound, similar to that obtained
by a microphone placed near a guitar. Best results will be achieved
when stereo recording.

On/Off

This parameter turns the acoustic processor effect on/off.

OFF, ON

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the acoustic guitar simulator effect on/off.

Body

PickUp

This adjusts the resonance of the sound caused by the body. That is,
it adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound which is the typical
characteristics of acoustic guitars.

SINGLE, HUMBUCK

Set this to the type of pickup on the connected guitar.

Charct

Mic Dist

This selects one of the four types of sounds.

0100

This simulates the distance between the microphone capturing the


sound of an acoustic guitar and the guitar itself.

STD (standard):
This is a normal acoustic guitar.

Level

JUMBO:

0100

This adjusts the volume of the acoustic processor.

This is an acoustic guitar with a body that is bigger than


STANDARD. The bass sound is powerful.

Bass Simulator

ENHANCE:
This is an acoustic guitar that with a more responsive attack, so the
guitar will retain more of its prominence in almost any situation.

PIEZO:
This simulates the sound you would get from a pickup installed on
an electric-acoustic guitar.
During the attack, a certain amount of compression will be applied.

Top-Hi

0100

-100+100

Simulates the sound of a bass guitar. Obtain the sound of a bass


guitar while playing an electric guitar. You should avoid playing
chords when using the Bass Simulator.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the bass simulator effect on/off.

Charct

LOOSE, TIGHT

Adjust the level of the direct sound from the strings. That is, it
adjusts the harmonic contents.

Bass tone characteristic is set. When LOOSE is selected, as if the


string gauge was getting thicker.

Top-Mid

Level

-100+100

This adjusts the interference to the strings made by the top plate.
That is, it adjusts the attack sense.

Body

0100

This adjusts the volume of the bass simulator.

-100+100

This adjusts the resonance of the sound caused by the body. That is,
it adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound which is the typical
characteristics of acoustic guitars.

Level

0100

This adjusts the volume of the acoustic guitar simulator.


*

If Top-Hi, Top-Mid, and Body are all set to -100, there will be no
sound.

93

Section 3

Acoustic Guitar Simulator

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

Chorus

COSM Comp (compressor)/Limiter

A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound,


making the final output sound thicker and broader. Best results will
be achieved when stereo recording.

The compressor corrects differences in input to create a steadier, more


even volume balance. It is used to extend the sustain of input sounds
and, conversely, to shorten sustain and emphasize the attack portion
of sounds.
The limiter is an effect that prevents distortion by suppressing input
signals that exceed a set value (threshold). You can get the same effect
achieved with the compressor by setting the threshold at a low value.
The BR-900CD uses COSM technology to model four types of
compressor/limiter in which the compressor and limiter functions are
combined.

This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter


is set to CHORUS.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the chorus effect on/off.

Rate

0100

Adjusts the rate of the Chorus effect.

Depth

0100

Adjusts the depth of the Chorus effect.

Pre Dly

0.550.0 ms

Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the
direct sound has been output.

E.Level

0100

Adjusts the volume of the effect sound.

This corrects differences in input to create a steadier, more even


volume balance. This is used to extend the sustain of input sounds
and, conversely, to shorten sustain and emphasize the attack portion
of sounds.
Another use of compression is as a limiter, which prevents
distortion by suppressing only volume peaks.

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the compressor effect on/off.

Sustain

0100

This adjusts the depth of the effect. Higher settings values result in
longer sustain times. Set this to a lower value when using
compression for the limiter effect.

Attack

0100

Adjusts the strength of the attack. Larger values will result in a


sharper attack, creating a more clearly defined sound.

Level
Adjusts the volume.

OFF, ON

Sets the compressor/limiter to ON or OFF.

Type
Selects the compressor/limiter type.
BOSS-Cmp: Models the BOSS CS-3 compact effects processor.
D-Comp:
Models the MXR dyna comp.
Rack160:
Models the dbx 160.
VtgRack:
Models the UREI 1178.

Attack

Compressor

On/Off

On/Off

0100

(with BOSS-Cmp, D-Comp)


0100
Adjusts the strength of the picking attack when the strings are
played. Larger values will result in a sharper attack, creating a more
clearly defined sound.

Sustain

(with BOSS-Cmp, D-Comp)


0100
Boosts low-level signals, adjusting the time over which sounds are
sustained. Higher values deepen the effect, resulting in a longer
sustain.

Threshold

(with Rack160)
0100
Adjust this as appropriate for the input signal from your bass. The
compression effect is applied to input above the level set here. The
smaller the value set here, the lower the level at which the limiter
effect kicks in.

Input

(with VtgRack)
0100
Controls the input level. Increasing the value will produce a deeper
effect.

Ratio

(with Rack160) 1:120:1, INF:1 (with VtgRack) 4:120:1


Adjusts the limiter compression ratio. Higher ratio create a stronger
compression effect.

Attack Time

(When set to VtgRack)


0100
This adjusts the amount of time it takes for the compression ratio set
in Ratio to be reached once compression begins, as the input level
exceeds the set threshold level. The larger the value set here, the
more rapidly compression is applied.

Release Time

(with VtgRack)
0100
This adjusts the time from when the signal level drops below the
threshold until when the compression is removed. The lower the
values set, the more rapidly the compression is released, and the
more clearly the sound from the next string played is heard.

Tone

(with BOSS-Cmp)
-50+50
Adjusts the tone. The higher the value set, the more the high
frequencies are boosted, resulting in a harder sound.

Level
Adjusts the volume.

94

0100

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

De-esser

Doubling

Useful for reducing sibilant or S sounds produced by a vocalist.

By adding a slightly time-delayed sound to the direct sound, this


produces the impression that multiple sources are sounding together
(a doubling effect). Best results will be achieved when stereo
recording.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the de-esser effect on/off.

Sibilant

0100

Adjusts the sensitivity relative to the input volume, which controls


how the effect is applied.

Level

0100

Adjusts the volume.

This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter


is set to DOUBLING.

On/Off
Dly Tme

Defretter

Separation
OFF, ON

This parameter turns the defretter effect on/off.

Sens

0100

This controls the input sensitivity of the Defretter. It should be


adjusted for the bass guitar you have until you get the harmonic
changes to sound natural.

Attack

0100

This controls the attack of the Defretter. Increasing the value will
cause the harmonics to change more slowly, thus producing a
relatively attack-less sound, similar to a fretless bass.

Depth

0100

This controls the ratio of harmonics. Increasing the value will increase
the harmonic content and therefore will create a more unusual sound.

-50 +50

Adjusts the diffusion. The panning of the direct sound and effect
sound can be spread to left and right.
*

This effect is obtained with stereo recording (using two tracks).

E.Level

0120

This adjusts the volume of the delay sound.

Enhancer
By adding sounds which are out-of-phase with the direct sound, this
effect enhances the definition of the sound, and pushes it to the
forefront.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the enhancer effect on/off.

Level

0100

Adjusts the volume of the defretter sound.

Sens

0100

Adjusts the manner in which the enhancer will be applied relative to


the input signals.

Delay
This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the
direct sound.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the delay effect on/off.

Freq

Mix Level

Type

1.010.0 kHz

Adjusts the frequency at which the enhancer effect will begin to be


applied. The effect will be made apparent in the frequencies above
the frequency set here.

0100

Adjusts the amount of phase-shifted sound of the range set


by Frequency that is to be mixed with the input.

This Parameter selects the type of delay.


This parameter cannot be selected with the "VO+GT AMP" and
"VO+AC.SIM" algorithms.

Lo Mix Lvl

0100

Adjusts the amount of phase-shifted sound of the lower range that is


to be mixed with the input. The frequency range in which the effect
is applied is fixed.

SINGLE:
This is a simple delay.

TAP:
The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels. This
will be effective when stereo recording.

Level

0100

Adjusts the volume of the enhanced sound.

SINGLE: 11400 ms, TAP: 1700 ms

This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval for which
sound is delayed).

Feedback

0100

This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback. Changing the


amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is
repeated to change as well.

E.Level

0120

Adjusts the volume of the delay sound.

95

Section 3

On/Off

Dly Tme

0.550.0 ms

This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval for which
sound is delayed).

This simulates a fretless bass.

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the doubling effect on/off.

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

Equalizer

Resonance

A 4-band equalizer.
*

0100

Determines the amount of resonance (feedback). Increasing the value


will emphasize the effect, creating a more unusual sound.

You can use this effect with the following algorithms when 4BAND
EQ is selected for the 4BAND EQ/WAH Type setting.
COSM GTR AMP

COSM BASS AMP

COSM COMP GTR

COSM COMP BSS

BASS MULTI

STEREO MULTI

Separation

On/Off

OFF, ON

0100

Adjusts the diffusion. The diffusion increases as the value increases.


This will be effective when stereo output is used.
This effect is obtained with stereo recording (using two tracks).

Foot Volume

This parameter turns the equalizer effect on/off.

This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the bass
equalizer.

Specify the volume between effects.


By using an expression pedal to control the foot volume, you can
smoothly change the volume of the output sound. For a detailed
explanation, see When Using an Expression Pedal (p. 187).

Lo-M Gin

On/Off

Low Gain

-20 +20 dB

-20 +20 dB

This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the lowmidrange equalizer.

Lo-M F

100 Hz10.0 kHz

This parameter sets the central frequency for the low-midrange


equalizer.

Lo-M Q

0.516

This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set
by Lo-M F. A larger value results in a narrower range of change.

Hi-M Gin

-20 +20 dB

This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the highmidrange equalizer.

Hi-M F

100 Hz10.0 kHz

This parameter sets the central frequency for the high-midrange


equalizer.

Hi-M Q

0.516

This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set
by Hi-M F. A larger value results in a narrower range of change.

Hi Gain

OFF, ON

Switches the foot volume on/off.

Lo-Fi Box
Produces a lo-fi sound.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the lo-fi box effect on/off.

Type
Select the mode of the lo-fi box.

RADIO:
The sound will appear to be heard from an AM radio.
*

By adjusting Tuning, you can simulate the sounds that occur when
you adjust the tuning frequency of the radio.

PLAYER:
The sound will appear to be heard from a gramophone. The noise
caused by scratches and dust on the record are is simulated.

DIGITAL:
-20 +20 dB

This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the treble
equalizer.

This allows you to create a lo-fi sound by lowering the sample rate
and/or decreasing the number of bits. Realtime modify filters
connected in series allow you to reshape the sound freely.

Level

When RADIO or PLAYER is selected

-20 +20 dB

This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage.

Tuning

0100

Flanger

This is a parameter for RADIO. It simulates the sounds that occur


when you adjust the tuning frequency of an AM radio.

This produces a flanging effect that gives a sort of twisting


character to the sound.

Wow Flt

This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter


is set to FLANGER.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the flanger effect on/off.

Rate
Determines the rate of the flanging effect.

Depth

0100

Determines the depth of the flanging effect.

Manual
Adjusts the center frequency at which to apply the effect.

96

Noise

0100

0100

This simulates noise.

Filter
0100

0100

This is a parameter for PLAYER. It simulates the wow and flutter


which occur when the speed of the turntable is not constant.

0100

Adjusts the filter.

D:E

100:00:100

This adjusts the volume balance of the direct and effect sounds.

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

When DIGITAL is selected


Pre Filter

Noise Suppressor
OFF, ON

This filter decreases digital distortion. When turned off, you can
create an intense lo-fi sound incorporating digital distortion.

Smpl Rate

OFF, 1/21/32

Modify the sample rate.

Bit

On/Off
OFF, 151

Modify the number of data bits. If this is turned off, the number of
data bits will be unchanged. If an extremely low number of bits is
selected, loud noise may appear even when there is no sound,
depending on the input source. In such cases, raise the threshold of
the noise suppressor.

OFF, ON

This filter decreases the digital distortion produced by lo-fi.


By turning this off, you can create an extremely lo-fi sound.

Fx Level

Threshold

High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no
sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down.

Octave

Modify Fil
This is a filter featuring a wide range of possible settings (modifiable
filter). Select different types to get a variety of different filter effects.

This adds a note one octave lower, creating a richer sound.

On/Off

OFF:

This parameter turns the octave effect on/off.

The modify filter will not be used.

Oct Level

LPF:

This adjusts the volume of the sound one octave below.

The effect will function as a low pass filter.

Dir Level

BPF:
HPF:

0100
0100

Phaser

The effect will function as a high pass filter.

0100

Adjust the cutoff frequency.

0100

Adjust the resonance.

Gain

OFF, ON

Adjusts the volume of the direct sound.

The effect will function as a band pass filter.

Resonance

0100

Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function
until volume reaches 0.

0100

Adjusts the volume of the direct sound.

Cutoff F

0100

Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise. If


the noise level is high, a higher setting is appropriate. If the noise
level is low, a lower setting is appropriate. Adjust this value until the
decay of the sound is as natural as possible.

Release
0100

Adjust the volume of the lo-fi sound.

Dir Level

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on/off.

024 dB

Adjust the volume level of the sound that has passed through the
modify filter.

By adding varied-phase portions to the direct sound, the phaser


effect gives a whooshing, swirling character to the sound.
*

This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter


is set to PHASER.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the phaser effect on/off.

Rate

0100

This sets the rate of the Phaser effect.

Depth

0100

Determines the depth of the Phaser effect.

Manual

0100

Adjusts the center frequency of the phaser effect.

Resonance

0100

Determines the amount of resonance (feedback). Increasing the value


will emphasize the effect, creating a more unusual sound.

97

Section 3

Post Fltr

This effect reduces the noise and hum. Since it suppresses the noise
in synchronization with the envelope of the sound (the way in which
the sound decays over time), it has very little effect on the sound,
and does not harm the natural character of the sound.

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

Pitch Shifter

Preamp

This effect changes the pitch of the original sound (up or down)
within a range of two octaves.

Adjust the distortion and tone of the guitar sound.

This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter


is set to PITCH SFT.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the pitch shifter effect on/off.

Selects either manual pitch shifter MANUAL or pedal pitch shifter


PEDAL.

MANUAL:
This is a simple pitch shifter.

PEDAL:
The effect will function as a pedal pitch shifter. The effect of the wah
pedal can be obtained by operating the Expression pedal.
For a detailed explanation, see When Using an Expression Pedal
(p. 187).

-24DETUNE +24

Adjusts the amount of pitch shift (the amount of pitch change) in


semitone steps. By selecting DETUNE, you can add a slightly
pitch-shifted sound to the input sound, producing a detune effect.
*

This effect can be used when the P.Shift Type parameter is set to
MANUAL.

D:E

When all Bass, Middle and Treble are set to 0, no sound may be
produced depending on the Type setting.

On/Off

OFF, ON

Turns the preamp effect on/off.

Type

Type

Pitch

100:00:100

This sets the type of the preamp. The distortion and tone
characteristics of each amp are as shown below:

With COSM GTR AMP, COSM COMP GTR, or


VO+GT AMP algorithms
JC-120

The sound of the Roland JC-120, a favorite


of pro musicians around the world.

CLEAN

The sound of a conventional built-in tube


amp.
Allows you to obtain a crunch effect that
creates a natural distortion.
A simulation of the latest tube amp widely
used in styles from blues and rock.
Allows you to obtain the Liverpool sound of
the 60s.
A lead sound with a rich middle ideal for
Blues.
The sound of a tube amp typical of the late
70s to 80s, characterized by a distinctive
mid-range.
The sound of a large tube amp stack that was
indispensable to the British hard rock of the
70s, and is used to this day by many hard
rock guitarists.
A trebly sound created by using input I of the
guitar amp.
A trebly sound created by using input I of the
guitar amp.
The sound of connecting inputs I and II of the
guitar amp in parallel, creating a sound with a
stronger low end than I.
A tube amp sound with versatile distortion,
usable in a wide range of styles.
The sound of a large tube amp, suitable for
heavy metal.
A high gain and powerful metal sound.

CRUNCH
MATCH
VO DRV
BLUES
BG LEAD

This adjusts the volume balance of the direct and effect sounds.

Separation

-50 +50

MS (1, 2, 1+2)

Adjusts the diffusion. The panning of the direct sound and effect
sound can be spread to left and right. This will be effective when
stereo output is used.
1
2
1+2

SLDN
METAL
METAL D

98

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

With COSM BASS AMP or COSM COMP BSS


algorithms
It produces the vintage sound of an early
transistor amp.
It produces the sound of a large double-stack
vacuum tube amp with ultra-lows and a crisp
edge.

AC
AMG

Volume

0100

Ring Modulator
This creates a bell-like sound by ring-modulating the guitar sound
with the signal from the internal oscillator. The sound will be
unmusical and lack distinctive pitches.

On/Off
Frequency

Adjusts the volume and distortion of the amp.

This adjusts the frequency of the internal oscillator.

Bass

Fx Level

GUITAR AMP: 0100, BASS AMP:-100 +100

Adjusts the volume of the effect sound.

Middle

Dir Level

If you have selected MATCH or VO DRV as the type, the middle


control will have no effect.

Treble

GUITAR AMP: 0100, BASS AMP: -100 +100

Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range.

0100

This can be selected in the COSM GTR AMP, COSM COMP


GTR, or the VO+GT.AMP algorithm.
Adjusts the tone for the ultra high frequency range.
*

If you have selected MATCH or VO DRV as the type, raising


presence will cut the high range (the value will change from 0 to 100).

Master

0100

Slow Attack
This produces a volume-swell effect (violin-like sound).
*

Presence

0100

Adjust the volume of the direct sound.

Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range.


*

0100

0100

Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp.

This effect can be used in the COSM GTR AMP algorithm when
the MODULATION Type parameter is set to SLOW ATCK.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the slow attack effect on/off.

RiseTme

102000 ms

This adjusts the time needed for the volume to reach its maximum
from the moment you begin picking.

Level

0100

Adjust the volume of the slow attack sound.

Bright

OFF, ON

(with JC-120, CLEAN, CRUNCH, BLUES, BG LEAD, AC, AMG)


Turns the bright setting on/off.

OFF:
Bright is not used.

ON:
Bright is switched on to create a lighter and crisper tone.

Gain

LOW, MIDDLE, HIGH

Adjusts the distortion of the amp. Distortion will successively


increase for settings of LOW, MIDDLE and HIGH.
*

The sound of each Type is created on the basis that the Gain is set to
MIDDLE. So, normally set it to MIDDLE.

99

Section 3

Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range.

GUITAR AMP: 0100, BASS AMP:-100 +100

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the ring modulator effect on/off.

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

Speaker Simulator

Tremolo/Pan

This simulates the characteristics of various types of speakers. When


the output of the BR-900CD is connected directly to a mixer, etc., this
can be used to create the sound of your favorite speakers system.

Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume. Pan


cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right (when
stereo output is used).

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the speaker simulator effect on/off.

On/Off

Type

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the tremolo/pan effect on/off.

Selects the type of speaker that will be simulated.


*

This effect can be used when the MODULATION Type parameter


is set to TRM/PAN.

On Mic simulates the sound when a dynamic microphone is used,


and Off Mic simulates the sound when a condenser microphone is
used.

Mode
Selects tremolo or pan; also selects how the effect is applied

TRM-TRI:

With COSM GTR AMP, COSM COMP GTR,


or VO+GT AMP algorithms

The volume will change cyclically. Smooth change will be produced.

fig.04-128

The volume will change cyclically. Abrupt change will be produced.

SP Simulator
Type
SMALL
MIDDLE
JC-120
TWIN
twin
MATCH
match
VO DRV
vo drv
BG STK
bg stk
MS STK
ms stk
METAL

Cabinet

Speaker
Unit

Microphone
Setting

Small open-back enclosure

10 inch

On Mic

Open-back enclosure

12 inch

On Mic

Comments

PAN-TRI:
The sound will be moved cyclically between left and right. Smooth
change will be produced.

Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)

On Mic

Roland JC-120 Simulation

Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)

On Mic

A setting suitable for CLEAN

PAN-SQR:

Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)

Off Mic

A setting suitable for CLEAN

Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)

On Mic

A setting suitable for MATCH

Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)

Off Mic

A setting suitable for MATCH

The sound will be moved cyclically between left and right. Abrupt
change will be produced.

Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)

On Mic

A setting suitable for VO DRV

Open-back enclosure 12 inch (two units)

Off Mic

A setting suitable for VO DRV

Large Sealed enclosure 12 inch (two units)

OnMic

A setting suitable for BG LEAD

Large sealed enclosure 12 inch (two units)

Off Mic

A setting suitable for BG LEAD

Rate

Large sealed enclosure 12 inch (four units)

On Mic

A setting suitable for MS

Large sealed enclosure 12 inch (four units)

Off Mic

A setting suitable for MS

Adjust the rate at which the effect will operate.

12 inch (four units)

Off Mic

Large dual stack

fig.04-129

Cabinet

Speaker
Unit

Large sealed enclosure 15 inch (two units)

Microphone
Setting

PAN-TRI and PAN-SQR are obtained with stereo recording


(using two tracks).

0100

Depth

With COSM BASS AMP or COSM COMP


BSS algorithms
SP Simulator
Type
AC
ac
AMG
amg

TRM-SQR:

0100

Adjusts the depth of the effect.

Voice Transformer

Comments

On Mic

A setting suitable for AC

Large sealed enclosure 15 inch (two units)

Off Mic

A setting suitable for AC

Large sealed enclosure 10 inch (eight units)

On Mic

A setting suitable for AMG

Large sealed enclosure 10 inch (eight units)

Off Mic

A setting suitable for AMG

This controls the formants, allowing a variety of voice characters to


be created. This adds two voice characters with differing formants to
the direct sound.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the voice transformer effect on/off.

Mic Set

CENTER, 110 cm

This simulates the microphone position. CENTER simulates the


condition that the microphone is set in the middle of the speaker
cone. 110 cm means that the microphone is moved away from the
center of the speaker cone.

Mic Level

0100

Adjusts the volume of the microphone.

Dir Level
Adjust the volume of the direct sound.

Formant1
Formant2

-100 +100

Adjust the formant of the voice character 2.

FX1 Level

0100

Adjust the volume of the voice character 1.

0100

FX2 Level

0100

Adjust the volume of the voice character 2.

Dir Level
Adjust the volume of the direct sound.

100

-100 +100

Adjust the formant of the voice character 1.

0100

Insert Effect Parameter Functions

When PEDAL is selected

Wah
The wah effect creates a unique tone by changing the frequency
response characteristics of a filter.
Touch wah creates an automatic wah by changing the filter in
response to the volume of the input. Pedal wah lets you use an
Expression pedal or the like to obtain real-time control of the wah
effect.

* You can use this effect with the following algorithms when
WAH is selected for the 4BAND EQ/WAH Type setting.
COSM GTR AMP

COSM BASS AMP

COSM COMP GTR

COSM COMP BSS

BASS MULTI

STEREO MULTI

Peak

0100

This adjusts the amount of wah effect applied. Lower values provide
a mild wah effect, while higher values result in a sharper wah sound.
With a value of 50 a standard wah sound will be produced.

Level

0100

Adjusts the volume.

Section 3

On/Off

The effect of the wah pedal can be obtained by operating the


Expression pedal.
For a detailed explanation, refer to When Using an Expression
Pedal (p. 187).

OFF, ON

Turns the touch wah/pedal wah effect on/off.

Type
Selects either touch wah TOUCH or pedal wah PEDAL.

TOUCH:
The effect will function as a touch wah.

PEDAL:
The effect will function as a pedal wah.

When TOUCH is selected


Polarity
Selection for the direction in which the filter will change in response
to the input.

UP:
The frequency of the filter will rise.

DOWN:
The frequency of the filter will fall.

Sens

0100

This adjusts the sensitivity at which the filter will change in the
direction determined by the polarity setting. Higher values will
result in a stronger response. With a setting of 0, the strength of
picking will have no effect.

Frequency

0100

This adjusts the center frequency of the Wah effect.

Peak

0100

This adjusts the amount of wah effect applied. Lower values provide
a mild wah effect, while higher values result in a sharper wah sound.
With a value of 50 a standard wah sound will be produced.

Level

0100

Adjusts the volume.

101

Mastering
Use the Mastering Tool Kit to produce a two-track master
of the bounce tracks with the levels optimized.

1. Press [REC MODE] several times until MASTERING


is indicated for REC MODE at the left of the screen.
2. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the recording
source V-Track, and then press [ENTER].

What is Mastering Tool Kit?


When creating an audio CD from your recorded songs,
or recording to an MD or similar media, the overall
volume needs to be restrained, so that even the loudest
portions of the songs are handled appropriately on the
CD or MD. However, this often results in an overall
lowering of the volume, resulting in a CD or MD that
lacks excitement and impact.
Moreover, in the low-frequency range, to which the
human ear is not very sensitive, the sound actually
produced might be perceived as being somewhat low in
volume, even though the meter shows that its at the
maximum level. This also makes it difficult to create
powerful sounds.
With the Mastering Tool Kit, however, you can
smooth out the differences in volume that occur over the
course of a song, while also correcting the balance in the
low end.
We recommend mastering with the Mastering Tool Kit
in the final stage of creating songs.

The Mastering screen appears in the display.


fig.01-801d

Recoding source

V-Tracks with recorded data.

V-Tracks without data.

* At this point, the Mastering Tool Kit is automatically selected


as the effect.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to the
recording-destination V-track and turn the TIME/
VALUE dial to select the V-Track.
fig.01-802d

Recoding destination

* The Mastering Tool Kit features 19 pre-programmed


Preset Patches (P01P19), 19 rewritable User
Patches (U01U19), and 19 Song Patches, which are
stored individually for each song (S01S19).
fig.01-800

BR-900CD

Memory Card
Song

Preset
Patch

User
Patch

Song
Patch

The REC TRACK button for the track selected as the


recording destination flashes in red.
4. Press [EFFECTS].

Mastering Tool Kit Patch List (p. 205)

The Mastering Tool Kit selection screen appears in the


display.
fig.01-806d

P: Preset / S: Song / U: User

* In Mastering mode, the following buttons are disabled after


you set the recording source and destination and return to the
Play screen. In addition, you cannot change the point to which
the insert effects are connected (p. 87).
[INPUT SELECT], [TUNER], [PAN/EQ],
[LOOP EFFECTS], [PITCH CORRECTION],
[PHRASE TRAINER],
[ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF], [EDIT],
[RHYTHM PAD], [V-TRACK], [DELETE/MUTE]

102

Algorithm
Name

Bank

Number

Patch Name

Mastering

5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the Preset/Song/


User patch and number for the Mastering Tool Kit.

Editing the Mastering Tool Kit


Settings

Mastering Tool Kit Patch List (p. 205)

To create a new patch, select the patch that most closely


resembles the sound you have in mind from the effects
patches already stored in the unit, then edit its settings.

6. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.


The overall volume is adjusted by the MASTER fader. At
this time, raise the volume as high as possible without
allowing the sound to distort.
7. Press [REC].

fig.01-804

Flash

1. Carry out Steps 13 from p. 102, and switch to


Mastering mode.
2. Press [EFFECTS] (MASTERING TOOL KIT).

Section 3

[REC] flashes in red and the BR-900CD enters the


recording standby state.

If you wish to save the effect settings that you edited, save
them as a user patch or song patch.

The Mastering Tool Kit selection screen appears.


fig.01-806d

P: Preset / S: Song / U: User


Algorithm
Name

Bank

Number

Patch Name

8. Press [PLAY].
[REC] stop flashing in red and instead light solidly, and
recording starts.
fig.01-805

Lit

9. When you finish mastering, press [STOP].


* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

3. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the Preset/Song/


User and number.
4. Press CURSOR [
press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to EDIT, and

The display switches to the Mastering Tool Kit Edit


screen, which shows the algorithm (the effects used,
shown in the sequence they are connected).
fig.01-807d

You can also display this screen directly by pressing


[ENTER] while the cursor is positioned at the Preset/Song/
User or number.

103

Mastering

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to each


effect and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to turn each
effect on or off.

fig.01-809d

Blocks that are turned on are shown in uppercase letters,


while blocks that are turned off are shown in lowercase
letters. Turn on the effects that you want to use.
6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to the
effect with the parameter that you want to change and
press [ENTER].
The Parameter Setting screen for each effect appears.
fig.01-808d

2. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


enter the patch name.
* Press [ENTER] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.
7. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select a parameter, and turn
the TIME/VALUE dial to edit the value.
8. If you would like to edit another effect, press [EXIT] to
return to the previous screen, and repeat steps 5-6.
9. If you wish to save the current effect settings, perform
the procedure described in Saving Mastering Tool Kit
Settings, below.

3. After you have completed entering the effect settings


and patch name as desired, press [EXIT] to return to the
Kit Selection screen.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
WRITE, and press [ENTER].
The Write screen appears.
fig.01-810d

Edited effect settings are temporary. If you exit the Edit


Effect screen without saving the effect patch you changed,
TMP appears next to the indication of the bank.
Be aware that if you select a new effect patch while TMP is
displayed, the altered effect patch is returned to its original
settings and the changes are lost.

Saving the Mastering Tool


Kit Settings (Write)
This assigns a name (patch name) to the edited patch settings
and saves the settings.
* You cannot write patches while songs are being recorded or
played back.
* If you do not need to change patch name, go to step 4.
1. At the Mastering Tool Kit selection screen, press
CURSOR [ ] to move the cursor to NAME, and
press [ENTER].
The Patch Name Setting screen appears.

104

5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the patch number


to which to write the new patch.
6. After youve selected the destination, press [ENTER].
After the save has been completed, you are returned to
the Mastering Tool Kit selection screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

Mastering Tool Kit Parameter Functions


Algorithm
fig.04-204

=[EQ]=[BCUT]=[ENH]=[IN]=[EXP]
[COMP]=[MIX]=[LIM]=[OUT]
Equalizer
Bass Cut Filter
Enhancer
Input

Section 3

Expander
Compressor
Mixer
Limiter
Output

Parameter List
Equalizer

High Mid Q

On/Off

OFF, ON

0.316.0

Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve for the upper-low
ranges center frequency.

This parameter turns the equalizer effect on/off.

High Type

Input Gain

Sets the equalizer type (shelving, peaking) for the upper range.

-24 +12 dB
Sets the overall volume before passing through the equalizer.

Low Type

SHELVG, PEAK

Sets the equalizer type (shelving, peaking) for the lower range.

Low Gain

-12 +12 dB

SHELVG, PEAK

High Gain

-12 +12 dB

Sets the amount of boost or cut in the upper range.

High Freq

1.420.0 kHz

Sets the center frequency for the upper range.

Sets the amount of boost or cut in the lower range.

High Q

Low Freq

Sets the frequency response curve steepness for the upper ranges
center frequency. (*1)

20 Hz2.0 kHz

Sets the center frequency for the lower range.

Low Q

0.316.0

Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve for the lower
ranges center frequency. (*1)

Low Mid Gain

-12 +12 dB

Output Gain

0.316.0

-24 +12 dB

Sets the overall volume level after equalization.


(*1) The Low Q/Hi Q setting is disabled when SHELVG (shelving
type equalization) is selected for the Low Type or High Type.

Sets the amount of boost or cut in the mid-low range.

Low Mid Freq

20 Hz8.0 kHz

Sets the center frequency for the mid-low range.

Low Mid Q

0.316.0

Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve for the mid-low
ranges center frequency.

High Mid Gain

-12 +12 dB

Sets the amount of boost or cut in the upper-low range.

High Mid Freq

20 Hz8.0 kHz

Sets the center frequency for the upper-midrange.

105

Mastering Tool Kit Parameter Functions

Bass Cut Filter

Expander

This is a filter that cuts unwanted low range noise, such as pops.

This expands the dynamic range at a fixed ratio.

On/Off

On/Off

OFF, ON

This setting turns the Bass Cut Filter on/off.

Freq

OFF, ON

This setting turns the expander on/off.

20 Hz2.0 kHz

This sets the frequency containing popping or other undesirable


lower-range noises that you want to cut.

Lo Thres

Lo Ratio

Enhancer

-800 dB

This sets the volume level at which the lower-range expander goes
into effect.

1:1.001:16.0, 1:INF

This sets the ratio of increase in output of the lower range when the
input level falls below the Lo threshold level.

This adds more liveliness to the sound, putting sounds at the


forefront.

Lo Attack

On/Off

This sets the time it takes for the lower-range expander to go into
effect once the input level falls below the Lo threshold level.

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the enhancer effect on/off.

Sens

Lo Release
0100

This sets the amount of Enhancer that is applied.

Freq

1.010.0 kHz

0100 ms

505000 ms

This sets the time it takes for the lower-range expander effect to stop
once the input level exceeds the Lo threshold level.

Mid Thres

-800 dB

Sets the frequency at which the enhancer effect will begin to be


applied.

This sets the volume level at which the midrange expander goes into
effect.

Mix Lvl

Mid Ratio

-24 +12 dB

1:1.001:16.0, 1:INF

Sets the volume of the effect sound.

This sets the ratio of increase in output of the midrange when the
input level falls below the Middle threshold level.

Input

Mid Attack

This divides the original sound into three frequency ranges: low,
mid, and high.

Gain

-24 +12 dB

Sets the overall volume level before the signal passes through the
expander/compressor.

Dly Time

010 ms

This sets the amount of time by which the source input sound is
delayed.

SplitL

20800 Hz

This sets the frequency (in the lower range) at which the source
sound is split into three separate ranges.

SplitH

1.616.0 kHz

This sets the frequency (in the upper range) at which the source
sound is split into three separate ranges.

0100 ms

This sets the time it takes for the midrange expander to go into effect
once the input level falls below the Middle threshold level.

Mid Release

505000 ms

This sets the time it takes for the midrange expander effect to stop
once the input level exceeds the Middle threshold level.

Hi Thres

-800 dB

This sets the volume level at which the upper-range expander goes
into effect.

Hi Ratio

1:1.001:16.0, 1:INF

This sets the ratio of increase in output of the upper range when the
input level falls below the Hi threshold level.

Hi Attack

0100 ms

This sets the time it takes for the upper-range expander to go into
effect once the input level falls below the Hi threshold level.

Hi Release

505000 ms

This sets the time it takes for the upper-range expander effect to stop
once the input level exceeds the Hi threshold level.

106

Mastering Tool Kit Parameter Functions

Compressor

Mixer

This compresses the overall output signal when the input volume
level exceeds a set value.

Adjusts the volume of each frequency band.

On/Off

OFF, ON

Sets the volume level of the lower range after the signal passes
through the expander and compressor.

-240 dB

Mid Level

This parameter turns the compressor effect on/off.

Lo Thres

Lo Level

-80 +6 dB

-80 +6 dB

This sets the volume level at which the lower-range compressor goes
into effect.

Sets the volume level of the midrange after the signal passes through
the expander and compressor.

Lo Ratio

Hi Level

1:1.001:16.0, 1:INF

This sets the ratio of suppression of the lower-range output when the
input level exceeds the Lo threshold level.

0100 ms

This sets the time it takes for the lower-range compressor to go into
effect once the input level exceeds the Lo threshold level.

Lo Release

505000 ms

Limiter
This suppresses high-level signals to prevent distortion.

This sets the time it takes for the lower-range compressor effect to
stop once the input level falls below the Lo threshold level.

On/Off

Mid Thres

Thres

-240 dB

OFF, ON

Sets the limiter to ON or OFF.

-240 dB

This sets the volume level at which the midrange compressor goes
into effect.

Adjust this as appropriate for the input signal from your bass.

Mid Ratio

This sets the time it takes for the limiter to go into effect once the
input level exceeds the threshold level.

1:1.001:16.0, 1:INF

This sets the ratio of suppression of the midrange output when the
input level exceeds the Middle threshold level.

Mid Attack

0100 ms

This sets the time it takes for the midrange compressor to go into
effect once the input level exceeds the Middle threshold level.

Mid Release

505000 ms

Attack

Release

505000 ms

Adjusts the time until when the limiter will turn off after the input
level falls below the threshold level.

Output

This sets the time it takes for the midrange compressor effect to stop
once the input level falls below the Middle threshold level.

This makes settings that affect the overall output.

Hi Thres

Level

-240 dB

0100 ms

-80 +6 dB

This sets the volume level at which the upper-range compressor goes
into effect.

Sets the volume level of the overall sound after the signal passes
through the limiter.

Hi Ratio

Soft Clip

1:1.001:16.0, 1:INF

Off, On

This sets the ratio of suppression of the upper-range output when


the input level exceeds the Hi threshold level.

This suppresses noticeable distortion occurring with heavy use of


the compressor/limiter effect.

Hi Attack

Dither

0100 ms

This sets the time it takes for the upper-range compressor to go into
effect once the input level exceeds the Hi threshold level.

Hi Release

OFF, 248 BIT

This prevents the action of muting sounds from being too noticeable.

505000 ms

This sets the time it takes for the upper-range compressor effect to
stop once the input level falls below the Hi threshold level.
*

With the compressor, the level is automatically adjusted to the


optimum setting according to the threshold (Thres) and ratio (Ratio)
settings. In addition, since lengthening the attack (Attack) setting
may result in distortion, a buffer (margin) of -6 dB is provided. Adjust
the Mixer level as needed.

107

Section 3

Lo Attack

-80 +6 dB

Sets the volume level of the upper range after the signal passes
through the expander and compressor.

Using the Loop Effects/Track EQ


Here is an explanation of how to change the various
parameters for the loop effects (chorus/delay/doubling/
reverb).

When using REV


Select either HALL or ROOM.
fig.01-703d

For an explanation of loop effects, refer to Loop Effect


Parameter Functions (p. 111).

Loop effects do not have patches. Loop effect settings are


saved along with the song data.
If you want to save the settings in the currently selected song,
hold down [STOP], and press [REC].

4. To change the settings for the selected effect, press


CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the parameter and turn the
TIME/VALUE dial to change the set value.
fig.01-704d

Selecting the Loop Effect


* You cannot use the chorus, delay, and doubling effects
together. You must choose only one.
1. Press [LOOP EFFECTS].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to CHO/
DLY or REV, and press [ENTER].
fig.01-701d

For a description of the parameters for each effect, refer to


Loop Effect Parameter Functions (p. 111).
5. When you finish making settings,
press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the PLAY screen.

Doubling
When you want to spread out the guitar backing sound
to the left and right, record the same guitar backing
separately to two tracks, then pan the sounds to the left
and right. This is known as doubling.
By using the DBLN loop effect, you can produce a
doubling effect even from a single-track (mono)
recording, allowing you to make more efficient use of
the tracks.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] until FX Type or Type is
displayed, then turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
loop effect.

When using CHO/DLY


Select from CHORUS, DELAY, or DBLN
(doubling).
fig.01-702d

108

* If you want to emphasize the doubling effect, pan the track


completely to the right or to the left and increase the
doubling effect level. In addition, use the following
procedure to raise the send level.

Using the Loop Effects/Track EQ

Adjusting How the Loop


Effect is Applied
The following explains how you can alter the volume of the
signals sent by each track to the loop effects (the send level),
and control the degree to which the loop effects are applied.

If you then press CURSOR [ ], the screen for setting


the input-source send level appears in the display; if you
press CURSOR [ ], the one for setting the Rhythm
send level is displayed.
fig.01-708d

1. Press [LOOP EFFECTS].


2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to CHO/
DLY or REV, and press [ENTER].
fig.01-705d

fig.01-709d

Section 3
To adjust the send level for the input source, move the
cursor to In Send. To adjust the send level for the
Rhythm, move the cursor to Rhy Send. The setting is
adjusted by turning the TIME/VALUE dial to the
desired value.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select the screen for setting


the send level of each track appears.

When using CHO/DLY


fig.01-706d

5. After you have completed adjusting the send level,


press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen

You can switch screens in the following sequence, with the


screen cycling to the next screen each time [LOOP EFFECTS]
is pressed.
Loop Effects selection screen Send Level screen
Type screen Play screen

When using REV


fig.01-707d

4. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust


the send level for each track.
* Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track
corresponding to the button pressed.

109

Using the Loop Effects/Track EQ

Setting the Track EQ


This section explains how to edit the Track EQ settings
(parameters).

For a fuller description of Track EQ, refer to Track EQ


Parameter Functions (p. 112).

Track EQ do not have patches. Loop effect settings are


saved along with the song data.
If you want to save the settings in the currently selected song,
hold down [STOP], and press [REC].
1. Press [PAN/EQ].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to EQ,

fig.01-711d

3. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


set the EQ On/Off for each track.
* Pressing a REC TRACK button moves the cursor to the track
corresponding to the button pressed.
4. To change the EQ settings, press CURSOR [
]
repeatedly to display the parameter screen, then turn
the TIME/VALUE dial to change the settings value.
fig.01-712d

5. After you have completed the setting, press [EXIT]


repeatedly to return to the Play screen

110

Loop Effect Parameter Functions


Parameter List
REVERB

This selects the chorus, delay, or doubling effect.

A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound,


making the final output sound thicker and broader.

Reverberation (or reverb) is the effect caused by sound waves


decaying in an acoustic space, or a digital simulation thereof. This
decay occurs because sound waves bounce off many walls, ceilings,
objects, etc. in a very complex way. These reflections, coupled with
absorption by various objects, dissipate the acoustic energy over a
certain period of time (called the decay time). The ear perceives this
phenomenon as a continuous wash of sound.

DELAY:

Type

This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the


direct sound.

This selects the Reverb Type.

FX Type
This sets the type of the effect.

CHORUS:

ROOM:

DBLN:
By adding a slightly time-delayed sound to the direct sound, this
produces the impression that multiple sources are sounding together
(a doubling effect). The delayed sound will be output from the
side opposite to which the playback track has been panned.

0100

Adjusts the rate of the Chorus effect.

Depth

0 100

Adjusts the depth of the Chorus effect.

Pre Dly

Simulates the reverberation in a small room.

HALL:
Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall.

Rev Time

0.110.0

This parameter adjusts the duration (time) of the reverb.

When CHORUS is selected


Rate

Section 3

CHORUS/DELAY/DBLN (Doubling)

Tone

-12 +12

Adjusts the tone.

E.Level

0100

This adjusts the volume of the reverb sound.

0.550.0 ms

Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the
direct sound has been output.

E.Level

0100

Adjusts the volume of the effect sound.

When DELAY is selected


Dly Tme

101000 ms

This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval for which
sound is delayed).

Feedback

0100

This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback. Changing the


amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is
repeated to change as well.

E.Level

0100

This adjusts the volume of the delay sound.

Rev Send

0100

Adjust the volume of the reverb that is applied to the delayed sound.

When DBLN is selected


Dly Tme

0.550.0 ms

This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval for which
sound is delayed).

E.Level

0100

This adjusts the volume of the delay sound.

111

Track EQ Parameter Functions


Parameter List
This is a two-band equalizer that is independent for each track.

If you adjust the equalizer while listening to the sound, you


may notice a clicking noise. This is not a malfunction. If the
noise is objectionable, make adjustments while the sound is
not playing.

On/Off

OFF, ON

This parameter turns the equalizer effect on/off.

LoG

-12 +12 dB

This sets the gain (-12 to +12 dB) for the low-range equalizer
(shelving type).

LoF

40 Hz1.5 kHz

This sets the center frequency (40Hz to 1.5 kHz) for the low-range
equalizer (shelving type).

HiG

-12 +12 dB

This sets the gain (-12 to +12 dB) for the high-range equalizer
(shelving type).

HiF

500 Hz18 kHz

This sets the center frequency (500 Hz to 18 kHz) for the high-range
equalizer (shelving type).

112

Fixing the Pitch of Vocals (Pitch Correction)


The Pitch Correction
The term Pitch Correction is used to describe a group of effects that are used on recorded vocal tracks to fix incorrect pitches.
When compared with guitars, pianos, and other musical instruments, the human voice generally produces a relatively unstable
tone. And when recording unprepared vocalists, this can often lead to considerable difficulties in the form of notes sung out of
tune and poor sound quality.
When properly used, the BR-900CDs Pitch Correction will help to ensure that your vocal tracks will always sound great.

Makeup of the Pitch Correction


Section 3

This effect is intended for use with the playback of recorded audio tracks and cannot be used on input sources.
The Pitch Correction and audio tracks are connected as shown below.
fig.35-01

Chorus / Delay
Send

CHORUS/
DELAY

L
R

MIX

Track Pan

Track

PITCH
CORRECTION

L
R MIX

EQUALIZER

REVERB

L MIX
R

Reverb Send

Pitch Correction Patches


In the case of pitch correction, you can set up the way in which the effect is to be applied and can then save these settings. A group
of such settings is referred to as a Patch.
At the time of purchase, a total of 5 pitch correction patches (i.e., preset patches) will be stored in the BR-900CD. In addition, 5
song patches can be set up for use within a specific song.

Precautions for Pitch Correction Usage


When you are using the Pitch Correction, you will not be able to use insert effects, or the Mastering Tool Kit.
The Pitch Correction is intended for use with recorded vocal tracks and it cannot be applied to input sources or the Master output.
These effects will function when applied to solo performances other than vocals; however, the fundamental differences
between the character of the human voice and that of musical instruments makes it highly unlikely that the desired result will
be achieved.
In the following situations, the Pitch Correction may not be able to accurately detect the pitch, and normal operation will not
be possible.
-

When other sounds are mixed in with the solo vocal part.
When the volume of the vocal part is excessively loud or quiet.

When the vocal part contains a lot of sibilance or is very breathy (such as a singer that whispers, or one with a husky voice).
When the vocal part contains an excessive number of different pitches (such as fast, deep vibrato or fast speech)
When the part is sung with a very low voice containing a lot of harmonics.
If the BR-900CD is frequently incorrect when detecting the pitch, either change the Type setting for the pitch correction function.
In certain cases, this will reduce the number of incorrect detections.

113

Fixing the Pitch of Vocals (Pitch Correction)

Using the Pitch Correction


Lets now use the BR-900CDs pitch correction feature to
clean up some mistakes in a solo vocal part.

8. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the patch number


and select a patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.

Pitch Correction Patch List (p. 205)

Using this feature, we will be able to correct pitches in real


time and in semitone units.
1. Before using pitch correction, record a solo vocal track
to work with.
2. Press [REC MODE] several times until the BOUNCE
indicator lights up.
The BR-900CD will now enter Bounce mode.
3. Press [PITCH CORRECTION].
This button will light up to indicate that the Pitch
Correction is turned on.

9. Press [EXIT].
10. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
track or V-track to which the edited result is to be recorded.

The Pitch Correction patch selection screen will appear.


fig.35-06d

The button for the selected track flashes in red, indicating


that the track has been selected as the REC track.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
LOCAT, and press [ENTER].
fig.35-08d

11. Move the faders for all tracks except the track
containing the solo vocal recording all the way down.
Note that this also applies to the Rhythm fader.
12. Press [ZERO] to jump to the start of the song and then
press [REC].
[REC] will turn red and start to flash, indicating that the
BR-900CD is now ready for recording.
13. Press [PLAY].

5. Use TIME/VALUE dial to select the track containing


the solo vocal recording.
The following tracks can be selected at this time:
Tracks 1 through 6, Tracks 7/8
6. Start playback on the BR-900CD.
Pitches will be corrected in the solo vocal part as it is
played. Listen to the part to confirm that it is now
completely in tune, and if necessary, adjust the volume
of the part using the corresponding track fader.
Press [STOP] to end playback.
7. Press [EXIT] to return to the patch selection screen.

Both [PLAY] and [REC] will light up and recording will


start. The solo part will be played and any incorrect
pitches will be fixed. At the same time, the corrected part
will be recorded on the selected track.
14. Press [STOP] at the point where you want to stop
recording.
The BR-900CD will stop playback.
15. Press [ZERO] to jump to the start of the song once again
and then start playback of the recorded track.
Move the fader for the track containing the original vocal
part all the way down, and raise the fader for the track
containing the corrected vocal part to an appropriate
point. As you listen to the corrected part, confirm
whether or not you are happy with the corrections.

If you do not like the way the vocal part was corrected, use
Undo (p. 57) to cancel the recording.

114

Fixing the Pitch of Vocals (Pitch Correction)

Setting the Correction Method for


Vocal Pitch (Pitch Correction Edit)
Each of the preset patches 1 through 5 uses a slightly
different method for correcting pitches. Normally, it will be
sufficient to select the patch that gives the results you like
best; however, if you cannot achieve favorable results using
any of these patches, you can change the Pitch Correction
settings to create a patch of your own.
1. Select a preset patch to base your new patch on.

The Pitch Corrections patch selection screen will appear.


fig.35-06d

5. To save your modified settings, carry out the procedure


described in Saving the Pitch Correction Settings
(Write) below.

] to move the cursor to EDIT,

Saving the Pitch Correction


Settings (Write)

The Pitch Correction edit screen will appear.


3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the setting you
want to change and select a new value using the TIME/
VALUE dial.

Modified Pitch Correction settings are saved by writing them


together under a new patch name.

fig.35-05d

* You cannot write patches while songs are being recorded or


played back.
* If you do not need to change patch name, go to step 4.
1. At the Pitch Correction patch selection screen, press

Type LO.MALE, HI.MALE, LO.FEML, HI.FEML


Set this parameter to match the type of voice in the original
vocal part. If this parameter is not set correctly, problems will be
more likely to occur in pitch detection and correction.

CURSOR [ ] to move the cursor to NAME, and


press [ENTER].
The Patch Name Setting screen appears.
fig.35-11d

LO.MALE (Low Male)


Select this setting for a low-pitched, male voice.

HI.MALE (High Male)


Select this setting for a high-pitched, male voice.

LO.FEML (Low Female)

2. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


enter the patch name.

Select this setting for a low-pitched, female voice.

HI.FEML (High Female)

* Press [ENTER] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.

Select this setting for a high-pitched, female voice.

* If the BR-900CD is frequently incorrect when detecting the


pitch, either change the type setting. In certain cases, this will
reduce the number of incorrect detections.

Smooth

0100

This setting determines how quickly pitch correction will react


to changes of pitch in the original vocal part. Large values result
in a longer time before correction is applied; consequently,
changes in pitch will be more gradual. Small values produce
rapid changes in pitch.

3. After you have completed entering the effect settings


and patch name as desired, press [EXIT] to return to the
Patch selection screen.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
WRITE, and press [ENTER].
The Write screen appears.
fig.35-12d

Corrections that are made too rapidly seem robotic.


However, if the correction is too smooth, in some cases it may
appear as if no correction has been applied. For natural
sounding pitch corrections, set the value in a range between 20
and 40.

115

Section 3

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

4. Press [EXIT].

Fixing the Pitch of Vocals (Pitch Correction)

5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the patch number


to which to write the new patch.
6. After youve selected the destination, press [ENTER].
After the save has been completed, you are returned to
the Pitch Correction patch selection screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

Making Detailed Settings for Pitch


Correction (Correction Event Map)

You can make corrections freely at the desired points in


the song by arranging correction events in the sequence
they occur.
The sequence of correction events with the information
they contain is called a correction event map.
Initially, only one correction event, AUTO, is input at
the beginning of the correction event map.

AUTO:
After the specified point in the song, all pitches are
corrected in semitone increments.
3. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to INSERT and
press [ENTER].
A new correction event is inserted.

In the procedures described thus far, what has been


explained is how to correct the overall pitch for the entire
song, from start to finish, in semitone increments.
In actual practice, however, there may be situations where
you want to correct only a certain section or adjust the pitch
differently. In such instances, use the following procedure.
1. Start by switching to BOUNCE mode and selecting the
patch to which pitch correction is to be applied.
2. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to P.MAP in the
Pitch Correction patch selection screen and press
[ENTER].

4. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Time and


specify the time at which you want the correction to
start with the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.03-368d

Note

Time

Smth
(Correction Speed)

The Correction Event Map screen appears.


fig.03-366d

In the Correction Event Map screen, you can input the


time at which you want the pitch correction to start as
well as the pitch.
Taken together, this timing and pitch data is referred to
as a correction event.
fig.03-367

Pitch

Correction
start point

Next event
start point

Correction
pitch

You cannot change the time of the correction event at the


start of the song.
5. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Note and specify
the pitch you want to correct with the TIME/VALUE dial.

Note:
OFF
No correction is made after the specified point in the
song. The song is played using the original pitch.
AUTO
After the specified point in the song, all pitches are
corrected in semitone increments.

Vocal pitch

C, C#, A#, B
The performance after the specified point in the song is
adjusted to the specified pitch.
Time

The reference pitch for NOTE is determined by the tuner's reference


pitch. See Setting the Reference Pitch of the Tuner (p. 189).

116

Fixing the Pitch of Vocals (Pitch Correction)

6. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Smth and


specify the correction speed.

Smth (Smooth)

-100+100

The value set here is added to the value for the Smooth
patch parameter (p. 115).

You can only save a Correction Event Map to a single song.


Even if you switch the patch with the pitch correction, the
Correction Event Map remains unchanged.

When set to 0, the correction proceeds at the rate set in


the patchs Smooth parameter.
The correction is performed more rapidly the lower the
value is compared to the value set for the patch, while
the correction is carried out more smoothly as the value
increases relative to the patchs value.

Section 3

Make this setting so that the sum is in the range from 0 to


100. No effect is achieved if the resulting value is lower than
0 or greater than 100.
7. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to INSERT and
press [ENTER].
Another new correction event is inserted.
8. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to TIME and
specify the time at which you want the correction to
end with the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.03-368d

Note

Time

Smth
(Correction Speed)

9. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to NOTE and


specify OFF.
10. Have the Recorder play the song from the beginning.
The correction is first applied at the point in the song
specified in Step 4, with the correction ending at the
point specified in Step 8.
11. To delete any unnecessary correction events, move the
cursor to the event and press [DELETE/MUTE].
The correction event is deleted.

You cannot delete the correction event at the beginning of the


song. If this correction event is unneeded, rather than
deleting it, just set the function to OFF.
12. Repeat Steps 311 as needed to specify the edited
range.
13. After you have completed entering the settings, press
[EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.

117

MEMO

118

Section 4
Using the
Rhythm

119

Using the Rhythm


The Rhythm is a dedicated Rhythm track that can not only
play back Rhythm sounds as a guide during recording, you
can also use it to play internal Rhythm patterns and original
user-created Rhythm patterns and to play and record these
patterns as your own Rhythm part performances.
The Rhythm features two modes, Pattern mode and
Arrangement mode.

E (Ending)
Music patterns to be placed at the ending of a song.

Song patterns (S001S100)


These are patterns whose data is rewritable, and up to 100
different patterns for each song can be stored on memory
cards.
fig.03-101a

Memory Card

BR-900CD

Pattern Mode

Song

You can perform patterns and create your own original


patterns.

Preset
Pattern

Song
Pattern

Arrangement Mode
You can perform arrangements and create your own original
arrangements.

About the Patterns

About the Arrangements


Arrangements are sequences of patterns arranged in the
order they are performed and with the tempo set.
fig.03-102

These are phrases consisting of from one to several measures


of drum performance.

Intro

Verse

Fill

Tempo: 120.0

Tempo: 110.0

Tempo: 130.0

Types of patterns

Types of arrangements

Preset patterns (P001P327)

Preset arrangements (P01P50)

These are internal patterns stored in the BR-900CD that have


already been prepared for use. There are 327 patterns
categorized by musical genre, such as rock and jazz.
* You cannot change and overwrite Preset pattern data.

These are internal arrangements stored in the BR-900CD that


have already been prepared for use. There are 50 patterns
categorized by musical genre, such as rock and jazz.
* You cannot change and overwrite Preset arrangement data.

Preset patterns include prepared patterns for intros, verses,


fill-ins, and endings (you can confirm the type by looking at
the characters at the end of the pattern name).

In each Preset arrangement (except for Metro 4/4), a BREAK


(rest) of three measures is played after the END (ending), and
then the V1 (verse 1) is played repeatedly.

(Example)
ROCK1-IN (Intro)

ROCK1-V2 (Verse2)

ROCK1-V1 (Verse 1)

ROCK1-F2 (Fill 2)

ROCK1-F1 (Fill 1)

ROCK1-E (Ending)

Preset Pattern List (p. 207)

IN (Intro)

Preset Arrangement List (p. 206)

Song arrangements (S01S05)


These are arrangements whose data is rewritable, and up to 5
different arrangements for each song can be stored on
memory cards.
fig.03-102a

Music patterns to be placed at the beginning of a song.

BR-900CD

V (Verse) 1 and 2

Preset
Arrangement

Memory Card
Song

Music patterns to make up the main part of the song. 1 are


basic patterns and 2 are more advanced versions of 1.

F (Fill) 1 and 2
Music patterns to be used as phrases to connect different
sections of a song. You can select either 1 or 2 depending
on the form that will follow the fill.

120

Song
Arrangement

Using the Rhythm

Switching the Rhythm Mode


The Rhythm mode switches each time [ARRANGE/
PATTERN/OFF] is pressed.

[ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF]: Lit
(Arrangement Mode)

Performing Arrangements
and Patterns
Selecting arrangements
This procedure selects the arrangement to be played with the
Rhythm.

Performance and programming of arrangements is enabled.

1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the


indicator is lit.

Press [PLAY] to start the performance of the arrangement.

fig.03-201d

P: Preset / S: Song
Number

* You cannot play back or record during programming.

Arrangement
Name

[ARRANGE/PATTREN/OFF]: Flashing
(Pattern Mode)
Performance and programming of patterns is enabled.
Press [PLAY] to start the performance of the pattern.
2. Select the arrangement.

[ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF]: Unlit (OFF)

Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the Preset/Song and number.

The Rhythm does not play.

P01P50: Preset arrangements 150


S01S05: Song arrangements 15

Recording Rhythm
Performances
When you want to record Rhythm performances, be sure to
record (bounce) in Bounce mode.
You can have only the Rhythm performance be recorded by
bringing down all of the faders except the Rhythm fader.

3. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.

Performing arrangements
1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
fig.03-202d

For instructions on bounce recording, refer to Putting


Multiple Tracks Together (Bounce) (p. 58).

2. Select an arrangement.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the Preset/Song and number.
3. Move the RHYTHM fader to the positions shown in the
figure below.
fig.03-203

4. Press [ZERO] to reset the play position back to the


beginning of the arrangement, then press [PLAY].
The selected arrangement is performed.

121

Section 4

* You cannot play back or record during programming.

Using the Rhythm

Selecting patterns
This selects the pattern to be played with the Rhythm.
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-203d

P: Preset / S: Song
Number

Pattern
Name

Changing the tempo of the


arrangements or patterns
You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or
pattern being played by carrying out the following
procedure while the Play screen is displayed.
* The arrangements tempo setting is temporarily disabled.
1. Press [CURSOR] and align the cursor up with
TEMPO in the display.
2. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust the tempo.
fig.03-205d

Tempo

2. Select a pattern.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the Preset/Song and number.
P001P327:

Preset patterns 1327

S001S100:

Song patterns 1100

3. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.

Performing patterns
1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-204d

* The change in tempo is only temporary. If you want to change


the arrangements actual tempo, refer to p. 123.
* Tempos cannot be saved to patterns.

Tapping to change the tempo of


the arrangements or patterns
You can temporarily change the tempo of the arrangement or
pattern by the timing with which you press [TAP].
Tap on [TAP] four or more times to change the tempo of the
arrangement or pattern. The tempo becomes that in which
you tapped.
fig.03-206

2. Select a pattern.
Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the Preset/Song and number.
3. Move the RHYTHM fader to the positions shown in the
figure below.
fig.03-203

* The change in tempo is only temporary. If you want to change


the arrangements actual tempo, refer to p. 123.
* Tempos cannot be saved to patterns.

4. Press [PLAY].
The selected pattern is performed.
No sound plays if BREAK is selected for the pattern.

122

Creating Original Arrangements


You can create arrangements (Song arrangements) of up to
999 measures.
1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.

Starting Measure
Set the measure where the pattern that is selected by the
current step will start playing.
fig.03-303a

Step 1

fig.03-301d

Step 2

Intro

Verse

(1 measure)

(1 measure)

Strating
Measure 001

002

003

Set the starting measure to 3 in step 2


Step 1

Intro

Verse

(2 measures)

(1 measure)

Strating
Measure 001

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the Arrangement number.
3. Press [EDIT].
The Arrangement Edit screen appears.

Step 2

003

002

* The starting measure for step 1 is always set to 001. This


cannot be changed.
* You cannot set a starting measure that is equal to, or earlier
than the starting measure that is set for the previous step.

fig.03-302d

Pattern Number
Select the pattern. Set the patterns for each step as shown
in the figure below.
fig.03-304

Step 1

4. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to STEP, and


press [ENTER].
The Recording Standby screen appears.
* You cannot switch from the Recording Standby screen for
arrangements to other screens (except for the drum kit
selection screen).
fig.03-303d

Pattern Number
Step
Starting Measure
Time Signature

Starting
Measure 001

Step 2

Step 3

Intro

Verse

(2 measures)
Tempo: 120.0

(1 measure) (1 measure)
Tempo: 110.0 Tempo: 110.0
003

Fill

004

* When an arrangement is played from within the Play screen,


the arrangement plays all the way to the end, and then the
performance of the pattern set in the last step is repeated.
Thus, by setting the preset pattern P327 BREAK for the last
step, you can have a rest be played repeatedly, which makes it
seem as if the performance of the arrangement has stopped.
fig.03-304a

Step 1

Intro

Step 2

Verse

Step **

Step **

Ending

P327
BREAK

Time Signature
Tempo

Pattern Name

Information about the performance is displayed in the


matrix display at the bottom of the screen.
5. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to Step, then turn
the TIME/VALUE dial to select the step to be edited.
* You can press [REW] to move to the immediately preceding
step, or press [FF] to move to the next step.
6. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the parameter
you want to change, then turn the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the settings value.
* You can press [PLAY] here to play the sound of the pattern in
the currently selected step.

Set the time signature of the pattern that is selected by


the current step.

Tempo
Set the tempo of the pattern that is selected by the
current step.
Valid Settings: 25.0250.0
7. When you have finished creating the arrangement,
press [EXIT] repeatedly.
The Play screen is displayed again, and the arrangement
is saved.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

123

Section 4

* You cannot set a starting measure that is beyond the starting


measure of the next step.

Creating Original Arrangements

Inserting a Step
Perform the procedure below to insert a new step into the
location of the present step.
fig.03-305

1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then


press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
2. Press [EDIT].
The Arrangement Edit screen appears.

Verse

3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to STEP, and


press [ENTER].

Insert
Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Intro

Verse

Fill

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Intro

Verse

Verse

Fill

The Recording Standby screen appears.


4. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
step to be erased.
fig.03-308d

* The parameter value of inserted step will be the same as of the


targeted step.
1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
2. Press [EDIT].

5. Press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to move the cursor to


ERASE and press [ENTER].

The Arrangement Edit screen appears.


3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to STEP, and
press [ENTER].
The Recording Standby screen appears.
4. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
location (step) where the data is to be inserted.

To cancel the operation, press CURSOR [


to return to the Arrangement Edit screen.

] repeatedly

When you press [ENTER], the display indicate Erase!


then return to the Recording Standby screen.

fig.03-306d

Naming Arrangements
You can edit the name of the currently selected arrangement.
* You can use up to eight characters in naming arrangements.
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to move the cursor to
INSERT and press [ENTER].
To cancel the operation, press CURSOR [
the Arrangement Edit screen.

] to return to

When you press [ENTER], the display indicate Insert!


then return to the Recording Standby screen.

2. Press [EDIT].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to move the cursor to
NAME, and press [ENTER].
The Change Arrangement Name screen appears.
fig.03-310d

Erasing a Step
This erases the content of the currently selected step. The
content of the following steps are brought forward to fill the
erased step.
fig.03-307

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Intro

Verse

Fill

Verse

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Intro

Verse

Verse

Erase

* No further data can be deleted when only Step 1 remains.

124

* You cannot change Preset arrangement names.

Creating Original Arrangements

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and turn the TIME/VALUE


dial to change the characters.
* Press [ENTER] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.

7. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.


* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line of
the display, while the lower line shows what is being processed.

5. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.


* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

Copying Arrangements
You can take the currently selected arrangement and copy it
to another Song arrangement.
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
2. Press [EDIT].

This erases Step 2 and all subsequent steps in the


arrangement currently being selected.
* Metro (the metronome) is set in Step 1.
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
2. Press [EDIT].
The Arrangement Edit screen appears.
3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to ERASE, and
press [ENTER].
fig.03-315d

Section 4

The Arrangement Edit screen appears.

Erasing Arrangements

3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to COPY, and


press [ENTER].
The screen for selecting the copy destination is
displayed.
fig.03-312d

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the arrangement


to be erased.
S01S05: Song arrangements 15
5. If you want to erase the arrangement, press [ENTER].
The screen for confirming the deletion appears.
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the copydestination arrangement.

fig.03-316d

S01S05: Song arrangements 15


5. Once you have decided on the copy destination, press
[ENTER].
The screen for confirming the copy destination appears.
fig.03-313d

6. Press [ENTER] (YES) to erase the arrangement.


To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO).
7. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

6. Press [ENTER] (YES) to copy.


To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO).

125

Creating Original Patterns


When creating a Rhythm arrangement by stringing together
Rhythm patterns, there may be times when you do not find
anything suitable among the preset Rhythm patterns, or
when you want to get a Rhythm pattern that sounds exactly
the way you want. In such cases, you can create your own
original Rhythm patterns.

Note concerning creation of patterns

Maximum polyphony for patterns is five voices. This


means you can play up to five drum sounds with the
same timing.

Even if six or more drum sounds are input at the same


time, only five of the drum sounds will be sounded.
However, the signifying the entry in the matrix
display remains as is.

You cannot play the CLOSED HH and OPEN HH


sounds at the same time. However, the signifying
the entry in the matrix display remains as is.

When using cymbals and other sounds that have


lengthy decay times, if other sounds totalling five
voices are input before the previous sound has
completely vanished, Sounds started previously may
be cut off before they finish playing.

You cannot switch to other screens while recording


patterns (except for the pattern record standby screen).

There are three ways to create Rhythm patterns.

Realtime Recording
In Realtime Recording, you record while tapping the TRACK
buttons in time with the metronome. Rhythm patterns are
played back repeatedly, and the data being input is mixed in
with these sounds. Additionally, even if your timing is a little
off when tapping the buttons, you can use the Quantize
function to rectify the input so the timing is correct.

Step Recording
In Step Recording, the timing of sounds and the drum
sounds are programmed one at a time. There are two ways to
input drum sounds:
Specifying the timing of a sound (measure-beat-click),
and inputting the drum sound at that point by tapping
the TRACK button.
Inputting a drum sound at the desired timing within the
detailed framework dividing a single measure (the
matrix). This allows you to visually get an overall grasp
of the Rhythm pattern, making for a simple way to create
Rhythm patterns.

Creating Patterns in Realtime


Recording
1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-401d

Importing SMFs
You can import SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) as song patterns.
For instructions on this procedure, refer to p. 169 or p. 179.

2. Press [EDIT].
fig.03-402d

3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to REAL, and


press [ENTER].
REAL appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen.
The Recording Standby screen appears.
fig.03-403d

Measure

Time Signature

126

Tempo

Quantize

Creating Original Patterns

4. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the


measure, beat, and click from which to start recording
of the pattern.

The current velocity value is briefly indicated where the


beat value normally appears.
fig.03-404d

Measure
This sets the number of measures in the pattern to be
recorded.
Valid Settings: 1999

Tempo
When recording, this sets the tempo for confirming the
pattern.
Valid Settings: 25.0250.0
* The tempo setting here is exclusively for confirmation of the
pattern recording. This tempo is not stored in the pattern (you
cannot make any individual tempo settings for the patterns
themselves).

Velocity

7. Input the drum sounds with the desired timing.


Use REC TRACK [1][6] to input the drum sounds.
You can switch the UPPER and LOWER drum sounds by
pressing [RHYTHM PAD].
[RHYTHM PAD] Lit
Enables input of the UPPER drum sounds.

This sets the time signature (i.e., the beat) for the pattern
to be recorded.

REC TRACK [1]

KICK

REC TRACK [2]

SNARE

Valid Settings: 1/18/1, 1/28/2, 1/48/4, 1/88/8

REC TRACK [3]

CLOSED HIHAT

Quantize

REC TRACK [4]

OPEN HIHAT

This sets the recording quantization.

REC TRACK [5]

CRASH CYMBAL

Setting Quantize lets you to have the sounds being input


conform to preset note lengths, thus eliminating
discrepancies in the input timing.

REC TRACK [6]

RIDE CYMBAL

* Press HI you want to keep the timing used to input the


sounds.
Valid Settings:
Quarter note

Sixteenth-note triplet

Quarter-note triplet

Thirty-second note

Eighth note

Thirty-second-note triplet

Eighth-note triplet

[RHYTHM PAD] Flashing


Enables input of the LOWER drum sounds.
REC TRACK [1]

CROSS STICK

REC TRACK [2]

COWBELL

REC TRACK [3]

TOM1

REC TRACK [4]

TOM2

REC TRACK [5]

TOM3

REC TRACK [6]

TOM4

HI
You can confirm the drum sound currently being input
by checking the matrix at the bottom part of the display.

Sixteenth note
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

Section 4

Time Signature

] to move the cursor to REC,

The count-in is played, and then Realtime Recording


starts.
* You can also start Realtime Recording by pressing the [REC]
button.

Indicated in the matrix


You can confirm the timing at which each rhythm
instrument sounds in the matrix display.
The mark in the lower part of the matrix indicates beat
timing.

6. Set the velocity (how hard the note is played) for the
sounds to be input from the current point by adjusting
Fader 1.

127

Creating Original Patterns

* When a coarse Quantize setting is used, the mark may


indicate half-note or quarter-note timing.
fig.03-405

Ex.)

CLOSED HH
SNARE
KICK

Rehearsing recordings
You can practice (rehearse) your performances along with
the metronome before carrying out Realtime Recording.
During rehearsals, the drum sounds are only played, and are
not recorded to the pattern even if you press the track
buttons.

Q (Quantize) =

1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the


indicator is flashing.
fig.03-411d

Q (Quantize) =

fig.03-405a

Ex.)

CLOSED HH
SNARE
KICK

2. Press [EDIT].
fig.03-407d

Q (Quantize) =

When using high-resolution Quantize settings, you may


be unable to view the entire pattern, from start to finish,
in the display at one time.
In such instances, a
symbol appears, indicating
that there is material not currently displayed.
fig.03-405b

3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to REAL, and


press [ENTER].
REAL appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen.
The Recording Standby screen appears.
fig.03-408d

You can press [REC MODE] during Realtime


Recording to switch to Step Recording.
Using this option allows you to switch to Step
Recording temporarily when you want to change the
set velocity or input drum sounds input with the
wrong timing in Realtime Recording (instructions for
this procedure: p. 132), or to delete unneeded drum
sounds (instructions: p. 132), and then switch back to
Realtime Recording and continue recording the
pattern.

8. Set the tempo and Quantize values as needed.


9. When you have finished inputting sounds, move the
cursor to STOP and press [ENTER].
* You can also stop recording by pressing [STOP].

128

4. Press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to move the cursor to


RHR, and press [ENTER].
The BR-900CD is put into Rehearsal mode.
fig.03-409d

Creating Original Patterns

5. Rehearse the performance by pressing the REC TRACK


[1][6].
You can switch the UPPER and LOWER drum sounds by
pressing [RHYTHM PAD].

Changing the metronome volume


1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-411d

* At this point, adjust Fader 1 to confirm the velocity status.


6. When you have finished rehearsing, move the cursor to
STOP and press [ENTER].
* You can also quit the rehearsal by pressing [STOP].

Deleting unneeded drum sounds

2. Press [EDIT].
fig.03-412d

You can delete any drum sounds you do not need during
Realtime Recording by holding down [DELETE/MUTE] and
pressing the track buttons.

The corresponding drum sounds are deleted for as long


as the buttons are pressed.
fig.03-410

3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to REAL, and


press [ENTER].
REAL appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen.
The Recording Standby screen appears.
fig.03-413d

4. Press CURSOR [
Click.

] repeatedly to move the cursor to

fig.03-414d

5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust the metronome


volume.
Valid Settings: 03

129

Section 4

1. When you hold down [DELETE/MUTE] and press one


or more REC TRACK buttons for the tones you want to
delete.

Creating Original Patterns

Creating Patterns in Step


Recording

Time Signature

1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the


indicator is flashing.

Valid Settings: 1/18/1, 1/28/2, 1/48/4, 1/88/8

fig.03-415d

This sets the time signature (i.e., the beat) for the pattern
to be recorded.

Quantize
This sets the resolution for the steps being input.
Quarter note (96)

Sixteenth-note triplet (16)

Quarter-note triplet (64)

Thirty-second note (12)

Eighth note (48)

Thirty-second-note triplet (8)

Eighth-note triplet (32) HI

(1)

Sixteenth note (24)

2. Press [EDIT].

Numerals in parentheses indicate the clock. The lower


the value set, the finer the resolution each beat becomes.

fig.03-416d

(Ex.)  : Here you can input sounds in eighth-note lengths.


fig.03-418d

3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to STEP, and


press [ENTER].
STEP appears in REC MODE at the left of the screen.
The recording standby screen appears in the display.
fig.03-417d

Measure

Time Signature

Tempo

Quantize

4. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the


measure, beat, and quantize from which to start
recording of the pattern.

Measure
This sets the number of measures in the pattern to be
recorded.
Valid Settings: 1999

Tempo
When recording, this sets the tempo for confirming the
pattern.
Valid Settings: 25.0250.0
* The tempo setting here is exclusively for confirmation of the
pattern recording. This tempo is not stored in the pattern (you
cannot make any individual tempo settings for the patterns
themselves).

130

(Ex.)  : Here you can input sounds in sixteenth-note lengths.


fig.03-419d

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to REC,

Step Recording starts.


* You can also start recording by pressing [REC].
6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to the
measure, beat, and clock, then turn the TIME/VALUE
dial to specify the time at which the drum sound is to
be input.
fig.03-420d

Measure Beat Clock

Creating Original Patterns

7. Set the velocity (how hard the note is played) for the
sounds to be input from the current point by adjusting
Fader 1.

fig.03-421d

fig.03-423d

Indicated in the matrix


You can confirm the timing with which each rhythm
instrument sounds in the matrix display.

Velocity

The mark in the lower part of the matrix indicates beat


timing.

8. Input the drum sounds.


There are two ways to input drum sounds.

(Method 1) Inputting with the REC TRACK buttons


Use REC TRACK [1][6] to input the drum sounds.

* When a coarse Quantize setting is used, the mark may


indicate half-note or quarter-note timing.
fig.03-422

Ex.)

You can switch the UPPER and LOWER drum


sounds by pressing [RHYTHM PAD].

CLOSED HH
SNARE

Enables input of the UPPER drum sounds.


REC TRACK [1]

KICK

REC TRACK [2]

SNARE

REC TRACK [3]

CLOSED HIHAT

REC TRACK [4]

OPEN HIHAT

REC TRACK [5]

CRASH CYMBAL

REC TRACK [6]

RIDE CYMBAL

Section 4

KICK

[RHYTHM PAD] Lit

Q (Quantize) =

Q (Quantize) =

fig.03-422a

[RHYTHM PAD] Flashing

Ex.)

Enables input of the LOWER drum sounds.


REC TRACK [1]

CROSS STICK

REC TRACK [2]

COWBELL

REC TRACK [3]

TOM1

REC TRACK [4]

TOM2

REC TRACK [5]

TOM3

REC TRACK [6]

TOM4

(Method 2) Inputting with the [ENTER]


Press CURSOR [
matrix display.

] to move the cursor to the

Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to the


intersection of the drum sound you want to input
and the time at which you want it to sound, then
press [ENTER].
The drum sound is alternately input or deleted each
time you press [ENTER].
flashes rapidly when you move the cursor to a
point where a sound has already been input. When a
drum sound is input, the display changes to .

CLOSED HH
SNARE
KICK

Q (Quantize) =

When using high-resolution Quantize settings, you may


be unable to view the entire pattern, from start to finish,
in the display at one time.
In such instances, a
symbol appears, indicating
that there is material not currently displayed.
fig.03-405b

* In this case, you can press [REW]/[FF] to move the location


(cursor) in large steps.

Pressing CURSOR [
] in the top row of the
matrix display returns the cursor to its original
position.

131

Creating Original Patterns

Naming Patterns
You can use up to eight characters in naming patterns.
You can press [REC MODE] during Step Recording to
switch to Realtime Recording.

* You can not change the Preset Pattern name.


1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.

9. Set the tempo and Quantize values as needed.

2. Press [EDIT].

10. Repeat Steps 69 as needed.

3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to NAME, and


press [ENTER].

* Press [PLAY] to listen to the recording pattern.


11. When you have finished inputting sounds, move the
cursor to STOP and press [ENTER].

The Change Pattern Name screen appears.


fig.03-427d

* You can also stop recording by pressing [STOP].

Changing the velocity


During Step Recording, when you move the cursor to a point
in the matrix display where a drum sound has been input,
the velocity value appears in the position where the time
signature is normally indicated. At this point, you can
change the velocity by adjusting Fader 1.
fig.03-424d

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] and turn the TIME/VALUE


dial to change the characters.
* Press [ENTER] to switch between uppercase and lowercase.
5. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.

Deleting unneeded drum sounds


You can use either of the two following methods to delete
unneeded drums sounds in Step Recording.

(Method 1)
1. Move the [CURSOR] to the point in the matrix display
where a drum sound you want to delete has been input,
then press [ENTER].

(Method 2)
1. When you hold down [DELETE/MUTE] and press one
or more track buttons for the tones you want to delete.
You can delete the unneeded drum sound at the current
measure, beat, and clock.
fig.03-410

132

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

Creating Original Patterns

Copying Patterns

Erasing Patterns

1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the


indicator is flashing.

1. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the


indicator is flashing.

2. Press [EDIT].

2. Press [EDIT].

3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to COPY, and


press [ENTER].

3. Press CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to move the cursor to


ERASE, and press [ENTER].

The Pattern Copy screen appears.

fig.03-432d

fig.03-429d

S001S100: Song Pattern 1100


5. Press [ENTER].
The screen for confirming the copy appears.

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the pattern to be


deleted.
S001S100: Song Pattern 1100
5. If you want to delete the pattern, press [ENTER].
The screen for confirming the deletion appears.
fig.03-433d

fig.03-430d

6. Press [ENTER] (YES) to delete the pattern.


6. Press [ENTER] (YES) to copy.
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO).
7. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO).


7. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

133

Section 4

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the copydestination arrangement.

Using the Drum Kits


A drum kit is a variety of rhythm instrument sounds
collected in a single set; the BR-900CD includes nine internal
preset drum kits.
In addition, you can also put together an additional five
original song drum kits.
Song drum kits are saved to individual songs on memory
cards.

Selecting Drum Kits


1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is lit.
fig.03-502d

The drum kit instrument sounds are used in the performance


of the arrangements and patterns.
fig.03-501

BR-900CD

Memory Card
SONG
SONG
SONG

Preset Drum Kit 9

2. Press [EDIT].
fig.03-503d

Preset Drum Kit 3


Preset Drum Kit 2
Preset Drum Kit 1

Song Drum Kit


Kick
Snare

Kick
Snare
Closed Hi-hat
Open Hi-hat

3. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to KIT, and


press [ENTER].
fig.03-504d

Drum Kit Name

Performing the Drums


1. Make sure performance of the song is stopped, then
press [RHYTHM PAD] repeatedly until the indicator is
lit or flashing.
2. Press REC TRACK [1][6] to input the drum sounds.
Number

[RHYTHM PAD] Lit

P: Preset / S: Song

Enables performance of the UPPER drum sounds.


REC TRACK [1]

KICK

REC TRACK [2]

SNARE

REC TRACK [3]

CLOSED HIHAT

REC TRACK [4]

OPEN HIHAT

(P19)

REC TRACK [5]

CRASH CYMBAL

STD1, 2:

Standard sets

REC TRACK [6]

RIDE CYMBAL

ROOM:

Set with moderate ambience applied

HARD:

Set appropriate for hard rock

JAZZ:

Set appropriate for jazz

HIP-HOP:

Set appropriate for dance

HOUSE:

Set appropriate for dance

REGGAE:

Set appropriate for reggae

808:

Set based on the renowned Roland


TR-808 rhythm machine

[RHYTHM PAD] Flashing


Enables input of the LOWER drum sounds.
REC TRACK [1]

CROSS STICK

REC TRACK [2]

COWBELL

REC TRACK [3]

TOM1

REC TRACK [4]

TOM2

REC TRACK [5]

TOM3

REC TRACK [6]

TOM4

134

4. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select drum kits by switching the preset/song and
number.

(S15)
SongKit15:

Original drum kits assigned to each


song (p. 135).

Using the Drum Kits

5. Press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play screen.


* Drum kits are stored to each individual arrangement
separately.

Loading from the tracks


This loads sounds recorded to the tracks as drum tones.

(Example)
Arrangement

Drum Kit

ROCK 1............... ROOM


ROCK 2............... STD 2
:

Creating Original Drum Kits


(Tone Load)
With the BR-900CD, you can create original drum kits not
only with the internal drum sounds, but by loading drum
sounds from external sources as well.

Loading from the tracks

You can use the scrub function to repeat playback and locate
the point from which loading is to start (the start point) and
press AUTO PUNCH [IN], then after determining the point
at which loading is to finish (the end point), press
[LOCATOR] to register the range to be loaded.
Using this technique of setting the start point with AUTO
PUNCH [IN] and the end point with [LOCATOR] allows you
to set the range to be loaded very rapidly.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
TONE, and press [ENTER].

Section 4

There are four ways to load drum tones.

It can be convenient to use the scrub, punch in, and


locator functions to set the range containing the drum
sounds you want to load ahead of time.

fig.03-505d

Loading from other drum kits


Loading from WAV/AIFF files (p. 171, p. 181)

Loading from WAV/AIFF files on CD-R/RW


(p. 149)

The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used


when tracks are bounced directly to a CD (p. 59).

Wave data in the following formats can be imported.


You cannot import wave data in other formats.

WAV or AIFF format


Mono or Stereo
8-bit or 16-bit
Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz

Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.

Extremely short waveform data (less than


approximately 100 msec) cannot be loaded.

The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be


ignored.

Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and


the extension AIF to imported AIFF files.

You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a


single drum kit.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] to move the cursor to TRACK,


and press [ENTER].
fig.03-506d

4. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track and V-Track to which the drum sounds
are to be loaded, then press [ENTER].
fig.03-507d

(Example)
Kick: 3 seconds, snare: 3 seconds,
crash cymbal: 7 seconds Total 13 seconds

Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as mono


sounds with the left and right sides mixed.

135

Using the Drum Kits

5. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify


the range (start and end points) of drum sounds to be
loaded in terms of measures or time locations.

6. When you have finished setting the start and end


points, move the cursor to LOAD and press [ENTER].
fig.03-510d

* You cannot specify an interval between the start and end


points or a length of time in less than 100 ms or excess of 13
seconds.
* When specifying measures, the result is reflected in the time
display, and vice versa.

Start Point (S)


Specify the measure or location to be used as the start
point for loading the drum sounds.
fig.03-508d

Measure

Beat

7. Specify the load-destination song drum kit with the


TIME/VALUE dial, then press [ENTER].
S15: Song Drum Kit 15
fig.03-511d

Hours
Seconds
Minutes
Frame

End Point (E)


Specify the measure or location to be used as the end
point for loading the drum sounds.
From the screen for setting the start point, press
CURSOR [ ] repeatedly to display the screen for
setting the end point.

Loading is executed.
To cancel, press [EXIT].

fig.03-509d

Measure

Beat

Hours
Seconds
Minutes
Frame

You can press [ENTER] to switch between the start point


and end point settings screens.
You can preview the drum sounds in the specified range
by moving the cursor to PVW and pressing [ENTER].
Determine the sounds to load while setting the start and
end points and the length, and repeating the preview.
You can press [PLAY] to preview the sounds, and press
[STOP] to stop the sounds.

136

8. Specify the load-destination drum sound with the


TIME/VALUE dial, then press [ENTER].

fig.03-512d

Using the Drum Kits

Copying drum sounds from other


drum kits
1. Press [UTILITY].

5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the copydestination drum sound, then press [ENTER].
* Select ALL if you want to copy all of the drum sounds in the
kit.
fig.03-520d

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


TONE, and press [ENTER].
fig.03-505d

6. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the copydestination drum kit, then press [ENTER].
fig.03-521d

fig.03-519d

7. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the copydestination song drum sound, then press [ENTER].
Copying is executed.
To cancel, press [EXIT].
fig.03-522a

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
8. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.
4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the copydestination drum kit, then press [ENTER].
P19:

Preset Drum Kit 19

S15:

Song Drum Kit 15

fig.03-520d

137

Section 4

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


COPY, and press [ENTER].

Using the Drum Kits

Erasing drum sounds


1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
TONE, and press [ENTER].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
ERASE, and press [ENTER].
fig.03-523d

Changing the position (pan) of


the drum sounds
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
TONE, and press [ENTER].
3. Press CURSOR [
press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to PAN, and

fig.03-526d

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the erase drum


kit, then press [ENTER].
S15:

Song Drum Kit 15

fig.03-524d

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the drum kit


whose panning you want to change, then press
[ENTER].
S15:

Song Drum Kit 15

fig.03-527d

5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the erase drum


sound, then press [ENTER].
* Select ALL if you want to erase all of the drum sounds in
the kit.
fig.03-525d

5. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify


the drum sound whose panning is being changed and
the pan setting.
fig.03-528d

Are you sure? appears.


6. Press [ENTER] (YES) to erase the drum sound.
To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO).
7. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.

* When you press [RHYTHM PAD], causing the indicator to


light/flash, you can then set the drum sounds by tapping REC
TRACK [1][6].
* Pressing [ENTER] sets this to C00 (Center).
6. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.

138

Section 5
Using
the CD-R/
RW Drive

139

Creating Audio CD
Precautions

The pre-gap setting screen will appear.


fig.40-03d

In addition to CD-R discs, you can also use CD-RW discs


when making audio CDs. However, it may not be possible
for audio CDs created using CD-RW discs to be played on
standard CD players.
Furthermore, even when CD-R discs are used for this
purpose, playback will not be possible on CD players that do
not support this type of media. You should, therefore, confirm
that the CD player to be used is compatible with CD-R discs.
Note that the BR-900CDs CD-R/RW drive can play commercially
produced audio CDs, CD-R discs, and CD-RW discs.

When you use the CD-R/RW drive, you must use only the
supplied AC adaptor. The CD-R/RW drive cannot be used
while running on battery power.

Setting the Time Between


Songs (Pre-Gap)
Often when you are playing audio CDs on standard CD
players, you will see a countdown in the form of -3, -2, -1
on the players display before songs start. This duration is
referred to as a Pre-Gap, and it can be freely set during the
CD creation process to allow song lengths to be adjusted
without having to record silence at the end of each.

4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify a gap time


between songs in seconds.
5. Press [EXIT].

If silence is included at the end of your finished song, the


pre-gap time will be added to the length of this section, and
as a result, the gap between songs will be longer than
expected when the CD is played back on a CD player. For
details regarding the deletion of silence from the end of
songs, refer to Erasing Data (Track Erase) (p. 73).

Writing Songs to Discs


Have on hand the disc you want to burn as an audio CD.
You can write the data to any of the following discs.
CD-R or CD-RW disc with no data written to it (blank disc)
Discs that have song data that was written to them using
the BR-900CD, but which still have space available for
further recording and have not yet been finalized

1. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

Methods for creating audio CDs


With the BR-900CD, only the currently loaded song is
written to the audio CD. If you want to include other
songs on your CD, they will each have to be loaded and
written in sequence. When you use this method,
individual songs can be added to a disc one at a time
until it is full. This method is called Track At Once.

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


AUDIO, and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio

1. Load the song that you want to write.


2. Insert an unrecorded CD-R or CD-RW disc into the CDR/RW drive.
3. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

140

] to move the cursor to GAP,

Creating Audio CD

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


AUDIO, and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio

11. Press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play screen.


12. Press the CD-R/RW drives EJECT button to eject the
disc.
This completes the writing process.
It may take a period of several seconds before the disc is
actually ejected.

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


WRITE, and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD Write screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdawrite

fig.05-CDdawrite2

If you are using CD-R or CD-RW discs intended for highspeed writing, the frequency of write errors may increase
if the x2 or x4 speed is selected. It is recommended that
you use the x8 speed for high-speed discs.
Note that selecting higher factor write speeds does not
necessarily mean the speed will be that multiple exactly.
This is due to the processing time required for
conversion of the audio data on the audio tracks to CD
format as the data is written to the disc.
Audio CDs can be created with up to a maximum of 99
tracks on the disc.
Audio CD standards require that one song be at least
four seconds long. If a specified track lasts less than four
seconds, the track cannot be written to the audio CD.

7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed.


Alternatively, if you want to use the write speed that is
currently displayed, proceed to Step 9.
8. Press [ENTER].
The message Are you sure? will appear.
9. Press [ENTER] (YES).
The message Now Writing... will appear and writing
to the audio CD will begin.
When writing has been completed, the message
Finalize CD OK? will be displayed.
10. If you intend to write additional songs to the same CDR disc, press [EXIT] (NO).
Alternatively, press [ENTER] (YES) if no more songs
will be added to this disc.
If you press [ENTER] (YES), the message Now
Finalizing... will appear and the finalization process
will begin. When the message Completed! appears, it
indicates that the finalization has been completed.

What is finalization?
In addition to audio data, information such as the
position and time of this data is also written to audio
CDs, and this process is known as Finalizing. If you
intend to play your audio CD on a standard CD player, it
is important that finalization be carried out. Once this
has been done, however, you will not be able to add any
more songs to the CD. For this reason, you should aim to
carry out the finalization of a CD disc only when it is
nearly full of songs.

If you dont finalize:


It will not be possible to play your audio CD on a
standard CD player until it has been finalized; however,
you can keep adding songs to the disc until this process
is carried out. The CD-R disc that is not finalized during
the writing process can be finalized later on. For more
details regarding methods for finalization after the
writing of audio data, refer to Enabling Playback on CD
Players (Finalize) (p. 143).

For more detailed information regarding finalization,


refer to What is finalization?.

141

Section 5

6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to choose the track and VTrack that you want to write, and press [ENTER].
The Write Speed screen will appear.

The range of available write speeds can sometimes be


limited by the type of media being used. In such a case,
the BR-900CD will allow you to select only the
supported speeds.

Creating Audio CD

Viewing the Remaining Time


for Recording on Audio CDs
Use the following procedure to see how much time you have
left for recording on an audio CD.
1. Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc into the CD-R/RW drive.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.

Playing Back Audio CDs


Lets now listen to the audio CD we have just created using
the BR-900CDs CD-R/RW drive. In addition to CD-R discs,
this drive can be used to play back CD-RW discs that cannot
be played on standard CD players. Naturally, you will also
be able to listen to commercially produced audio CDs on this
drive, and it can even play back audio CDs created using the
BR-900CD that have not yet been finalized.

fig.05_CDmenu

If you are working with an audio CD created with the BR900CD, you can play back and check the sounds on the CD
even before finalizing it. Please note, however, that depending
on the type of disc used and the data on it, songs may not play
back properly all the way to the end. If you want to ensure
that songs play back correctly, finalize (p. 143) the disc.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
AUDIO, and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio

Songs recorded on an audio CD are often referred to as


tracks. Be careful to avoid confusing these tracks with the
BR-900CDs audio tracks.
1. Insert the audio CD into the CD-R/RW drive.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


REMAIN, and press [ENTER].
The remaining time for recording on audio CD will
appear.
fig.05_CDremain

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


AUDIO, and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio

With finalized discs, discs that have been used for data
backup, and other discs that cannot be used as audio CDs, a
remaining time of 0 is indicated.

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to PLAY/


IMP, and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD player screen will appear.
fig.05_CDplay

142

Creating Audio CD

5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the song that you


want to listen to.
fig.05-CDplay2

Enabling Playback on CD
Players (Finalize)
If you intend to play a audio CD that was written using the
BR-900CDs CD-R/RW drive on a standard CD player, the
audio CD must be finalized. Audio CD-R/RW discs can be
finalized at any time to enable playback on this type of
player.

6. Press [PLAY].
The message Now Playing... will appear, and playback
of the audio CD will begin.
fig.05-CDplay3

What is finalizing?
In addition to the audio data itself, other information
describing the position and time of this data is also
written to audio CDs. This process is known as
Finalizing.

If you finalize:
The buttons work as shown below.
Stop

[PLAY]

Play

[REW]

Rewind

[FF]

Fast forward

Furthermore, the finalization of audio CDs containing


only one short song is wasteful, since the remaining
empty space on such discs can no longer be used.

7. If you want to finish playback of the audio CD, press


[EXIT] several times to return to the Play screen.

For this reason, you should aim to carry out finalizing of


a CD disc only when it is nearly full of songs.

8. Press the CD-R/RW drives EJECT button to eject the


disc.

If you dont finalize:

It may take a period of several seconds before the disc is


actually ejected.

When an audio disc is inserted into the CD-R/RW drive, the


message Now Checking... may remain on the screen for a
relatively long time. This period of time is required for
reading of the data stored on the audio CD and it is not the
result of a malfunction.

It will not be possible to play your audio CD on a


standard CD player until it has been finalized; however,
you can keep adding songs to the disc until this process
is carried out. Whenever you want to play your audio
CD on a standard CD player, you should perform
finalization.

1. Insert the CD-R/RW disc to be finalized into the BR900CDs CD-R/RW drive.
The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

143

Section 5

[STOP]

When finalization has been carried out, you will be able


to play your audio CD on a standard CD player. Note,
however, that you will no longer be able to add songs to
a finalized CD.

Creating Audio CD

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


AUDIO, and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


FINAL, and press [ENTER].
The message Finalize CD OK? will appear.
fig.05_CDfinalize

5. Press [ENTER] (YES). (If you want to cancel


finalization, press [EXIT] (NO).)
Finalization will begin and the state of progress will be
displayed. When the message Complete appears and
the track buttons begin to flash, the finalization is
complete.
6. Press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play screen.
7. Press the CD-R/RW drives EJECT button to eject the
disc.
This enables the CD-R/RW disc to be played back on
regular consumer CD players.

Once finalization has been started, it will not be possible


to cancel this process.
In certain cases, a period of several seconds will pass
before the disc is actually ejected.

144

Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data


The BR-900CDs built-in CD-R/RW drive can be used to
exchange data in the following ways:

Storing of songs and other data on the memory card to


CD-R/RW discs (Backup)

Reading songs and other backup data back into the


memory card (Recover)

Exchanging of waveform data with a PC

When you use the CD-R/RW drive, you must use only the
supplied AC adaptor. The CD-R/RW drive cannot be used
while running on battery power.

Backing up a song to a CD-R/RW


disc one at a time (Song Backup)
1. Insert an empty CD-R/RW disc into the BR-900CDs
CD-R/RW drive.
The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

Saving Recorded Songs to


CD-R/RW Discs (Backup)
Although the songs youve recorded and created are stored
on the memory card, all of this data would be lost in the
unlikely event that the memory card was damaged. For this
reason, we recommend that you also save your songs on CDR/RW discs (Backup).

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


DATA, and press [ENTER].
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata

Section 5

Once songs have been backed up in this way, it will also be


possible to read them from the CD-R/RW discs into another
BR-900CD.

Precautions for backup


If a CD-R disc selected for backup already contains data,
the message Not Blank Disc! will appear and backup
will not be possible. Always use an empty disc for this
operation. If, on the other hand, you are using a CD-RW
disc that already contains data, the message Erase
Disc? will be displayed. If you then press [ENTER]
(YES), the BR-900CD will begin erasing data from this
disc.
If the total size of the songs and other data you intend to
back up exceeds the capacity of a single CD-R/RW disc,
you will be able to perform a backup using as many
discs as necessary. In this case, you will need to have a
number of blank CD-R/RW discs on hand, and during
the backup process, you should insert and remove them
as requested on-screen.

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


BACKUP, and press [ENTER].
The Backup menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdataback

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


SONG, and press [ENTER].
The Song backup screen will appear.
fig.05_CDsongbu

To cancel writing to a CD-R/RW disc, press [EXIT]


(NO). When the message Cancel? appears, press
[ENTER] (YES) to confirm cancellation. (A certain
amount of time may pass between pressing of [EXIT]
(NO) and display of the confirmation message.) Please
note, however, that no guarantee can be made regarding
the state of the data written before cancellation.

145

Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data

6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the song you want


to back up, and press [ENTER].
The Write Speed screen will appear.
fig.05-CDdawrite2

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


DATA, and press [ENTER].
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata

7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed, and


press [ENTER].
The message Write sure? will appear.

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


BACKUP, and press [ENTER].
The Backup menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdataback

The range of available write speeds can sometimes be


limited by the type of media being used. In such a case,
the BR-900CD will allow you to select only the
supported speeds.
If you are using CD-R or CD-RW discs intended for highspeed writing, the frequency of write errors may increase
if the x2 or x4 speed is selected. It is recommended that
you use the x8 speed for high-speed discs.
8. Press [ENTER] (YES).

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to ALL,


and press [ENTER].
The Write Speed screen will appear.
fig.05-CDdawrite2

Writing to the CD-R/RW disc will begin.


When the message Completed! appears, it indicates
that the backup has been successfully completed.

Saving all of the songs on a


memory card to a CD-R/RW disc
(All Backup)
1. Insert an empty CD-R/RW disc into the BR-900CDs
CD-R/RW drive.
The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed, and


press [ENTER].
The message Are you sure? will appear.

The range of available write speeds can sometimes be


limited by the type of media being used. In such a case,
the BR-900CD will allow you to select only the
supported speeds.
If you are using CD-R or CD-RW discs intended for highspeed writing, the frequency of write errors may increase
if the x2 or x4 speed is selected. It is recommended that
you use the x8 speed for high-speed discs.
7. Press [ENTER] (YES).
Writing to the CD-R/RW disc will begin.
When the message Completed! appears, it indicates
that the backup has been successfully completed.

146

Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data

Loading Saved Songs to a


Memory Card (Recover)

6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the song you want


to recover, and press [ENTER].
The message Are you sure? will appear.

Loading saved songs to a memory


card one at a time (Song Recover)

7. Press [ENTER] (YES).

1. Insert a CD-R/RW disc containing backup songs into


the BR-900CDs CD-R/RW drive.
The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.

The recovered song will begin.


When the message Completed! appears, it indicates
that the recovered song has been successfully completed.

The recovered songs will be saved in sequence on the


memory card using the available song numbers.

2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

Card Full! may appear in the display when you use Song
Recover in an attempt to load a song that was in the process of
being recorded when the memory card became full (Card Full!
was displayed). If this occurs, use All Recover to load the song.

Loading all saved songs to a


memory card (All Recover)
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
DATA, and press [ENTER].
fig.05_CDdata

1. Insert a CD-R/RW disc containing backup songs into


the BR-900CDs CD-R/RW drive.
The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
RECOVER, and press [ENTER].
The Recover menu screen will appear.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


DATA, and press [ENTER].
The Data CD menu screen will appear.

fig.05_CDdataback

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


RECOVER, and press [ENTER].
The Recover menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdataback

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


SONG, and press [ENTER].
The Song recover screen will appear.
fig.05_CDrecover

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to ALL,


and press [ENTER].
The message Are you sure? will appear.
6. Press [ENTER] (YES).
The recovered songs will begin.
When the message Completed! appears, it indicates
that the recovered songs has been successfully completed.

147

Section 5

The Data CD menu screen will appear.

Note that executing All Recover deletes all of the data


existing on the memory card. Be sure to back up any
required data before executing All Recover.

Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data

Copying and Writing


Waveform Data

3. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

This procedure requires a computer equipped with a drive


capable of writing to CD-R/RW discs.

If you have a computer equipped with a CD-R/RW drive,


you can use CD-R/RW discs to transfer waveform data
between multiple BR-900CDs.
You can, for example, use these discs to copy waveform data
created with the audio software on your computer and then
paste the data to audio tracks. You can also take audio track
data recorded with the BR-900CD and copy it to your
computer for editing.

Copying waveform data from a


computer to the audio tracks
(WAV/AIFF Import)

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


DATA, and press [ENTER].
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to WAV,

The WAV/AIFF menu screen will appear.


fig.05_CDwav

To be eligible for import, waveform data must meet the


following criteria. In most cases, you will not be able to
import other kinds of data.

Use ISO 9660 Level 2, Mode 1 to write the data to the


CD-R/RW disc.

WAV or AIFF format


Mono or Stereo
8-bit or 16-bit
Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz

Audio data must be at least one second in length.

Name waveform data using less than eight letters


followed by a three-character extension.

The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be


ignored.

6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


IMPORT, and press [ENTER].
A list of the audio data files contained on the current
CD-R/RW disc will appear.
If the WAV files are collected in a folder, then the folder
name is displayed. To show the WAV files within the
folder, press [ENTER].
fig.05-CDwavimp

1. Using a PC, burn and finalize a CD-R/RW disc


containing the waveform data that you want to import.
For instructions on how to write waveform data to CDR/RW discs, refer to your computer and CD-R/RW
drive owners manuals.
2. Place the CD-R/RW disc in the BR-900CDs CD-R/RW
drive.
The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.

148

You can preview the sounds by moving the cursor to


PVW and pressing [ENTER]. You can stop the sound
by moving the cursor to PVW and pressing [ENTER]
once more.
You can press [PLAY] to preview the sounds, and press
[STOP] to stop the sounds.

Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data

7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the waveform data


files you want to import, and press [ENTER].
The screen for specifying the import destination appears.
fig.05-CDwavimp2

1. Using a PC, burn and finalize a CD-R/RW disc


containing the waveform data that you want to import.
For instructions on how to write waveform data to CDR/RW discs, refer to your computer and CD-R/RW
drive owners manuals.
2. Place the CD-R/RW disc in the BR-900CDs CD-R/RW
drive.
The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.

8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the importdestination track, and press [ENTER].
Copying of the waveform data begins.

3. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

When Completed! appears, the import is finished.


The waveform data is imported at the beginning of the
tracks. If you want to change the location at which this
data is written, use Track Edit (p. 70) to move the data
after it has been imported.

Copying WAV/AIFF files as drum


sounds (Tone Load)

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


DATA, and press [ENTER].
The Data CD menu screen will appear.

The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used


when tracks are bounced directly to a CD (p. 59).

Wave data in the following formats can be imported.


You cannot import wave data in other formats.

Use ISO 9660 Level 2, Mode 1 to write the data to the


CD-R/RW disc.

WAV or AIFF format


Mono or Stereo
8-bit or 16-bit
Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz

Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.

Extremely short waveform data (less than


approximately 100 msec) cannot be loaded.

The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be


ignored.

Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and


the extension AIF to imported AIFF files.

You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a


single drum kit.
(Example)
Kick: 3 seconds, snare: 3 seconds,
crash cymbal: 7 seconds Total 13 seconds

Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as mono


sounds with the left and right sides mixed.

Section 5

fig.05_CDdata

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


TONE, and press [ENTER].
A list of the waveform data files contained on the current
CD-R/RW disc will appear.
If the WAV files are collected in a folder, then the folder
name is displayed. To show the WAV files within the
folder, press [ENTER].
fig.05-CDtone

You can preview the sounds by moving the cursor to


PVW and pressing [ENTER]. You can stop the sound
by moving the cursor to PVW and pressing [ENTER]
once more.
You can press [PLAY] to preview the sounds, and press
[STOP] to stop the sounds.

149

Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data

6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the data files you


want to import, and press [ENTER].
The Drum kit select screen appears.
fig.05-CDton2

7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the dum kit, and


press [ENTER].
The Drum sound select screen appears.
fig.05-CDton3

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


DATA, and press [ENTER].
The Data CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDdata

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to WAV,

The WAV/AIFF screen will appear.


fig.05-CDwav

8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the dum sound,


and press [ENTER].
Copying of the waveform data begins.
When Completed! appears, the import is finished.

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


EXPORT, and press [ENTER].
fig.06-110d

Copying audio track waveform data


to computers (WAV/AIFF Export)
You can write data for specified tracks to a CD-R/RW disc as
waveform data, then import the waveform data to the
computer, using your computer to read the CD-R/RW disc.

6. Press CURSOR [
press [ENTER].

][

] to select the file format, then

The Waveform Data Export screen appears.


You will be unable to use CD-RW discs if your computer is
only equipped with a CD-ROM or CD-R drive. In this case,
used CD-R discs.

fig.05-CDwavex

1. Place a writable CD-R/RW disc (a blank disc) in the


BR-900CDs CD-R/RW drive.
The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

150

7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the tracks you


want to export.
The Write Speed screen will appear.
fig.05-CDdawrite2

Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data

8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed, and


press [ENTER].
The message Are you sure? appears.

The range of available write speeds can sometimes be limited


by the type of media being used. In such a case, the BR900CD will allow you to select only the supported speeds.
9. Press [ENTER] (YES) again.
Writing to the CD-R/RW disc begins.
When Completed! appears, the writing is finished.
The following files will have been written to the CD-R/
RW disc in ISO9660 Level 2, Mode 1 format.

To quit writing to the disc while writing is still in


progress, press [EXIT] (NO). When the message
Cancel? appears, press [ENTER] (YES); writing is
cancelled (it may take some time after you press [EXIT]
(NO) for the message to appear). However, no guarantee
can be made for the utility of the content up to the time
writing is cancelled.
It will not be possible to reuse a CD-R disc for which
writing was canceled before completion.

Using SMF
Playing SMFs using external MIDI
instruments (SMF Player)

Track 1, V-Track 1

T01___01.WAV or T01___01.AIF

Track 1, V-Track 2

T01___02.WAV or T01___02.AIF

Track 1, V-Track 3

T01___03.WAV or T01___03.AIF

Track 2, V-Track 7

T02__07.WAV or T02__07.AIF

Track 2, V-Track 8

T02__08.WAV or T02__08.AIF

Track 3/4, V-Track 1

T0304_01.WAV or T0304_01.AIF

Format:

0 or 1

Track 3/4, V-Track 2

T0304_02.WAV or T0304_02.AIF

File size:

240 KB maximum (Note that this will


vary slightly based on the SMF content.)

Track 7/8, V-Track 7

T0708_07.WAV or T0708_07.AIF

Track 7/8, V-Track 8

T0708_08.WAV or T0708_08.AIF

11. Press the CD-R/RW drives EJECT button to eject the disc.

Any SMFs that satisfy the following conditions can be played


in this way.

System Exclusive: Packet sizes of 512 bytes or less


1. Connect a MIDI cable between the MIDI OUT port on
the BR-900CD and the MIDI IN port on your external
MIDI sound module.
fig.05-SMF

12. Use the application on your computer to copy the data


from the CD-R/RW disc.

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

If a CD-R disc that already has data written to it is


loaded, the message Not Blank Disc appears, and you
cannot proceed with the export. Be sure to use only
blank discs.
If a CD-RW disc that already has data written to it is
loaded, the message Erase Disc? appears. Pressing
[ENTER] (YES) here begins erasure of the disc. After the
disc has been erased, the export process will continue.

2. Insert a CD-R/RW disc containing SMFs into the CD-R/


RW drive.

When a mono track is specified as the source for


exporting, the data is written as a mono waveform file.
When a stereo track is specified, the data is written as a
stereo waveform file.

3. Press [CD-R/RW].

The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until


this indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.

The CD menu screen will appear.


fig.05_CDmenu

Tracks 7/8 are fixed as a permanent stereo pair, and so


cannot be specified as mono tracks.

151

Section 5

10. Press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play screen.

You can use the BR-900CD to read SMFs from CD-R/RW


discs and play these files using MIDI instruments connected
to the MIDI OUT port.

Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data

Loading drum patterns from the


CD-R/RW drive (SMF Import)

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


DATA, and press [ENTER].
The Data CD menu screen will appear.

You can import SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) stored on PC as


song patterns. You can easily increase your collection of song
patterns by creating SMFs on your computer or other device
and copying them to memory cards.

fig.05_CDdata

Any SMFs that satisfy the following conditions can be played


in this way.
5. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SMF,

Format:

0 or 1

File size:

240 KB maximum (Note that this will


vary slightly based on the SMF content.)

The SMF menu screen will appear.


fig.05-CDsmf

When importing GM/GS/XG-compatible SMFs, MIDI


Channel 10 is generally assigned as the channel used for
rhythm performances. Thus, only the data on MIDI Channel
10 in the SMF is isolated and imported by the BR-900CD.
Note that the data on other channels is disregarded.
1. Using a PC, burn a CD-R/RW disc containing the SMFs
you want to import.

6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


PLAY, and press [ENTER].

2. Insert this CD-R/RW disc into the BR-900CDs CD-R/


RW drive.

The SMF play screen appears.


fig.05-CDsmfplay

The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until


this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
3. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the SMF to be


played.
If the SMFs are collected in a folder, then the folder name
is displayed. To show the SMFs within the folder, press
[ENTER].
8. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to [

]
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
DATA, and press [ENTER].

The BR-900CD will start playback.

The Data CD menu screen will appear.


9. To stop playback, press CURSOR [
the cursor to [

][

] to move

] and press [ENTER].

You can use [START] and [STOP] to start and stop SMF
playback.

In cases where the SMF contains a large amount of MIDI


data, playback of the file may be sluggish.

152

fig.05_CDdata

Using the CD-R/RW Drive to Exchange Data

5. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SMF,

Erasing Data from a CD-RW


Disc (CD-RW Erase)

The SMF menu screen will appear.


fig.05-CDsmf

If you are using CD-RW discs, you will be able to erase


unneeded data from the discs and reuse them for data storage.

This process results in all data being erased from a disc.


Data erasure is possible only with CD-RW discs. Data
cannot be erased from CD-R discs.
6. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
IMPORT, and press [ENTER].
The SMF import screen appears.
fig.05-CDsmfplay

1. Insert the CD-RW disc to be erased into the BR900CDs CD-R/RW drive.
The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until this
indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the SMFs you want


to import, and press [ENTER].
The screen for specifying the import destination pattern
number appears.

Section 5

If the SMFs are collected in a folder, then the folder name


is displayed. To show the SMFs within the folder, press
[ENTER].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
ERASE, and press [ENTER].
The message Are you sure? will appear.
fig.05-CDerase

8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the importdestination pattern number and press [ENTER].
Copying of the SMF begins.
When Completed! appears, the import is finished.

4. Press [ENTER] (YES).


Press [EXIT] (NO) to cancel deletion.
The data erasure will begin and the state of progress will
be displayed. When the message Completed! appears,
it indicates that erasing has been completed.
5. Press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play screen.
6. Press the CD-R/RW drives EJECT button to eject the disc.

Once erasing has been started, it will not be possible to


cancel this process.
The amount of time required for erasing data will
depend on the type of CD-RW disc used and the volume
of data that it contains.
In certain cases, a period of several seconds will pass
before the disc is actually ejected.

153

Importing Songs from CDs to Audio Tracks


The BR-900CD allows you to import selected songs from a
audio CD to audio tracks. (CD-R/RW Write)

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to PLAY/


IMP, and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD player screen will appear.
fig.05_CDplay

Important Notice
The BR-900CD and its CD-R/RW drive are designed
to allow you to reproduce material for which you
own the copyright, or material for which you have
been granted permission to copy by the copyright
owner. Accordingly, the reproduction of audio CDs
or other copyrighted material without the
permission of the copyright owner and the
circumvention of technologies such as SCMS, which
prohibit second-generation and later copies,
constitutes copyright infringement and may incur
penalties, even in cases where such reproduction is
for your own personal use and enjoyment (private
use). Consult a copyright specialist or special
publications for more information regarding the
acquisition of copyright permission from copyright
holders.
The BR-900CD does not allow you to import all
songs from a audio CD at once. Songs must be
imported one at a time.

5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of the


song to be imported.
fig.05-CDimp

6. Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to [IMP], and


press [ENTER].
The screen for specifying the import destination appears.
fig.05-CDiwavimp2

1. Insert a audio CD into the BR-900CDs CD-R/RW drive.


The drives access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2. Press [CD-R/RW].
The CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDmenu

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


AUDIO, and press [ENTER].
The Audio CD menu screen will appear.
fig.05_CDaudio

154

7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the destination


track for import, and press [ENTER].
The message Now Importing... will appear and import
to the audio track will begin. When the message
Completed! appears, it indicates that the import
procedure has been successfully completed.

When an audio disc is inserted into the CD-R/RW drive, the


message Now Checking... may remain on the screen for a
relatively long time. This period of time is required for
reading of the data stored on the audio CD and it is not the
result of a malfunction.

Section 6
Using MIDI

155

MIDI Fundamentals
By using MIDI to connect the BR-900CD to other MIDIcapable devices, you can perform the following:

MIDI Channels

Play rhythm performances on external MIDI sound


module

Synchronize with external MIDI sequencers and rhythm


machines

The MIDI standard allows data to be exchanged among


multiple MIDI-compatible devices using a single MIDI cable,
and this is made possible by what are known as MIDI
channels.

Control MMC-compatible devices from the BR-900CD

This section provides a basic description of MIDI and


explains the various ways it can be used.

What is MIDI?
MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface.
MIDI is a global standard devised so that performance data,
program change data, and other similar information could be
exchanged among electronic musical instruments and
computers. If a device is MIDI compatible, it will be able to
exchange performance data with other MIDI compatible
devices, even if they are of a different type or brand.

MIDI Connectors
MIDI messages (i.e., the data handled by MIDI) are
exchanged using the following three types of MIDI port.

MIDI IN:
This connector accepts the MIDI messages arriving from
other MIDI devices.

MIDI OUT:
All the MIDI messages from the BR-900CD are sent out from
this connector.

MIDI THRU:
This connector re-transmits all the MIDI messages that arrive
at the MIDI IN connector.

The BR-900CD is equipped with a MIDI OUT port, but


not with MIDI IN and MIDI THRU ports.

156

In simple terms, a MIDI channel is quite similar to a TV


channel. For example, you can change TV channels to watch
programs from a variety of broadcasters. In this type of
situation, information is communicated only when the
channel on the transmitting end matches the channel on the
receiving end.
Likewise, with MIDI as well, if the transmitting device is (for
example) set to MIDI channel 1, MIDI messages will be
received only if the MIDI channel on the receiving end is also
set to 1.

MIDI Implementation Charts


MIDI makes it possible for a vast range of electronic musical
devices to communicate with each other. However, this does
not mean that every MIDI device can handle every single
type of MIDI message. In reality, two MIDI-compatible
devices can only exchange the MIDI messages that are
supported by both.
The users manual for any MIDI-compatible device will
contain a MIDI Implementation Chart, and this chart allows
you to quickly find out which MIDI messages the device in
question can transmit and receive.
When two MIDI devices are to be used together, you should
compare their MIDI implementation charts to make sure that
exchange of the required MIDI messages will be possible.
For more detailed information regarding the BR-900CDs
MIDI characteristics, refer to MIDI Implementation (p. 216).

Synchronizing with MIDI Devices


Using the Rhythm to Play an
External MIDI Sound Module

4. Press CURSOR [

][

] to select RhyMIDI ch.

fig.05-403d

Perform the procedure given below to use a MIDI sound


module and choose the sounds you desire for the Rhythm.
1. Use a MIDI cable to connect the BR-900CD and your
MIDI sound module as shown in the diagram.
fig.05-401

5. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set the MIDI channel


(116).
MIDI Sound Module

MIDI IN
MIDI OUT

If you select OFF, note messages of the Rhythm will


not be transmitted.
6. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

The sounds produced by the Rhythm and their


corresponding note numbers are given below.
2. Press [UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
SYNC, and press [ENTER].
fig.05-402d

Note Number

Closs Stick

G1

(31)

Metronome (click)

A1

(33)

Metronome (bell)

A#1

(34)

Kick

C2

(36)

Snare

D2

(38)

Tom 4

F2

(41)

Closed Hi-hat

F#2

(42)

Tom 3

A2

(45)

Open Hi-hat

A#2

(46)

Tom 2

C3

(48)

Clash Cymbal

C#3

(49)

Tom 1

D3

(50)

Ride Cymbal

D#3

(51)

Cowbell

G#3

(56)

Section 6

Rhythm Sound

Tone arrangement is based on GS/GM. In case your external


MIDI sound module is not based on GS or GM, you will need
to make settings on your external MIDI sound module to
change the sounds that correspond to each note number. For
details on making these settings, refer to the manual of your
MIDI sound module.
* If you are using an external MIDI sound module to play the
Rhythm, use the controls of the external MIDI sound module
to adjust the volume level.

157

Synchronizing with MIDI Devices

Synchronizing Playback with


a MIDI Sequencer

fig.05-405d

The BR-900CD can operate in synchronization with a MIDI


sequencer.

When synchronizing with a MIDI sequencer, it is possible to


synchronize the MIDI sequencer using the BR-900CD (i.e.,
with the BR-900CD as the master), but it is not possible to
synchronize the BR-900CD with the MIDI sequencer (i.e.,
with the BR-900CD as the slave).
* For details on operation of your MIDI sequencer, refer to the
operating manual for your device. For information regarding
MMC, see p. 160.

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select Sync Gen, and


turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set the sync generator.
fig.05-406d

Synchronized playback with the


BR-900CD as the master
Follow the procedure given below to synchronize the MIDI
sequencer using the BR-900CD.
1. Use a MIDI cable to connect the BR-900CD and your
MIDI sequencer as shown in the diagram.
fig.05-404

OFF:

Synchronization signals will not be output.

MTC:

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

MCK:

Sends the MIDI clock based on the tempo set


with the Rhythm (p. 120).

* If OFF or MCK is selected, proceed to step 6.


5. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select MTC Type, and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set the MTC type.
MIDI
Sequencer

MIDI IN

fig.05-407d

MIDI OUT

Verify the specifications of your MIDI sequencer and set


the MTC type on the BR-900CD.
30:

30 frames per second non-drop format. This is


used by audio devices such as analog tape
recorders, and for NTSC format black and
white video (used in Japan and the U.S.).

29N:

29.97 frames per second non-drop format. This


is used for NTSC format color video (used in
Japan and the U.S.).

29D:

29.97 frames per second drop format. This is


used for NTSC format broadcast color video
(used in Japan and the U.S.).

2. Press [UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
SYNC, and press [ENTER].

158

Synchronizing with MIDI Devices

25:

24:

25 frame per second frame rate. This is used


for SECAM or PAL format video, audio
equipment, and film (used in Europe and
elsewhere).
24 frame per second frame rate. This is used
for video, audio devices, and film in the US.

6. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return


to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

Setting the MTC offset


The offset sets the time required to align the song playback
and MTC timing when synchronizing an external device
using MTC from the BR-900CD.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
SYNC, and press [ENTER].
fig.05-408ad

7. Just as when you synchronize a MIDI sequencer using


external MTC, when you use the MCK, you can
synchronize the MIDI sequencer using the external
MIDI clock.
8. Get the MIDI song data ready for playback.
When the BR-900CD begins playing, the MIDI sequencer
will also begin playing in sync with it.

What are drop and non-drop formats?


There are two types of format used by NTSC video
cassette recorders, non-drop and drop. With the nondrop format, the frames are continuous. On the other
hand, in order to support NTSC color video, the drop
format drops the first two frames of every minute
excluding minutes 10, 20, 30, 40, and 50.

fig.05-408d

The offset is set as the difference between the time to


which to align the MTC timing and the time to which
to align the song timing. For example, you want to have
the external device play back with the MTC timing
shown below when the song timing reaches
01h00m00s00, then set the offset as follows.
Song Timing

MTC for
External Device

Offset Setting

01h00m00s00

01h30m00s00

00h30m00s00

01h00m00s00

00h30m00s00

23h30m00s00

4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return


to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

159

Section 6

In most video and audio production, since formats with


continuous frames are easier to deal with, non-drop is
generally used. In contrast, in situations such as in
broadcast, where the time code must match actual clock
time, drop is used.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select Offset, and turn


the TIME/VALUE dial to set the time offset.

Synchronizing with MIDI Devices

Using MMC

1. Press [UTILITY].

MMC stands for MIDI Machine Control. This is a protocol


that uses MIDI System Exclusive messages to remotely
control multiple recording devices from one device. Your BR900CD supports the MMC protocol.

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


SYNC, and press [ENTER].
fig.05-410d

By using MMC, your BR-900CD can send commands such as


PLAY, STOP, and FF to connected MIDI devices to operate
them.

Some MIDI devices do not support the BR-900CDs MMC


functionality. If so, it will not be possible to operate them
from the BR-900CD using the procedures described here. For
details on the MMC functionality supported by the BR900CD, read MIDI Implementation (p. 216).

Operating MMC-compatible
devices with the BR-900CD
This section explains how to make settings for synchronizing
the playback with a computer-based sequencer program that
supports MMC and MTC. Make connections as shown in the
diagram below.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select MMC Master, and


turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set the MMC mode.
fig.05-411d

fig.05-409

MIDI IN
MIDI OUT

OFF:

MMC will not be transmitted.

ON:

MMC information is sent. The BR-900CD


becomes the master of the external MIDI
instrument.

* For details on the MMC functionality supported by the BR900CD, read MIDI Implementation (p. 216).
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select Sync Gen, and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set MTC.
5. Make settings on your sequencer software.
Make the following settings on your sequencer software.
For details on making these settings, refer to the manual
for your sequencer software.
MTC:

The BR-900CD will be the master for MMC and MTC.


Follow the procedure given below to operate the play, stop,
fast-forward and other functions of a sequencer program
with the BR-900CD.

receive

MTC type: same setting as the MTC Type selected on the


BR-900CD
MMC:

receive

6. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return


to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

160

Section 7
Using USB

161

Before Using USB (Overview)


The BR-900CD is equipped with a USB connector, which
allows you to connect the BR-900CD directly to a computer,
making it easy to back up your important song data and
exchange files between the BR-900CD and the computer.

Composition of Data on
Memory Cards

What is USB?

fig.06-102

USB, short for Universal Serial Bus, is a type of interface


for connecting computers with a variety of peripheral
devices.

The folders and files created are as shown below.


Root Directory
ROLAND Folder
BR0 Folder

Using USB allows you to connect different peripherals using


a single USB cable, and also provides rapid data
transmission.

Disk Information
SONG0000 Folder
Song Information
Effect Parameter
Sequence Data
Sequence Data
Drum Kit Sound Parameter
Song Parameter
Recorded Data
Recorded L Data
Recorded R data
Wave Data

Whats more, you can connect and disconnect peripherals


with the power on, and the computer can automatically
recognize when devices are connected (you may need to
make settings when connecting certain devices).

On the BR-900CD, USB is used for the


following tasks:

Backing up the BR-900CDs data

Saving BR-900CD track data in WAV/AIFF format


(WAV/AIFF Export)

Loading WAV/AIFF files in BR-900CD tracks (WAV/


AIFF Import)

Importing SMFs and creating patterns

Loading drum sounds from WAV/AIFF files

SONG0001 Folder
The folders are created
each song

TONELOAD Folder

WAV/AIFF File
SMF Folder
SMF File

Realtime audio signals and MIDI messages cannot be


handled via the BR-900CDs USB connector.

Compatible OS

USB Folder
WAV/AIFF File

ROLAND Folder
The structure of the files and folders on the BR-900CD is as
follows.

Windows:
Windows Me / 2000 / XP

Macintosh:
Mac OS 9.1.x / 9.2.x

BR0 Folder
Song data (recording data, song arrangements/patterns/
drum kits, effect song patches, and song information) are
saved to each song folder.

Mac OS X

TONELOAD Folder

Driver

WAV and AIFF files loaded for use as drum sounds will be
saved here (p. 171, p. 181).

The BR-900CD uses a standard DRIVER that is found on


OS. The DRIVER will be installed automatically once
connected with Computer via USB.

SMF Folder
SMF files loaded for use in song patterns will be saved here
(p. 169, p. 179).

162

Before Using USB (Overview)

USB Folder

Connecting a Computer

WAV and AIFF files loaded to the BR-900CDs tracks, and


WAV and AIFF files saved on computers (track data
converted to WAV and AIFF format) will be saved here (p.
165, p. 167, p. 176, p. 178).

Use the USB cable to connect the BR-900CD to your


computer.
* Purchase USB cables at computer stores or other retailers.
fig.06-101

Folders and files created on memory cards are


displayed on the computer screen.

To USB connector
of your computer

When you continue with an operation, the BOSS_BR-900


icon is added in the computer screen.
* With certain versions of Windows OS, the Removable disk
(*:) icon may be displayed.
USB cable

fig.06-102a

(Ex.) Windows XP

BOSS_BR-900

BOSS_BR-900

(Ex.) Windows 2000


Removable Disk (*:)

(Ex.) Macintosh

Notes on Using USB


Do not perform the following actions when switching to USB
mode or transmitting data. These operations may result in
your computer not responding to the data.
Data on memory cards may also be corrupted.
Do not:
Disconnect the USB cable
Eject the memory card

BOSS_BR-900

Put the computer in suspended (standby) mode or


hibernation, restart, or quit

When you click the BOSS_BR-900 icon (or the Removable


disk (*:) icon), or double-click the BOSS_BR-900 icon on
the Macintosh, the ROLAND folder is displayed.
Open this folder to show the BR0 folder, the
TONELOAD folder, the SMF folder, and the USB
folder.
fig.06-102b

(Ex.)

When Using Windows XP/2000


If using Windows XP/2000, log on to Windows as one of the
following users:
Administrator or other user with the privileges of the
Administrators group
A user whose account type is Computer Administrator
Note that you will not be able to properly quit the USB
connection if the user name is not one of those described
above.
For more details, consult the system administrator for the
computer you are using.

163

Section 7

Turn off the BR-900CDs power

With Windows
Backing Up the BR-900CDs
Data
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

Reading backup data back into the BR-900CD from


PC (Recover)
When restoring data backed up on a computer to the BR900CD, drag the ROLAND folder to the BOSS_BR900 icon (or the Removable disk (*:) icon) and drop it
there (overwriting it).

] to move the cursor to USB,


6. Quit the connection to the computer.

The USB screen appears.


4. Select BACKUP with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
The Idling screen appears in the display.

With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR-900
icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject the disk.
* If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.

fig.06-103d

1)

Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed
there.

fig.06-105a

Task Bar

2)

Task Tray

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

With Windows 2000/Me


* You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.

1)

In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR900 icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject
the disk.

The BOSS_BR-900 (or Removable disk (*:)) icon is


added to the computer.

2)

Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed
there.

fig.06-104

(Ex.)

fig.06-105a

BOSS_BR-900

Removable Disk (*:)

5. Back up the data.


1)

Click the BOSS_BR-900 (or Removable disk


(*:)) icon.

2)

Drag the ROLAND folder to the computers


folder and drop it in the folder.

fig.06-105d

Task Bar

3)

Task Tray

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

7. Press the BR-900CDs [EXIT].


The USB screen returns to the display.

When you have finished backing up the data, the Idling


screen returns to the display.

164

With Windows

* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the


computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the USB screen to the display.
fig.06-106ad

1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB


cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to USB,

The USB screen appears.

8. When backup of the data is complete, press [EXIT] to


return to the Play screen.

4. Select EXPORT with the TIME/VALUE dial, then


press [ENTER].
fig.06-110d

At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable


from the BR-900CD and the computer.

Saving BR-900CD Track Data


in WAV/AIFF Format (WAV/
AIFF Export)
You can convert the BR-900CDs track data into WAV or
AIFF files and save these on your computer. After converting
your mastered tracks to WAV or AIFF files, you can easily
use your computer to create audio CDs with the data, as well
as load the data into audio applications.

Resolving insufficient memory issues


when exporting WAV/AIFF
When exporting WAV or AIFF files, memory cards must
have enough free space to hold the files. If too little memory
is available and the Card Full! error message appears,
there are two approaches you can take to overcome the
problem.

Deleting unneeded data from the memory card

5. Press CURSOR [
press [ENTER].

][

] to select the file format, then

WAV:

This is an audio format used primarily with


Windows.

AIFF:

This audio format is used primarily with


Macintosh.

6. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track/V-track to be saved.

When saving in mono

Section 7

fig.06-112d

1. Back up the data on the card (see p. 164).


2. Erase unneeded songs (see p. 77).
3. Also erase track data other than that for the tracks you
want to export (see p. 73).
4. Export the data.
5. Restore the backed up data to the BR-900CD (see the
Step 5 HINT on p. 164).

When saving in stereo


* Select the track combination 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.
fig.06-111d

Using a high-capacity memory card


For more on supported memory cards (CompactFlash) for
the BR-900CD, refer to the separate sheet About Memory
Cards.

165

With Windows

7. Press [ENTER].

* If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.

Conversion of the WAV or AIFF file begins.

1)

Files names are converted as shown below.


(Mono)
Track 1, V-Track 1
TR01_ _ _1.WAV or
TR01_ _ _1.AIF

(Stereo)
Track 1/2, V-Track 1
TR0102 _1.WAV or
TR0102 _1.AIF

Track 1, V-Track 2
TR01_ _ _2.WAV or
TR01_ _ _2.AIF
:
Track 6, V-Track 7
TR06_ _ _7.WAV or
TR06_ _ _7.AIF

Track 1/2, V-Track 2


TR0102 _2.WAV or
TR0102 _2.AIF
:
Track 7/8, V-Track 7
TR0708_7.WAV or
TR0708_7.AIF

Track 6, V-Track 8
TR06_ _ _8.WAV or
TR06_ _ _8.AIF

Track 7/8, V-Track 8


TR0708_8.WAV or
TR0708_8.AIF

* Converting songs takes approximately the same amount of


time (twice as long in stereo) to complete as it does to play the
source song data.
When the conversion is complete, the BOSS_BR-900
(or Removable disk (*:)) icon is added to the computer.
fig.06-104

Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed
there.

fig.06-105a

Task Bar

2)

Task Tray

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

With Windows 2000/Me


1)

In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR900 icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject
the disk.

2)

Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed
there.

fig.06-105a

(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900

Removable Disk (*:)

8. Export the WAV or AIFF file to the computer.


1)
2)

Click the BOSS_BR-900 (or Removable disk


(*:)) icon.
Drag the WAV or AIFF file in the USB folder in
the ROLAND folder to the computers folder
and drop it in the folder.

fig.06-114d

Task Bar

3)

Task Tray

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

10. Press the BR-900CDs [EXIT].


The file format selection screen returns to the display.
The contents of the USB folder are automatically
deleted the instant the [EXIT] button is pressed.
* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the file format selection screen to the
display.

When you have finished exporting the data, the Idling


screen returns to the display.

fig.06-106ad

9. Quit the connection to the computer.

With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR-900
icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject the disk.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
11. Repeat Steps 49 as needed.
12. When you have finished exporting the WAV or AIFF
file(s), press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play
screen.

166

With Windows

Loading WAV/AIFF Files in BR900CD Tracks (WAV/AIFF Import)

fig.06-120d

You can take WAV or AIFF files on your computer, such as


files created with audio software applications, and load them
to the BR-900CDs tracks.

Wave data in the following formats can be imported.


You cannot import wave data in other formats.

WAV or AIFF format


Mono or Stereo
8-bit or 16-bit
Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz

Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and


the extension AIF to imported AIFF files.

Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.

Extremely short waveform data (less than


approximately 1 sec) cannot be loaded.

The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be


ignored.

If the unit is in the Arrange mode at the time of the


import, it takes place in accord with the timing of the
Arrange mode. On the other hand, if the unit is in the
Pattern mode at the time of the import, it takes place in
accord with the timing of the Pattern mode.

5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track and V-track to be loaded, then press
[ENTER].

When loading to the tracks in mono


fig.06-122d

When loading to the tracks in stereo


* Select the track combination 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.
fig.06-121d

1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB


cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
] to move the cursor to USB,

The USB screen appears.

6. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify


the measure or position in the track from which
loading is to start, then press [ENTER].
fig.06-123d

4. Select IMPORT with the TIME/VALUE dial, then


press [ENTER].

The BOSS_BR-900 (or Removable disk (*:)) icon is


added to the computer.
fig.06-104

(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900

Removable Disk (*:)

167

Section 7

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

With Windows

7. Copy the WAV or AIFF files you want to import.


1)

Click the BOSS_BR-900 (or Removable disk


(*:)) icon.

2)

Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the USB


folder in the ROLAND folder.

* Only one file can be imported at a time in each import


operation. Do not drag and drop more than one file at a time.

When you have finished Copying the data, the Idling


screen returns to the display.
8. Quit the connection to the computer.

With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR-900
icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject the disk.
* If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.
Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed
there.

fig.06-105a

Task Bar

2)

Task Tray

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

With Windows 2000/Me


1)

In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR900 icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject
the disk.

2)

Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed
there.

fig.06-105a

Task Bar

3)

168

The WAV or AIFF file is imported.


The contents of the USB folder are automatically
deleted at the time the import is finished.
* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] imports the WAV or AIFF file.
fig.06-106ad

fig.06-126d

1)

9. Press the BR-900CDs [EXIT].

Task Tray

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

Once the import is complete, you are returned to the


screen for specifying the import-source track/V-Track.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
10. Repeat Steps 48 as needed.
11. When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF
file(s), press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play
screen.

With Windows

Importing SMFs and Creating


Patterns
You can import SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) stored on
memory cards as song patterns. You can easily increase your
collection of song patterns by creating SMFs on your
computer or other device and copying them to memory cards.

You cannot import SMFs containing more than 999


measures.

Add the extension MID to SMFs you are importing.

Use file names containing eight alphanumeric


characters.

1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB


cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].

5. Import the SMF.


1)

Click the BOSS_BR-900 (or Removable disk


(*:)) icon.

2)

Drag the imported SMF to the SMF folder in the


ROLAND folder.

fig.03-435d

When you have finished importing the SMF, the Idling


screen returns to the display.
6. Quit the connection to the computer.

With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR-900
icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject the disk.
* If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.
1)

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to USB,

The USB screen appears.

Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed
there.

fig.06-105a

4. Select BACKUP with the TIME/VALUE dial, then


press [ENTER].
The Idling screen appears in the display.
Task Bar

fig.03-434d

2)

Task Tray

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

With Windows 2000/Me


In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR900 icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject
the disk.

2)

Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed
there.

fig.06-105a

* You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
The BOSS_BR-900 (or Removable disk (*:)) icon is
added to the computer.

Task Bar

3)

Task Tray

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

fig.06-104

(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900

Removable Disk (*:)

169

Section 7

1)

With Windows

7. Press BR-900CDs [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the


Play screen.
* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] and then [EXIT] returns the Play screen to the
display.

12. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the importdestination song pattern, then press [ENTER].
fig.03-439d

fig.06-106ad

The import is executed.


* With some SMF files, a considerable amount of time may be
required to finish importing the file.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
8. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-436d

9. Press [EDIT].
10. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to SMF, and
press [ENTER].
The names of the SMFs on the memory card are
displayed.
fig.03-438d

11. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the SMF to be


imported, then press [ENTER].

When importing GM/GS/XG-compatible SMFs, MIDI


Channel 10 is generally assigned as the channel used for
rhythm performances. Thus, only the data on MIDI Channel
10 in the SMF is isolated and imported by the BR-900CD.
Note that the data on other channels is disregarded.

170

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

With Windows

Loading Drum Sounds from


WAV/AIFF Files (Tone Load)

fig.03-513d

You can import WAV and AIFF files on your computer and
load these as drum sounds (TONE LOAD).

The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used


when tracks are bounced directly to a CD (p. 59).

Wave data in the following formats can be imported.


You cannot import wave data in other formats.
WAV or AIFF format
Mono or Stereo
8-bit or 16-bit
Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz

Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.

Extremely short waveform data (less than


approximately 100 msec) cannot be loaded.

The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be


ignored.

Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and


the extension AIF to imported AIFF files.

You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a


single drum kit.

* You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
The BOSS_BR-900 (or Removable disk (*:)) icon is
added to the computer.
fig.06-104

(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900
5. Import the WAV or AIFF file.
1)

Click the BOSS_BR-900 (or Removable disk


(*:)) icon.

2)

Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the


TONELOAD folder in the ROLAND folder.

(Example)
Kick: 3 seconds, snare: 3 seconds,
crash cymbal: 7 seconds Total 13 seconds

Removable Disk (*:)

fig.03-514d

Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as mono


sounds with the left and right sides mixed.

2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press


[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to USB,

The USB screen appears.


4. Select BACKUP with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].

When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF


files, the Idling screen returns to the display.
6. Quit the connection to the computer.

With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR-900
icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject the disk.
* If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.
1)

The Idling screen appears in the display.

Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed
there.

fig.06-105a

Task Bar

Task Tray

171

Section 7

1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB


cable.

With Windows

2)

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

With Windows 2000/Me


1)

In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR900 icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject
the disk.

10. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


CARD, and press [ENTER].
The names of the WAV and AIFF files on the memory
card are displayed.
* WAV files are indicated by the symbol .W; .A indicates
AIFF files.
fig.03-516d

2)

Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed
there.

fig.06-105a

Task Bar

3)

Task Tray

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

7. Press BR-900CDs [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the


Play screen.
* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] and then [EXIT] returns the Play screen to the
display.

11. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the WAV or AIFF


file with the drum sound to be loaded.

You can preview the sound of the WAV or AIFF file to be


loaded by moving the cursor to PVW and pressing
[ENTER].
12. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the loaddestination song drum kit.
S15:

Song Drum Kit 15

fig.03-517d

fig.06-106ad

At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable


from the BR-900CD and the computer.
8. Press [UTILITY].

13. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the loaddestination song drum sound, then press [ENTER].
The load is executed.
To cancel, press [EXIT].
fig.03-518d

9. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


TONE, and press [ENTER].
fig.03-515d

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.
* WAV and AIFF files in the TONELOAD folder are retained
without being deleted even after this procedure is completed. If
these files are no longer needed, connect the BR-900CD to
your computer via USB and use the computer to delete the
files. Any files that are retained will use the required amount
of memory on the memory card.

172

With Windows

Using the BR-864 / BR-532s Data


You can use the BR-900CD to play BR-864 (or BR-532) data.

7. Drag the previously backed up BR-864 / BR-532


ROLAND folder to the BOSS_BR-900 (or
Removable disk (*:)) icon and drop it there.
fig.06-110bd

* First be sure to back up the BR-864 / BR-532s ROLAND


folder to the computer.
1. Initializing the memory card on the BR-900CD (p. 196).
2. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
3. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to USB,

When you have finished backing up the data, the Idling


screen returns to the display.
8. Quit the connection to the computer.

With Windows XP

The USB screen appears.


5. Select BACKUP with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
The Idling screen appears in the display.
fig.06-110ad

In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR-900


icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject the disk.
* If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure below.
1)

Click the
icon in the task tray, then click the
Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed
there.

fig.06-105a

Task Bar

2)

Task Tray

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

With Windows 2000/Me


1)

2)
The BOSS_BR-900 (or Removable disk (*:)) icon is
added to the computer.
fig.06-104

In My Computer, right-click on the BOSS_BR900 icon (or Removable disk (*:) icon) to Eject
the disk.
Click the

icon in the task tray, then click the

Stop USB Diskdrive (*:) message displayed


there.
fig.06-105a

(Ex.)
BOSS_BR-900

Removable Disk (*:)

6. Delete the BR-900CD ROLAND folder.


1)

Click the BOSS_BR-900 (or Removable disk


(*:)) icon, and delete the ROLAND folder.

Task Bar

3)

Task Tray

Click [OK] in the Safe To Remove Hardware


dialog box that appears.

173

Section 7

* You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.

With Windows

9. Press the BR-900CDs [EXIT].


The USB screen returns to the display.
* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the USB screen to the display.
fig.06-106ad

10. When backup of the data is complete, press [EXIT] to


return to the Play screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.

174

With Macintosh
Backing Up the BR-900CDs Data
1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to USB,

The USB screen appears.


4. Select BACKUP with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
The Idling screen appears in the display.

Reading backup data back into the BR-900CD from


PC (Recover)
When restoring data backed up on a computer to the BR900CD, drag the ROLAND folder to the BOSS_BR900 icon and drop it there (overwriting it).

6. Quit the connection to the computer.


1)

Drag the BOSS_BR-900 icon into the trash.

7. Press the BR-900CDs [EXIT].


The USB screen returns to the display.

fig.06-106d

* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the


computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the USB screen to the display.
fig.06-106ad

8. When backup of the data is complete, press [EXIT] to


return to the Play screen.
* You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.

At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable


from the BR-900CD and the computer.

The BOSS_BR-900 icon is added to the computer.


fig.06-107

(Ex.)

Section 7

BOSS_BR-900

5. Back up the data.


1)

Double-click the BOSS_BR-900 icon.

2)

Drag the ROLAND folder to the computers


folder and drop it in the folder.

fig.06-109d

When you have finished backing up the data, the Idling


screen returns to the display.

175

With Macintosh

Saving BR-900CD Track Data


in WAV/AIFF Format
(WAV/AIFF Export)

fig.06-115d

You can convert the BR-900CDs track data into WAV or


AIFF files and save these on your computer. After converting
your mastered tracks to WAV or AIFF files, you can easily
use your computer to create audio CDs with the data, as well
as load the data into audio applications.

Resolving insufficient memory issues


When exporting WAV/AIFF
When exporting WAV or AIFF files, memory cards must
have enough free space to hold the files. If too little memory
is available and the Card Full! error message appears,
there are two approaches you can take to overcome the
problem.

Deleting unneeded data from the memory card


1. Back up the data on the card (see p. 175).
2. Erase unneeded songs (see p. 77).
3. Also erase track data other than that for the tracks you
want to export (see p. 73).

5. Press CURSOR [
press [ENTER].

][

] to select the file format, then

WAV:

This is an audio format used primarily with


Windows.

AIFF:

This audio format is used primarily with


Macintosh.

6. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the track/V-Track


to be saved.

When saving in mono


fig.06-117d

4. Export the data.


5. Restore the backed up data to the BR-900CD (see the
Step 5 HINT on p. 175).

Using a high-capacity memory card


For more on supported memory cards (CompactFlash) for
the BR-900CD, refer to the separate sheet About Memory
Cards.

When saving in stereo


* Select the track combination 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.
fig.06-116d

1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB


cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to USB,

The USB screen appears.


4. Select EXPORT with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].

176

With Macintosh

7. Press [ENTER].

10. Press the BR-900CDs [EXIT].

Conversion of the WAV or AIFF file begins.

The file format selection screen returns to the display.

Files names are converted as shown below.

The contents of the USB folder are automatically


deleted the instant the [EXIT] button is pressed.

(Mono)
Track 1, V-Track 1
TR01_ _ _1.WAV or
TR01_ _ _1.AIF

(Stereo)
Track 1/2, V-Track 1
TR0102 _1.WAV or
TR0102 _1.AIF

Track 1, V-Track 2
TR01_ _ _2.WAV or
TR01_ _ _2.AIF
:
Track 6, V-Track 7
TR06_ _ _7.WAV or
TR06_ _ _7.AIF

Track 1/2, V-Track 2


TR0102 _2.WAV or
TR0102 _2.AIF
:
Track 7/8, V-Track 7
TR0708_7.WAV or
TR0708_7.AIF

Track 6, V-Track 8
TR06_ _ _8.WAV or
TR06_ _ _8.AIF

Track 7/8, V-Track 8


TR0708_8.WAV or
TR0708_8.AIF

* Converting songs takes approximately the same amount of


time (twice as long in stereo) to complete as it does to play the
source song data.
When the conversion is complete, the BOSS_BR-900
icon is added to the computer.
fig.06-107

(Ex.)

* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the


computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the file format selection screen to the
display.
fig.06-106ad

At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable


from the BR-900CD and the computer.
11. Repeat Steps 49 as needed.
12. When you have finished exporting the WAV or AIFF
file(s), press [EXIT] several times to return to the Play
screen.

BOSS_BR-900

8. Export the WAV or AIFF file to the computer.


1)

Double-click the BOSS_BR-900 icon.

2)

Drag the WAV or AIFF file in the USB folder in


the ROLAND folder to the computers folder
and drop it in the folder.

fig.06-119d

Section 7

When you have finished exporting the data, the Idling


screen returns to the display.
9. Quit the connection to the computer.
1)

Drag the BOSS_BR-900 icon into the trash.

177

With Macintosh

Loading WAV/AIFF Files in


BR-900CD Tracks
(WAV/AIFF Import)

fig.06-127d

You can take WAV or AIFF files on your computer, such as


files created with audio software applications, and load them
to the BR-900CDs tracks.

Wave data in the following formats can be imported.


You cannot import wave data in other formats.

WAV or AIFF format


Mono or Stereo

5. Use CURSOR [ ] [ ] and the TIME/VALUE dial to


select the track/V-Track to be loaded, then press [ENTER].

8-bit or 16-bit
Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz

Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and


the extension AIF to imported AIFF files.

Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.

Extremely short waveform data (less than


approximately 1 sec) cannot be loaded.

The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be


ignored.

If the unit is in the Arrange mode at the time of the


import, it takes place in accord with the timing of the
Arrange mode. On the other hand, if the unit is in the
Pattern mode at the time of the import, it takes place in
accord with the timing of the Pattern mode.

When loading to the tracks in mono


fig.06-129d

When loading to the tracks in stereo


* Select the track combination 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.
fig.06-128d

1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB


cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to USB,

6. Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify


the measure or position in the track from which
loading is to start, then press [ENTER].
fig.06-130d

The USB screen appears.


4. Select IMPORT with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].

The BOSS_BR-900 icon is added to the computer.


fig.06-107

(Ex.)

BOSS_BR-900

178

With Macintosh

7. Copy the WAV or AIFF files you want to import.


1)

Double-click the BOSS_BR-900 icon.

2)

Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the USB


folder in the ROLAND folder.

* Only one file can be imported at a time in each import


operation. Do not drag and drop more than one file at a time.
fig.06-133d

When you have finished copying the data, the Idling


screen returns to the display.
8. Quit the connection to the computer.
1)

Drag the BOSS_BR-900 icon into the trash.

9. Press the BR-900CDs [EXIT].


The WAV or AIFF file is imported.
The contents of the USB folder are automatically
deleted at the time the import is finished.
* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] imports the WAV or AIFF file.
fig.06-106ad

Importing SMFs and Creating


Patterns
You can import SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) stored on
memory cards as song patterns. You can easily increase your
collection of song patterns by creating SMFs on your
computer or other device and copying them to memory cards.

You cannot import SMFs containing more than 999


measures.

Add the extension MID to SMFs you are importing.

Use file names containing eight alphanumeric characters.

1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB


cable.
2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to USB,

The USB screen appears.


4. Select BACKUP with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].
The Idling screen appears in the display.
fig.03-434d

Section 7

Once the import is complete, you are returned to the


screen for specifying the import-source track/V-Track.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.
10. Repeat Steps 48 as needed.
11. When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF
file(s), press [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the Play
screen.

* You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
The BOSS_BR-900 icon is added to the computer.
fig.06-107

(Ex.)

BOSS_BR-900

179

With Macintosh

5. Import the SMF.


1)

Double-click the BOSS_BR-900 icon.

2)

Drag the imported SMF to the SMF folder in the


ROLAND folder.

10. Press [CURSOR] to move the cursor to SMF, and


press [ENTER].
The names of the SMFs on the memory card are
displayed.
fig.03-438d

fig.03-435d

When you have finished importing the SMF, the Idling


screen returns to the display.
6. Quit the connection to the computer.
1)

Drag the BOSS_BR-900 icon into the trash.

7. Press BR-900CDs [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the


Play screen.
* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] and then [EXIT] returns the Play screen to the
display.
fig.06-106ad

11. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the SMF to be


imported, then press [ENTER].

When importing GM/GS/XG-compatible SMFs, MIDI


Channel 10 is generally assigned as the channel used for
rhythm performances. Thus, only the data on MIDI Channel
10 in the SMF is isolated and imported by the BR-900CD.
Note that the data on other channels is disregarded.
12. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the importdestination song pattern, then press [ENTER].
fig.03-439d

At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable


from the BR-900CD and the computer.
8. Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] repeatedly until the
indicator is flashing.
fig.03-436d

The import is executed.


* With some SMF files, a considerable amount of time may be
required to finish importing the file.

9. Press [EDIT].

180

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

With Macintosh

Loading Drum Sounds from


WAV/AIFF Files (Tone Load)

4. Select BACKUP with the TIME/VALUE dial, then


press [ENTER].
The Idling screen appears in the display.
fig.03-513d

You can import WAV and AIFF files on your computer and
load these as drum sounds (TONE LOAD).

The Rhythm and Tone Load functions cannot be used


when tracks are bounced directly to a CD (p. 59).

Wave data in the following formats can be imported.


You cannot import wave data in other formats.

WAV or AIFF format


Mono or Stereo
8-bit or 16-bit
Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz

Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.

Extremely short waveform data (less than


approximately 100 msec) cannot be loaded.

* You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
The BOSS_BR-900 icon is added to the computer.
fig.06-107

The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be


ignored.

Add the extension WAV to imported WAV files and


the extension AIF to imported AIFF files.

You can load drum sounds of up to 13 seconds for a


single drum kit.
(Example)
Kick: 3 seconds, snare: 3 seconds,
crash cymbal: 7 seconds Total 13 seconds

(Ex.)

BOSS_BR-900

5. Import the WAV or AIFF file.


1)

Click the BOSS_BR-900 icon.

2)

Drag the imported WAV or AIFF file to the


TONELOAD folder in the ROLAND folder.

fig.03-514d

Stereo WAV and AIFF files are loaded as mono


sounds with the left and right sides mixed.

2. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press


[UTILITY].
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to USB,

When you have finished importing the WAV or AIFF


files, the Idling screen returns to the display.
6. Quit the connection to the computer.
1)

Drag the BOSS_BR-900 icon into the trash.

The USB screen appears.

181

Section 7

1. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB


cable.

With Macintosh

7. Press BR-900CDs [EXIT] repeatedly to return to the


Play screen.
* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] and then [EXIT] returns the Play screen to the
display.
fig.06-106ad

You can preview the sound of the WAV or AIFF file to be


loaded by moving the cursor to PVW and pressing
[ENTER].
12. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the loaddestination song drum kit.
S15:

Song Drum Kit 15

fig.03-517d

At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable


from the BR-900CD and the computer.
8. Press [UTILITY].

13. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the loaddestination song drum sound, then press [ENTER].
The load is executed.

9. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


TONE, and press [ENTER].

To cancel, press [EXIT].


fig.03-518d

fig.03-515d

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

10. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


CARD, and press [ENTER].
The names of the WAV and AIFF files on the memory
card are displayed.
* WAV files are indicated by the symbol .W; .A indicates
AIFF files.
fig.03-516d

11. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select the WAV or AIFF


file with the drum sound to be loaded.

182

* WAV and AIFF files in the TONELOAD folder are retained


without being deleted even after this procedure is completed. If
these files are no longer needed, connect the BR-900CD to
your computer via USB and use the computer to delete the
files. Any files that are retained will use the required amount
of memory on the memory card.

With Macintosh

Using the BR-864 / BR-532s


Data

fig.06-110bd

You can use the BR-900CD to play BR-864 / BR-532 data.


* First be sure to back up the BR-864 / BR-532s ROLAND
folder to the computer.
1. Initializing the memory card on the BR-900CD (p. 196).
2. Connect your computer and the BR-900CD with a USB
cable.
3. Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
4. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to USB,

The USB screen appears.


5. Select BACKUP with the TIME/VALUE dial, then
press [ENTER].

When you have finished backing up the data, the Idling


screen returns to the display.
8. Quit the connection to the computer.
1)

Drag the BOSS_BR-900 icon into the trash.

9. Press the BR-900CDs [EXIT].


The USB screen returns to the display.
* If you press [EXIT] without quitting the connection to the
computer, the following screens appear. In this case, pressing
[ENTER] returns the USB screen to the display.
fig.06-106ad

The Idling screen appears in the display.


fig.06-110ad

10. When backup of the data is complete, press [EXIT] to


return to the Play screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-900CD and the computer.

Section 7

* You cannot carry out the following procedure unless the Idling
screen is displayed. Refer to p. 212 for instructions on
resolving this problem.
The BOSS_BR-900 icon is added to the computer.
fig.06-107

(Ex.)

BOSS_BR-900

6. Delete the BR-900CD ROLAND folder.


1)

Double-click the BOSS_BR-900 icon, and delete


the ROLAND folder.

7. Drag the previously backed up BR-864 / BR-532


ROLAND folder to the BOSS_BR-900 icon and
drop it there.

183

MEMO

184

Section 8
Other
Convenient
Functions

185

Adjusting the Display Contrast


Depending on where the BR-900CD is situated, the display
contents may be difficult to read. If this is the case, perform
the procedure given below to adjust the contrast (1 to 21).
fig.00-309

1,4 4
3
2
2,3

1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SYS,

fig.00-310d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select LCD Contrast, and


adjust the contrast with the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.00-311d

4. After completing the adjustment, press [UTILITY] (or


press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

186

If you press and hold [UTILITY] while turning the TIME/


VALUE dial, you will be able to change the contrast in real
time. Choose the method that best suits the BR-900CDs
setup.

Using a Foot Switch or Expression Pedal


You can connect an optional foot switch (such as the BOSS
FS-5U or Roland DP-2) or expression pedal (such as the
Roland EV-5 or BOSS FV-300L) to the FOOT SW/EXP
PEDAL jack on the rear panel, allowing you to use your foot
to control a number of functions.

fig.05-102d

fig.05-101

3. Press CURSOR [
Set the polarity switch
as shown in the following.

Foot Switch
(FS-5U etc.)

][

] and select Foot SW.

fig.05-103d

Expression Pedal
(Roland EV-5 etc.)

4. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial and select the foot switch


function.

* Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5, FV-300L;


optional). By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk
causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
* With the EV-5 and FV-300L, set the MIN volume to 0.
* You can also use an FS-6 (optional) for the foot switch. If
using an FS-6, connect to only one of the FS-6's jacks, either
the A or B jack. Additionally, set the polarity switch to FS5U. The A&B jack cannot be used.

When Using a Foot Switch


Use the following procedure to set the foot switch function.

PLAY:

The song will alternate between play and


stop each time you press the foot switch.

PUNCH:

Switches punch in and out alternately each


time you press the foot switch.

FX:

The insert effect will alternate between on


and off each time you press the foot switch.

* Not operational while Pitch Correction is in use.


5. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return
to the Play screen.
* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line
of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

1. Press [UTILITY].
] to move the cursor to SYS,

When Using an Expression Pedal


The expression pedal functions according to the effect
settings, as shown below.

Functions as a wah pedal when the Type for Wah (p.


101) is set to PEDAL.

Functions as a volume pedal when Foot Volume (p. 96)


is set to ON.

The expression pedal functions as a pitch shifter pedal


when Type for the Pitch Shifter (p. 98) is set to PEDAL.

187

Section 8

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

Tuning an Instrument (Tuner)


The BR-900CD has a built-in chromatic tuner function that
allows you to tune your instrument quickly.

Changing to the Tuner

The built-in tuner supports both guitar and bass guitar.

1. Press [TUNER] to access the Tuner screen.

As an example here, we will explain how to use the tuner to


tune your guitar.

fig.05-201d

* It is not possible to play back or record while using the tuner.

Check the following points before you begin.


That your guitar is connected to the GUITAR/BASS jack.
That [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] indicator on the INPUT
SELECT button is lit.
That GUITAR/BASS INPUT SENS is properly adjusted
(p. 35).
If [GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] indicator is off, press [GUITAR/
BASS/MIC2] to turn it on.

2. To exit the tuner, press [TUNER] once again (or press


[EXIT]) to return to the Play screen.

If you do not want to output the tuning sounds, either turn


down the MASTER fader.
* You cannot switch from the Tuner screen to other screens
(except the Play screen).

Explanation of the indications


that appear while tuning
When the built-in tuner of the BR-900CD is used, the
reference pitch is shown in the upper left of the display, and
the note name in the right. The lower part will display a
tuning guide to indicate the difference between the input
sound and the displayed note.
fig.05-202d

Reference Pitch

Note Name

Tuning Guide

If the difference between the input pitch and the correct pitch
is less than +/-50 cents, the tuning guide will indicate the
amount of the difference.
Watch the tuning guide, Watch the tuning guide as you tune
the instrument so that the vertical line is shown at the
mark.

188

Tuning an Instrument (Tuner)

Tuning

Setting the Reference Pitch of


the Tuner

1. Play a note using the string you are tuning.


The screen will indicate the note name that is closest to
the pitch of the string you played.
* Cleanly play a single note only on the string you wish to tune.
2. Continue tuning until the pitch name of the string you
are tuning appears in the display.
Normal tuning
7th
6th
5th
4th
3rd
2nd 1st
string string string string string string string
Guitar
Bass

The reference pitch refers to the frequency of the A4 key (i.e.,


the A key at the center of a piano keyboard) from the
instrument that serves as the reference pitch during
performances (e.g., piano). On the BR-900CD, you can set the
reference pitch of the tuner to any value between 435 and 445
Hz.
* This was set to 440 Hz when the unit was shipped from the
factory.

1. Press [TUNER] to access the Tuner screen.

fig.05-206d

3. Watch the tuning guide as you tune the instrument so


that the vertical line is shown at the mark.
If the pitch of the string is within +/-50 cents of the
correct pitch, the tuning guide will indicate the
discrepancy between the actual and the correct pitches.
Your instrument is tuned above the displayed note (#)
fig.05-203d

2. Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to change the reference


pitch.
Calib (Calibrate): 435445 Hz
3. To exit the tuner, press [TUNER] once again (or press
[EXIT]) to return to the Play screen.

Your instrument is tuned the displayed note

The reference pitch set here is used as the reference pitch for
Pitch Correction (p. 116).

fig.05-204d

Your instrument is tuned below the displayed note (b)


fig.05-205d

Section 8

4. Repeat steps 13 to tune each of the strings.


* If you are tuning a guitar that has a vibrato arm, tuning one
string may cause other strings to drift. In this case, you should
first tune the strings approximately so that the correct note
name is displayed, and then re-tune each string.

189

Mixing the Output from an External MIDI Device with


the Output from Your BR-900CD (Audio Sub Mix)
The Audio Sub Mix function allows you to mix the signal
input from LINE IN with the signal output to LINE OUT.
When performing synchronized playback using the BR900CD and an external MIDI device, you can use the Audio
Sub Mix function to mix the output from the external MIDI
device with that of the BR-900CD internally, within the BR-

Using the Audio Sub Mix function


1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SYS,

fig.05-503d

900CD so you wont need an external mixer.


Also, since you can output the signal from the MIDI device
without having to first record it to a track on the BR-900CD,
you can use the BR-900CD tracks more effectively.
fig.05-501

Sub Mixer : OFF

External Mixer

LINE
OUT

MIDI
OUT

OUTPUT

MIDI
IN

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select Sub Mixer, and


turn the TIME/VALUE dial to turn the setting ON.
fig.05-504d

fig.05-502

Sub Mixer : ON

4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return


to the Play screen.
5. Turn the LINE SENS knob to adjust the sensitivity to
the input from the external MIDI device.

LINE
IN

190

LINE
OUT

MIDI
OUT

OUTPUT

MIDI
IN

Even when the Sub Mixer is turned on, if you press INPUT
SELECT [LINE], illuminating its indicator, the signal from
LINE IN that passes through the recorder/mixer block is
given priority, and the Sub Mixer will not work.

Using Condenser Microphones (Phantom Power)


Most condenser microphones need a supply of power known
as phantom power in order to operate.
Accordingly, the BR-900CD can supply phantom power at
+48 V to condenser microphones connected to any of the
XLR-type connectors for MIC 1 and MIC 2.

1. Before proceeding, turn INPUT SENS GUITAR/BASS/


MIC2 and MIC knobs fully counter-clockwise in order
to reduce the input volumes, and then move the
MASTER fader and INPUT LEVEL knobs all the way
down.
If any of these volumes is not reduced, a loud click may
be output when the phantom power is turned on or off.

Phantom power
Condenser microphones generally contain a pair of thin
opposing electrodes. When a voltage is applied across
these electrodes, any vibration resulting from incoming
audio will be output as electrical waves. However, since
these waves are very weak, they must be boosted using
amplification circuitry within the microphone itself.
Phantom power is used to drive this amplification
circuitry.

2. Press [UTILITY].
The Utility screen will appear.
3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SYS,

4. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select Phantom SW, and


turn the TIME/VALUE dial to turn the setting ON.
fig.05-504d

Certain types of condenser microphone use internal


batteries as a source of power; accordingly, there will be
no need to supply phantom power in such a case.

ON:

Phantom power will be supplied.


Note that when turned on, phantom power
will be supplied to all XLR connectors for MIC
1 and 2.

OFF:

Phantom power will not be supplied.

Notes when using the Phantom power


Phantom power should always be turned off when
audio sources other than condenser microphones are
being connected to the BR-900CDs. In fact, dynamic
microphones, audio players, and the like can be
damaged by this power supply. Always refer to the
users manual for the microphone to be used in
order to confirm its phantom-power specifications.
A supply of phantom power is not needed for
certain types of condenser microphone (i.e.,
microphones featuring internal batteries, electric
condenser microphones, etc.). Ensure that phantom
power is set to OFF whenever one of these
microphones is connected.

6. To turn off the phantom power, repeat Steps 1 through


3, and then set Phantom SW to OFF in Step 4.

Phantom power cannot be turned on or off individually


for MIC 1 and 2.
Phantom power is not supplied to the 1/4 phone jack
for MIC 1 or to the GUITAR/BASS jack.
The phantom power setting reverts to OFF whenever
the BR-900CD is turned on. Remember, therefore, to turn
on this power supply whenever it is needed.
No supply of phantom power will be needed from the
BR-900CD when using an external microphone pre-amp
or a dedicated, external phantom power supply. Ensure
that phantom power is set to OFF in all such cases.

191

Section 8

The BR-900CDs MASTER fader, INPUT SENS


GUITAR/BASS/MIC2 and MIC knobs, and INPUT
LEVEL knobs must be moved all the way down
when phantom power is being turned on or off. If
this precaution is not observed, there is a possibility
that amplifiers, speakers, and the like may be
damaged by loud noises generated upon switching.

5. Slowly raise the INPUT SENS knobs, the MASTER


fader and INPUT LEVEL knobs, and confirm that an
audio signal is being received from the condenser
microphone(s).

Copying Difficult Songs (Phrase Trainer)


Your BR-900CD features a built-in Phrase Trainer. The
Phrase Trainer records from the device connected to the
input jacks (e.g., CD players or MD player) and then allows
you to play back a part of that recording repeatedly to allow
you to practice that portion again and again. You can also
slow down the playback to aid in copying fast phrases or
remove the guitar solo sound to play along with only the
backing instruments as a practice aid.

The Phrase Trainer can also be used with tracks 5 and 6.

Slowing Down the Speed


(Time Stretch)
The Time Stretch function allows you to slow down the
speed of playback to a half of the normal speed without
changing the pitch.
1. Press [PHRASE TRAINER].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select TimeStrtch, and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set ON.
fig.05-310d

* You cannot perform recording while you are using the Phrase
Trainer (Time Stretch or Center Cancel).
* The following buttons are disabled while the Phrase Trainer is
in use.
[PAN/EQ], [LOOP EFFECTS], [RHYTHM PAD]
* The Rhythm does not sound when Phrase Trainer is on.
1. Record the song you want to copy onto tracks 5 and 6.
For how to record with the BR-900CD, refer to (7) Basic
Recording (p. 39).
2. Repeat the portion of the song that you want to copy.
This will help you practice and copy a difficult phrase or
guitar solo as you can select any portion of the song and
have it repeated.
For how to repeat a portion of the song, refer to
Repeating Playback (Repeat) (p. 51).
3. When using the Time Stretch and Center Cancel
Function, press [PHRASE TRAINER] to make the
indicator light.
Each time you press [PHRASE TRAINER], the Phrase
Trainer is on (the [PHRASE TRAINER] indicator lights)
and off (the indicator is off).
* When you turn off both the Time Stretch Function and the
Center Cancel Function, it doesnt light.

ON:

Slows down playback to one-half without


changing the pitch.

OFF:

Pitch and playback speed are not changed.

Canceling the Center Sound


(Center Cancel)
The Center Cancel function allows you to remove the central
sound of the playback (e.g., vocals or guitar solos).
This is helpful if you want to practice playing along with the
backing instruments.
* Depending on how the song was recorded, it may not be
possible to completely remove the central sound.
* Sounds are played back in mono.
1. Press [PHRASE TRAINER].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select CentrCncel, and
turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set it to ON.
fig.05-302d

ON:

Removes central sound (e.g., vocals or guitar solos).

OFF: Normal playback.


Perform the procedure below if the central sound is not
removed as you desire or if you want to emphasize the
bass sound.
* When CentrCncel is set to OFF, subsequent operations are disabled.

192

Copying Difficult Songs (Phrase Trainer)

3. To emphasize the bass sound, press CURSOR [

[ ] to select Low Boost, and turn the TIME/VALUE


dial and adjust the value so that the bass sound is more
easily heard.
fig.05-303d

4. Press CURSOR [ ] to select C.Adjust, and turn the


TIME/VALUE dial and adjust the value of the sound
that you want to remove to decrease its volume.
* Depending on how the song was recorded, these procedures
may not be able to remove the sounds completely.
fig.05-304d

5. Press [EXIT] to return to the Play screen.

You can turn on both the Time Stretch and Center Cancel
functions to use them together.

Section 8
193

Initializing the BR-900CDs Settings


Initializing All the BR-900CDs
Settings
The following settings are initialized together at one time.

Initializing the System Settings


Follow the procedure below to initialize the system
parameters.

System Settings
Effects (User Patches/Song Patches)
Rhythm (Arrangements/Patterns/Drum Kits)

A list of the initial settings for each parameter is given in the


Parameter List (p. 208).
1. Press [UTILITY].

1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to INI,

2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to INI,

fig.05-603d

fig.05-601d

3. Press PARAMETER CURSOR [ ] [


cursor to ALL, and press [ENTER].

] to move the

The confirmation message Are you sure? appears in


the display.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SYS,

The confirmation message Are you sure? appears in


the display.
fig.05-604d

fig.05-602d

4. To continue the initialization, press [ENTER] (YES).


4. To continue the initialization, press [ENTER] (YES).

To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO) (or [UTILITY]).

To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO) (or [UTILITY]).

When [ENTER] is pressed, initialization begins.

When [ENTER] is pressed, initialization begins.

After the initialization has been completed, you are


returned to the Play screen.

After the initialization has been completed, you are


returned to the Play screen.

You can perform the same initialization with INIT


ALL, by holding down INPUT SELECT [GUITAR/
BASS/MIC2], [MIC], and [LINE] while turning the
POWER switch ON, then pressing [ENTER].

194

Initializing the BR-900CDs Settings

Initializing the Effect Settings


Follow the procedure below to initialize the user effect
patches or song effect patches.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

Initializing the Rhythm


Arrangements/Patterns/Drum Kits
This initializes the Rhythm Arrangements, Patterns, and
Drum Kits.
In Song Arrangement, Step 1 is set to the metronome.

] to move the cursor to INI,

fig.05-605d

In song patterns and song drum kits, the step is empty.


1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to INI,

fig.05-607d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


U EFX (user patch) or S EFX (song patch), and press
[ENTER].
The confirmation message Are you sure? appears in
the display.
(Example) when you select U EFX
fig.05-606d

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to RHY,

The confirmation message Are you sure? appears in


the display.
fig.05-608d

4. To continue the initialization, press [ENTER] (YES).


To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO) (or [UTILITY]).
When [ENTER] is pressed, initialization begins.

To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO) (or [UTILITY]).


When [ENTER] is pressed, initialization begins.
After the initialization has been completed, you are
returned to the Play screen.

195

Section 8

After the initialization has been completed, you are


returned to the Play screen.

4. To continue the initialization, press [ENTER] (YES).

Initializing the BR-900CDs Settings

Initializing the Memory Card

4. To continue the initialization, press [ENTER] (YES).


To cancel, press [EXIT] (NO) (or [UTILITY]).
When [ENTER] is pressed, initialization begins.

Be aware that when initialized, any existing data on the card


will be erased.
* If you initialize the memory card supplied with the BR900CD, the demo songs on the card will be lost.

When the initializing has been completed, Completed!


appears in the display.
Keep power on! Song creating... then appears in the
display, and a new song is automatically created.
In this case, the data type selected is HiFi (MT2).

Before you insert or remove a memory card, always turn off


the BR-900CD first. If a memory card is inserted when the
power is turned on, the data in the memory card may be
destroyed, or the memory card may become unusable.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to


CARD, and press [ENTER].
The confirmation message Are you sure? appears in
the display.

196

* Depending on the capacity of the memory card, initializing


may take more than ten minutes to complete. This is not a
malfunction. The progress of the initializing is shown in the
display. Do not turn off the BR-900CD until the initializing
has been completed.

] to move the cursor to INI,

fig.05-609d

fig.05-610d

When creation of the song is finished, the play screen


returns to the display.

Do not remove the memory card or turn off the BR-900CD


while the display shows Keep power on! Doing so can
destroy the data on the memory card and/or render the
memory card itself unusable.

Conserving Battery Power (Power Save)


Your BR-900CD is equipped with a power save function that
limits the current dissipation during use.
When the power save function is activated, if no button, or
TIME/VALUE dial on the BR-900CD is used for a certain
amount of time, the BR-900CD will enter the standby state
and turn off the display backlight and button indicators.

3. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to select PowerSave, and


turn the TIME/VALUE dial to set the time until the
Power Save function is activated.
Valid Settings: OFF, 1min, 3min, 5min, 10min
fig.05-704d

Also, when in the standby state, the display will appear as


shown below.
fig.05-701d

4. Press [UTILITY] (or press [EXIT] repeatedly) to return


to the Play screen.
* The power save function is especially helpful when the BR900CD is running on battery power.
Perform the procedure given below to activate the power
save function.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

* During updating, Keep power on! appears in the upper line


of the display, while the lower line shows what is being
processed.

Deactivating the power save function


Press any of the panel buttons to deactivate power save.

] to move the cursor to SYS,

* After the power save function is deactivated, the Play screen


appears.

fig.05-703d

Section 8
197

Utility Parameter List


Utilities include the following:

AB Quantize (AB Qtz)

System parameters for setting functions affecting the


entire BR-900CD

Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)

Sync parameters for setting synchronized


performance functions

Quantize is a function that enables you to set the start and


end points in measure units when making the settings for
repeat playback (the repeated portion).

Scrub parameters for setting scrub functions

This setting turns the Quantize function on and off.

Remain Information (Remain Inf)

About the System Parameters


This section describes the System parameters.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)


This indicates the remaining amount of recording time
available in the display during recording standby or while
recording is in progress.

Power Save Mode (PowerSave)


] to move the cursor to SYS,

3. Using CURSOR [ ] [ ], select the System parameter,


then make the setting with the VALUE/TIME dial.

LCD Contrast
Valid Settings: 121 (Initial value: 13)

Valid Settings: OFF, 1, 3, 5, 10 (min) (Initial value: OFF)


This setting turns the Power Save function on and off.
Power Save is a function that reduces power consumption
through such power-saving measures as switching off the
displays illumination if no operation is performed for a set
period of time (for one, three, five, or ten minutes). This is
effective in preventing excess battery drain.

This sets the display contrast.

Foot Switch Assign (Foot SW)


Valid Settings: PLAY, PUNCH, FX (Initial value: PLAY)
This sets the function for the foot switch (an optional FS-5U
or DP-2) connected to the FOOT SW/EXP PEDAL jack.
PLAY:

Controls the recorders PLAY and STOP


functions.

PUNCH:

Controls Punch In/Out.

FX:

Controls the insert effects On/Off.

Audio Sub Mix Switch (Sub Mixer)


Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)
This setting turns the Audio Sub Mix function (output mix of
the external inputs from LINE IN) on and off.

Internal mic switch (Mic)

About the Sync Parameters


This section describes the Sync parameters.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [ ] to move the cursor to
SYNC, and press [ENTER].
3. Using CURSOR [ ] [ ], select the Sync parameter,
then make the setting with the VALUE/TIME dial.

Sync Generator (Sync Gen)


Valid Settings: OFF, MTC, MCK (Initial value: OFF)
This sets the synchronization signals output from the MIDI
OUT connector.

Valid Settings: EXTERNAL, ONBRD+EXT


(Initial value: EXTERNAL)

OFF:

No synchronization signal is output from


MIDI OUT.

Use this setting to input only the sound from the external mic
connected to MIC 1, or to switch on the internal mic and
input a mix of the sounds from the internal and external
mics.

MTC:

MTC synchronization signals are output from


MIDI OUT.

MCK:

MIDI CLOCK synchronization signals are


output from MIDI OUT.

Phantom power switch (Phantom SW)

MMC Master

Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)

Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)

This setting turns the phantom power on and off.

This setting determines whether or not the Master MMC


code is output from the MIDI OUT connector.

198

Utility Parameter List

MTC Type
Valid Settings: 30, 29N, 29D, 25, 24 (Initial value: 30)
This sets the type of MTC output from the MIDI OUT
connector.
30 frames per second non-drop format. This is
used by audio devices such as analog tape
recorders, and for NTSC format black and
white video (used in Japan and the U.S.).

30:

About the Scrub Parameters


This section describes the Scrub parameters.
1. Press [UTILITY].
2. Press CURSOR [ ] [
and press [ENTER].

] to move the cursor to SCR,

3. Using CURSOR [ ] [ ], select the Scrub parameter,


then make the setting with the TIME/VALUE dial.

29N:

29.97 frames per second non-drop format. This


is used for NTSC format color video (used in
Japan and the U.S.).

29D:

29.97 frames per second drop format. This is

Valid Settings: FROM, TO (Initial value: FROM)

used for NTSC format broadcast color video


(used in Japan and the U.S.).

This sets the Scrub function mode.

25 frame per second frame rate. This is used


for SECAM or PAL format video, audio
equipment, and film (used in Europe and
elsewhere).

25:

24 frame per second frame rate. This is used


for video, audio devices, and film in the US.

24:

Rhythm MIDI Channel (RhyMIDI ch)


Valid Settings: 116, OFF (Initial value: 10)
This sets the MIDI channel for the Rhythm performance data
output from the MIDI OUT connector. No data is output
when this is set to OFF.

Offset
Valid Settings: 00:00:00-00.023:59:59-29.9
(Initial value: 00:00:00-00.0)
Sets the time required to align the song playback and MTC
timing when synchronizing an external device using MTC
from the BR-900CD.

Scrub Mode From/To

Scrub is a function for repeatedly playing back material of


an extremely short duration (approximately 45 msec).
You can get scrub playback by holding down [STOP] and
pressing [PLAY].
FROM:

Provides about 45 milliseconds of scrub


playback starting from the current location.

TO:

Provides about 45 milliseconds of scrub


playback ending up at the current location.

Preview Switch (Preview SW)


Valid Settings: ON, OFF (Initial value: OFF)
This setting turns the Preview function on and off.
When the Preview switch is set to ON, pressing [REW]
during scrub playback provides one second of playback time
starting from the current location, while pressing [FF]
provides one second of playback time ending up at the
current location.

The offset is set as the difference between the time to which


to align the MTC timing and the time to which to align the
song timing. For example, you want to have the external
device play back with the MTC timing shown below when
the song timing reaches 01h00m00s00, then set the offset as
follows.
MTC for
External Device

Offset Setting

01h00m00s00

01h30m00s00

00h30m00s00

01h00m00s00

00h30m00s00

23h30m00s00

Section 8

Song Timing

The Offset is stored to each song individually.

199

MEMO

200

Section 9
Appendices

201

Effect Patch List


GTR (GUITAR/BASS)
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

202

Patch Name
JC Clean
HiGainLd
Over Drv
Phased
Crunch
MS Strgt
St WACK
Ambient
Voxy!
St Metal
TREM'TWN
StdAmp F
StdAmp M
St Flang
TEXAS
HiGainMS
StThrash
SWEET LD
BIG COMP
PowChord
Uni-Wah
Gt Pad
D-CompLd
DrivenLd
RockLead
RAGE!
ClearSky
60s UK
TubeStck
StSustin
Country
ClapLead
TURND211
80'sHard
90'sMetl
Bubbling
BIG FUNK
Dirty
MatchDrv
St AltLd
PhatPhas
SocrFild
UK Gtr
DOWN 2 D
CmpBilly
JC Metal
LATE70's
EARY70's
American
Heavy

Algorithm

No.

Patch Name

Algorithm

COSM GTR AMP


COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP

51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99

Hard Drv
HyperMtl
Metal Ld
ResoLead
ARPEGGIO
SmallAmp
CleanLd
BluesyLd
Delayed
Wah Lead
FatClean
ClnTubes
Std MkII
Crunchy
Aussie
DarfBlus
HeadinWM
BG Lead
FixedWah
BIG 3RDS
ACOUSTY
BrightAc
ACO w/PZ
AC4Slide
Dream Ac
TigtBass
LoosBass
B.SIM+Ch
UprtPhsd
G>FRTLES
Natural
AcstSolo
MIC'D AC
NICE ACS
WIDE ACS
SLAPnPOP
PhasBass
FLIPTOP
SquezBas
StdoBass
BassTube
PunkBass
SUSTAIN
Big8-Stg
FRETLESS
STADIUM
OCTAVE
NO FRET
DRV BASS

COSM GTR AMP


COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM COMP GTR
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
COSM GTR AMP
ACOUSTIC SIM
ACOUSTIC SIM
ACOUSTIC SIM
ACOUSTIC SIM
ACOUSTIC SIM
BASS SIM
BASS SIM
BASS SIM
BASS SIM
BASS SIM
ACOUSTIC GTR
ACOUSTIC GTR
ACOUSTIC GTR
ACOUSTIC GTR
ACOUSTIC GTR
BASS MULTI
BASS MULTI
COSM BASS AMP
COSM COMP BSS
COSM COMP BSS
COSM BASS AMP
COSM BASS AMP
COSM COMP BSS
BASS MULTI
BASS MULTI
COSM COMP BSS
BASS MULTI
BASS MULTI
COSM BASS AMP

Effect Patch List

MIC

LIN (LINE)

Patch Name

Algorithm

No.

Patch Name

Algorithm

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

Vo Comp1
Vo Comp2
Kick Cmp
SnareCmp
BrassCmp
VocalFx1
VocalFx2
VocalFx3
VocalFx4
NARRATOR
VOX DOUB
VOX DETN
KARAOKE
UNISON
STUTTER
D.VADER
ALIEN
BullHorn
SEAGULLS
SO DEEP!
BrightCh
FatBrass
Dark EQ
Vocal EQ
BrightEQ
Enh+BCut
ST.PAN
SLOW FLG
FAST FLG
SLOW CHO
SLAPBACK
BigEQ+DL
BalladFx
PTCH-1/2
PTCH+1/2
CM+DS+EH
CM+EH+EQ
CM+DS+EQ
CM+EQ+DB
CM+EQ+DT

COSM COMP VCL


COSM COMP VCL
COSM COMP VCL
COSM COMP VCL
COSM COMP VCL
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOICE TRANS
VOICE TRANS
VOICE TRANS
VOICE TRANS
VOCAL MULTI
VOICE TRANS
VOICE TRANS
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI
VOCAL MULTI

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

CM+FatEQ
CM+ThnEQ
Tight EQ
CM+BigEQ
SMALL EQ
T'WAH UP
T'WAH DW
R.MOD:LO
R.MOD:HI
TotalMod
DEEP FLG
LO&SLOW
LO&FAST
HI&SLOW
HI&FAST
StChorus
SlowChrs
FastChrs
PRE-DLY
VntgPhas
MdrnPhas
DeepPhas
PhatPhas
PS:DETUN
PS:-1OCT
PS:+1OCT
ST DOUBL
MONO>>ST
SLOW PAN
FAST PAN
CHRS+DLY
CHRS+TAP
PH+SLPBK
FLNG+TAP
LoCmbFlt
HiCmbFlt
120 RMOD
PAN+DLY
ST TREM
120 SLIC
20sRadio
40sRadio
60sRadio
PHONGRPH
Vntg45's
CLASC LP
VntgSmpl
1985Smpl
R-ModSmp
2-BIT DS

STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
STEREO MULTI
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX
LO-FI BOX

Section 9

No.

203

Effect Patch List

SML (SIMUL)
No.

Patch Name

Algorithm

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

EQ + JC
DELAY+JC
CMP+TWIN
EQ+twin
CMP+SMAL
EQ+CRNCH
EQ+MATCH
DL+match
EQ+VO
COMP+vo
CMP+BLUS
CMP+BG
DELAY+bg
DL+MS(1)
DL+ms(1)
DL+MS1+2
CM&EQ+ms
DLY+SLDN
CMP+METL
EQ+METAL
DI+H-STD
EQ+S-STD
CM+H-JUM
CM+S-JUM
DL+H-ENH
CM+S-ENH
EQ+H-PZO
DL+S-PZO
CMP+PZO1
DL+PZO2
DIR+SIM1
CMP+SIM2
EQ+SIM3
DL+SIM4
CMP+SIM5
COMP+AC
COMP+CLS
COMP+DIS
COMP+FAR
COMP+DYN
COMP+MIC
COMP+DIR
NS+VNTG
CMP+CMP1
DI+COMP2
CMP+CMP3
NS+COMP4
CMP+CMP5
COMP+SML
COMP+LRG

VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+GT AMP
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+AC.SIM
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC
VO+ACOUSTIC

204

Mastering Tool Kit Patch List


MTK (MASTERING TOOL KIT)
No.

Patch Name

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Mix Down
PreMastr
Live Mix
Pop Mix
DanceMix
JinglMix
HardComp
SoftComp
CleanCmp
DanceCmp
OrchComp
VocalCmp
Acoustic
RockBand
Orchestr
LowBoost
Brighten
DJsVoice
PhoneVox

Pitch Correction Patch List


PCR (PITCH CORRECTION)
No.

Patch Name

P01

Alto

P02

Soprano

P03

Tenor

P04

Baritone

P05

Machine

Section 9
205

Arrangement / Pattern List


Preset Arrangement List
Each of the preset Arrangement (except Metro4/4) is set so that a three-measure BREAK, followed by V1 (verse) comes after the E (ending).

No.
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
P09
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
P28
P29
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
P38
P39
P40
P41
P42
P43
P44
P45
P46
P47
P48
P49
P50

206

Arrangement
Name

Initial
Tempo

Beat

ROCK1
ROCK2
ROCK3
ROCK4
ROCK5
ROCK6
HdRck1
HdRck2
HdRck3
HdRck4
HdRck5
HEAVY1
HEAVY2
HEAVY3
HEAVY4
HEAVY5
POP1
POP2
POP3
POP4
POP5
POP6
POP7
POP8
BALLAD1
BALLAD2
BLUES1
BLUES2
BLUES3
BLUES4
R&B1
R&B2
R&B3
R&B4
R&B5
JAZZ1
JAZZ2
JAZZ3
FUSION1
FUSION2
HipHop1
HipHop2
FUNK
HOUSE
Cntry1
Cntry2
Other1
Other2
Other3
Metro4/4

130
130
118
118
104
86
130
98
126
120
118
210
120
120
162
109
118
118
118
118
140
96
66
151
70
89
124
192
124
148
110
154
108
96
94
140
140
140
120
118
93
102
110
114
118
118
96
118
125
120

4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4

IN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V1
2
3
3
5
5
2
5
3
5
4
2
5
3
3
3
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
5
5
2
2
5
3
5
5
3
5
5
5
3
5
5
5
2
2
3
2
3
3
2
2
5
2
-

Starting measure
F1
V2
F2
4
6
8
5
7
9
6
7
10
8
9
12
8
9
12
9
10
17
8
9
12
10
11
18
8
9
12
7
8
11
5
6
9
11
13
19
9
11
17
9
11
17
9
11
17
8
9
12
6
7
10
6
7
10
6
7
10
6
7
10
6
7
10
6
7
10
7
8
11
8
9
16
8
9
12
5
6
9
5
6
9
12
13
20
10
11
18
8
9
12
8
9
12
6
7
10
8
9
12
12
13
20
8
9
12
5
7
9
7
9
11
12
13
20
12
13
20
5
6
9
9
10
17
10
11
18
4
6
8
6
7
10
6
7
10
5
6
9
9
10
17
7
9
11
5
6
9
-

V2
10
11
11
13
13
18
13
19
13
12
10
21
19
19
19
13
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
17
13
10
10
21
19
13
13
11
13
21
13
11
13
21
21
10
18
19
10
11
11
10
18
13
10
-

END
12
13
15
15
15
22
15
23
15
15
12
25
21
21
21
15
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
21
15
12
13
25
23
15
15
13
15
25
15
13
15
25
25
12
22
23
12
13
13
12
22
15
12
-

BREAK

V1

Drum
Kit

16
17
17
19
17
24
18
25
20
18
13
29
23
24
24
16
17
15
15
17
15
15
16
24
18
14
16
29
26
17
18
18
18
26
19
15
17
30
29
15
23
25
13
15
14
14
24
19
14
-

19
20
20
22
20
27
21
28
23
21
16
32
26
27
27
19
20
18
18
20
18
18
19
27
21
17
19
32
29
20
21
21
21
29
22
18
20
33
32
18
26
28
16
18
17
17
27
22
17
-

ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
STD 2
ROOM
HARD
ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
HARD
HARD
HARD
ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
STD1
ROOM
ROOM
ROOM
STD 1
STD 2
STD 1
ROOM
STD 2
STD 2
STD 1
STD 2
STD 1
STD 1
STD 1
STD 2
STD 1
STD 1
JAZZ
JAZZ
JAZZ
STD2
ROOM
HIP-HOP
808
HIP-HOP
HOUSE
JAZZ
JAZZ
REGGAE
STD 2
ROOM
STD 1

Arrangement / Pattern List

Preset Pattern List


Pattern Name
(Abbreviation shown in display)

Beat
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
-

IN
1
2
2
4
4
1
4
2
4
3
1
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
4
4
1
1
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
4
1
-

V1
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
4
2
2
1
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
2
1
2
4
2
2
-

Measure
F1
V2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
4
1
2
1
4
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
4
1
2
1
2
1
4
1
4
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
4
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
4
1
4
1
2
1
4
1
4
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
-

F2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
-

E
4
4
2
4
2
2
3
2
5
3
1
4
2
3
3
1
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
3
3
2
3
4
3
2
3
5
3
1
4
2
2
5
4
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
4
2
-

Section 9

ROCK1
ROCK2
ROCK3
ROCK4
ROCK5
ROCK6
Hard Rock 1(HdRc1)
Hard Rock 1(HdRc2)
Hard Rock 1(HdRc3)
Hard Rock 1(HdRc4)
Hard Rock 1(HdRc5)
HEAVY1 (HEVY1)
HEAVY2 (HEVY2)
HEAVY3 (HEVY3)
HEAVY4 (HEVY4)
HEAVY5 (HEVY5)
POP1
POP2
POP3
POP4
POP5
POP6
POP7
POP8
BALLAD1 (BALD1)
BALLAD2 (BALD2)
BLUES1 (BLUS1)
BLUES2 (BLUS2)
BLUES3 (BLUS3)
BLUES4 (BLUS4)
R&B1
R&B2
R&B3
R&B4
R&B5
JAZZ1
JAZZ2
JAZZ3
FUSION1 (FUSN1)
FUSION2 (FUSN2)
HipHop1 (H.Hp1)
HipHop2 (H.Hp2)
FUNK
HOUSE
Cntry1 (Cnty1)
Cntry2 (Cnty2)
OTHER1 (Othr1)
OTHER2 (Othr1)
OTHER3 (Othr1)
Metro
BREAK

Initial
Tempo
130
130
118
118
104
86
130
98
126
120
118
210
120
120
162
109
118
118
118
118
140
96
66
151
70
89
124
192
124
148
110
154
108
96
94
140
140
140
120
118
93
102
110
114
118
118
96
118
125
-

207

Parameter List
(*1) If you want to save the settings as the currently selected song data, hold down [STOP] and press [REC].
(*2) Stored in the BR-900CD.
(*3) Not Stored.

Mixer Parameter (*1)


Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Input Select

GUITAR/BASS

GUITAR/BASS, MIC, LINE, SIMUL (*3)

Recording Mode

REC MODE

INPUT

INPUT, BOUNCE, MASTERING (*3)

PAN

PAN

C00

L50C00R50

Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Effect Type

FX Type

CHORUS

CHORUS, DELAY, DBLN

Chorus Send Level

Send

In,Tr1Tr6, Tr78: 0, Rhy: 0

0100

Rate

Rate

10

0100

Depth

Depth

10

0100

Pre Delay

Pre Dly

10.0 ms

0.550.0 ms

Effect level

E.Level

100

0100

Delay Send Level

Send

In,Tr1Tr6, Tr78: 0, Rhy: 0

0100

Delay Time

Dly Tme

370 ms

101000 ms

Feedback

Feedback

30

0100

Chorus / Delay / Doubling

Chorus

Delay

Effect Level

E.Level

30

0100

Reverb Send

Rev Send

50

0100

Doubling Send Level

Send

In,Tr1Tr6, Tr78: 0, Rhy: 0

0100

Delay Time

Dly Tme

20.0 ms

0.550.0 ms

Effect level

E.Level

100

0100

Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Reverb Send level

Send

In,Tr1Tr6, Tr78: 0, Rhy: 0

0100

Reverb Type

Type

HALL

HALL, ROOM

Reverb Time

Rev Time

2.0 s

0.110.0 s

Tone

Tone

-120+12

Effect Level

E.Level

50

0100

Doubling

Reverb

Track EQ
Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Equalizer On/Off

EQ

Tr16, 7/8: OFF

OFF, ON

Equalizer Low Gain

Lo G

Tr16, 7/8: 0 dB

-120+12 dB

Equalizer Low Frequency

Lo F

Tr16, 7/8: 100 Hz

40 Hz1.5 kHz

Equalizer High Gain

Hi G

Tr16, 7/8: 0 dB

-120+12 dB

Equalizer High Frequency

Hi F

Tr16, 7/8: 1.0 kHz

500 Hz18 kHz

208

Parameter List

Recorder Parameter (*1)


Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Recording Track

Track 16, Track 1/27/8

V-Track

V-TRACK

18

Auto Punch On/Off

OFF

OFF, ON

Auto Punch In/Out

Any time

Locator

Any time

Repeat

Any time

The settable range for Auto Punch In/Out, Locator and Repeat will change slightly depending on the MTC Type (sync parameter).

Song Parameter (*1)


Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Song Name

SONG NAME

SONG0000

8 characters

Data Type

Type

HiFi (MT2)

HiFi (MT2), STD (LV1), LONG (LV2)

Song Protect

Protect SW

OFF

OFF, ON

Digital Copy Protect

Copy Prtct

OFF

OFF, ON

Time Stretch

Time Strtch

OFF

OFF, ON (*3)

Center Cancel

CentrCncel

OFF

OFF, ON (*3)

Center cancel Low Boost

Low Boost

012 (*3)

Center cancel Adjust

C.Adjust

C00

L10C00R10 (*3)

Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

LCD Contrast

LCD Contrast

13

121

Phrase Trainer

System Parameter (*2)

Foot Switch Assign

Foot SW

PLAY

PLAY, PUNCH, FX

Audio Sub Mix Switch

Sub Mixer

OFF

OFF, ON

Internal Mic On/Off Switch

Mic

EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL, ONBRD+EXT

Phantom Power Switch

Phantom SW

OFF

OFF, ON (*3)

AB Quantize

AB Qtz

OFF

OFF, ON

Remain Information

Remain Inf

OFF

OFF, ON

Power Save Mode

PowerSave

OFF

OFF, 1, 3, 5, 10 (min)

Calibrate (Tuner)

Calib

440

435445 (Hz)

Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Sync Generator

Sync Gen

OFF

OFF, MTC, MCK

MMC Master

MMC Master

OFF

OFF, ON

MTC Type

MTC Type

30

24, 25, 29D, 29N, 30

Rhythm MIDI Channel

RhyMIDI Ch

10

116, OFF

Offset

Offset

00:00:00-00.0

Any time

Sync Parameter (*2)

Section 9
209

Parameter List

CD Parameter
Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Pre Gap

Pre Gap

2.0 sec

0.03.4 sec (*3)

Scrub Parameter (*3)


Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Scrub From/To Mode

From/To

FROM

FROM, TO

Preview Switch

Preview SW

OFF

OFF, ON

Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Arrangement / Pattern / Off

OFF

OFF, ARRANGE, PATTERN

Arrangement

Arrangement Name

P01

P0150, S0105

Pattern

Pattern Name

P001

P001327, S001100

Rhythm Pad (*3)

OFF

UPPER, LOWER, OFF

Rhythm Parameter (*1)

Arrangement Parameter

(*1)

Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Step

current setting

150

Tempo

current setting

25.0250.0

Starting Measure

current setting

001

001999

Pattern

current setting

P001327, S001100

Drum Kit

Drum Kit

STD1, STD2, ROOM, HARD, JAZZ,


HIP-HOP, HOUSE, REGGAE, 808,
SongKit15

Parameter Name

Display

Initial Value

Valid Settings

Measure (*1)

current setting

1999

Time Signature (*1)

current setting

4/4

1/18/1, 1/28/2,1/48/4, 1/88/8

Tempo (*3)

current setting

25.0250.0

Quantize (*3)

current setting

,  3, ,  3, ,  3, ,  3, HI

Click (*3)

Click

03

Pattern Parameter

210

Troubleshooting
If the BR-900CD does not function as you expect, please
check the following points before assuming that a
malfunction has occurred.
If this does not resolve the problem, contact a nearby Roland
service center or your dealer.

Problems with the Sound

Cannot record

Is a song protected?

Is a memory card inserted?

Does the memory card have insufficient remaining


capacity?

Has the recording mode (REC MODE) been selected


correctly?

Has the Phrase Trainer or Scrub Playback function


been turned on?

No sound

Is the power of the BR-900CD and of the connected


equipment turned on?

The recorded sound contains noise or


distortion

Are the audio cables connected correctly?

Are any audio cables broken?

Has the volume of the connected amp or mixer been


lowered?

Has the MASTER fader or headphone volume of the


BR-900CD been lowered?

Is a memory card inserted?

Has the wrong card been inserted?


You can use commercially available CompactFlash cards
as memory cards for the BR-900CD; The 3.3 V type with
the capacities of 32 MB to 1 GB can be used.

Are you attempting to play back a short phrase of less


than 1.0 seconds?
Phrases of 1.0 seconds or less cannot be played.

* Set it so the 0 is not indicated in the level meter.

Are the track output levels appropriate?


If you hear noise or distortion after bouncing tracks, the
output level of the tracks was too high.

Is a mic with high output impedance connected


directly to the BR-900CD?
The BR-900CD is designed with a wide margin of
headroom. Also, since the MIC 1 and MIC 2 jacks are low
impedance inputs, the recording level may be too low,
depending on the response of some mics. In such cases,
connect the mic via a mic preamp to the LINE IN jacks

The volume level of the instrument


connected to GUITAR/BASS jack or
LINE IN jacks is too low

Could you be using a connection cable that contains a


resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.

on the BR-900CD before recording.

Cannot digitally record to an external


device

Does the sampling rate of the BR-900CD match that of


the digital audio device?
Set the digital audio device to a sampling rate of 44.1
kHz.

Does the digital signal format match?


Your digital audio device may use a non-standard digital
signal format. Connect the BR-900CD to a digital audio
device that supports CP-1201 or S/P DIF.

A specific track cannot be heard

Has the track volume been lowered?

Is the V-Track setting for a different V-Track?

Has the track been muted?

The input source cannot be heard


Did you adjust the SENS knob?

Has INPUT SELECT been muted? (The INPUT


SELECT indicator will be dark.)

Has the INPUT LEVEL knob been set to MIN?

If you are using the internal microphone, is Mic


under UTILITY set to ONBRD+EXT?

Section 9

Is the input sensitivity set appropriately?


If the input sensitivity is too high, the recorded sound
will be distorted. If it is too low, the input sound will be
buried in noise. Adjust the SENS knob so that the level
meter moves as much as possible without causing the
PEAK indicator to light.

211

Troubleshooting

Problems with the Memory Card

Synchronization Problems

Unsupported Card! is displayed

Cannot Synchronize

Do you have a compatible (CompactFlash) memory


card inserted in the BR-900CD?

When using MTC to synchronize the BR-900CD with a MIDI


sequencer, the BR-900CD must be the master device.

Is the memory card fully and securely inserted?

Is the MIDI cable connected correctly?

Is the MIDI cable broken?

Has the sync generator been set to the desired


synchronization procedure (MTC or MIDI Clock)?
(p. 158)

Memory card data was damaged


If memory card data has been damaged, the following causes
are possible. Please initialize the card once again (p. 196).

Was the power turned off while the recorder was


operating?

If you are synchronizing with MTC, has the other


device been set to the same MTC type? (p. 158)

Was a strong physical shock applied to the memory


card?

Has the MIDI sequencer been set correctly?

Is the MIDI sequencer ready to play back?

Could the power have been turned off while the


memory card was being accessed?

Does the other device support the MMC commands of


the BR-900CD?

Was the card initialized on a PC or digital camera?

Problems with the CD-R/RW Drive

Synchronization with the rhythm


machine is lost

Cannot remove the CD-R/RW disc

Is the connected rhythm machine receiving Song


Position Pointer?

Is the power turned on?

Certain rhythm machines are unable to receive Song


Position Pointer while in Pattern mode.

The CD-R/RW disc cannot be removed unless the power


is turned on.

Check the MIDI implementation for the rhythm machine


you are using.

Is a screen for reading from, or writing to CD-R/RW


discs showing in the display?
It is not possible to eject the disc when youre in a screen
for reading/writing CD-R/RW discs. Press [EXIT]
several times to return to the Play screen, then press the
EJECT button again.

Cannot read from/write to CD-R/RW discs

Is the BR-900CD in a level position?

Was a strong physical shock applied to the CD-R/RW


drive?

Is the disc correctly placed in the CD-R/RW drive?

Are you using the right type of CD-R/RW disc?

Are you using a CD-R disc that has already been


written to, or a CD-RW disc that may be too old?

Is the CD-R/RW drive being force ejected?


Pressing a straightened paper clip or similar object into
the emergency eject hole in the CD-R/RW drives front
side forces ejection of the CD-R/RW disc. However, the
CD-R/RW drive may not operate correctly after this is
done. Should this be the case, turn off the power, then
turn it back on again.

212

Problems with USB


Idling screen not displayed

Is the USB cable properly connected?

Is your computer's operating system compatible with


the BR-900CD?
Windows: Windows Me/2000/XP
Macintosh: Mac OS 9.1.x / 9.2.x or OS X

Error Messages
If you attempt an incorrect operation or if an operation could
not be executed, the display will indicate an error message.

Card Read Error!

Refer to this list and take the appropriate action.

Solution 1: Turn off the BR-900CD, properly insert the


memory card, then turn the BR-900CD back on.

Battery Low!

Solution 2: Initialize the card (p. 196).

Cause:

The batteries are depleted (6 x AA dry-cell


batteries).

Solution:

Replace the batteries as soon as possible (p. 23).

Blank Disc!
Cause:

Disc in the CD-R/RW drive contains no data.

Solution:

Load a CD-R/RW disc that has data written on it.

Cause:

* If the same message appears after you have taken the above
steps, it is possible that the memory card is malfunctioning.

Card Write Error!


Cause:

An error occurred while writing data to the


memory card.

Solution:

The memory card must be initialized (p. 196).


Also, the song data you had been attempting to
save will be lost.

Cannot Edit! Quantize is Low!


Cause:

Solution:

During Step Recording of a pattern, the Quantize


setting is too coarse, so multiple entries are
appearing at the same point in the matrix.

CD Full!
Cause 1:

The CD-R/RW disc is full, and no more data


can be written to it.

Fine the Quantize setting (p. 130).

Cause 2:

When creating an audio CD, the total time of the


tracks exceeds the capacity of the CD-R/RW disc.

Solution:

Either reduce the amount of data to be written,


or place a new CD-R/RW disc in the drive and
start the procedure over again.

Cannot Edit! This is a Preset


Cause:

Preset data is selected; you cannot edit this data.

Solution:

Copy the song data and then edit that.

Cannot Erase!
Cause:

No further steps can be erased.

Solution:

The Pitch Correction Map must contain a


minimum of one step.

Cannot Insert!
Cause:

No further steps can be inserted.

Solution:

The Pitch Correction Map can contain a


maximum of 99 steps.

Cannot Program! Rhythm Off.


Cause:

The Rhythm is switched off, so you cannot


program it.

Solution:

Press [ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] to select


Arrange mode or Pattern mode.

CD Medium Error!
Cause:

There is a problem with the CD-R/RW disc.


Alternatively, the disc on the CD-R/RW drive
is unreadable.
Solution 1: Confirm that the correct type of disc is placed in
the CD-R/RW drive.
Solution 2: Use a new CD-R/RW disc.

CD Read Error!
Cause:
Solution:

Cause:
Solution:

Cause:

You cannot punch in when a CD is specified as


the bounce destination.

Solution:

If using the punch-in function, specify a track as


the bounce destination.

Card Full!
It is not possible to record or copy due to small
memory capacity.

Solution1:

Back up the data you need to your computer (p.


164, p. 175), and delete unneeded data.

An error occurred while writing data to the


CD-R/RW disc.
This may be due to a low-quality or dated disc.
Try using a new CD-R/RW disc.

Data Too Short!


Cause:

Solution:

Cause:

Perform the Song Optimize operation (p. 78).


Solution:

You have attempted to import a WAV/AIFF


file shorter than one second or to load a WAV/
AIFF file shorter than 0.1 seconds using the
Tone Load function.
Make sure the WAV/AIFF file to be loaded is at
least one second in length, or if using the Tone
Load function, select a WAV/AIFF file that is at
least 0.1 seconds in length.
You attempted to write an audio CD with a
track that is less than four seconds in length.
Prepare tracks being written to audio CDs so
that they are at least four seconds long.

213

Section 9

Cause:

An error occurred while reading data from the


CD-R/RW disc.
This may be due to a low-quality or dated disc.
Try using a new CD-R/RW disc.

CD Write Error!

Cannot Punch In for CD-R/RW!

Solution2:

Memory card data cannot be loaded correctly.

Error Messages

Disc Not Ready!

Turn Off Pitch Correction!

Cause:

There is no CD-R/RW disc in the drive.

Cause:

Solution:

Place a CD-R/RW disc in the drive.

You cannot use the loop effects or phrase


trainer while Pitch Correction is on.

Solution:

Press [PITCH CORRECTION] to turn it off, and


try the operation once again.

Drive Busy!
Cause:

If this message appears after you have been


using the memory card with the BR-900CD, the
data on the card has become fragmented,
causing delays in reading and writing data.
Or, you could be using memory card with a
slow processing speed.

* In cases of unfavorable disc access conditions, such as when


track editing, punch-in/out recording, etc. is used to connect
phrases (musical data) of several seconds.

Memory Full!
Cause:

The total time of the drum sounds for one


drum kit that can be loaded with tone load has
exceeded 13 seconds.

Solution:

Make sure the drum sounds being loaded by


means of tone load do not exceed a total of 13
seconds (p. 135, p. 171, p. 181).

Cause:

No rhythm pattern memory remaining.

Solution 1: Reduce the number of tracks that are played


back simultaneously. Use track bouncing etc. to
combine tracks, or erase data from tracks which
you do not need to playback, and then try the
playback again.

Solution 1: Delete any unneeded rhythm patterns (p. 133).

Cause:

You have attempted to import an SMF that


exceeds the available memory for imported files.

Solution 2: Reduce the number of tracks that are being


recorded simultaneously.

Solution:

Delete any unneeded rhythm patterns (p. 133).

Solution 3: Reduce the Data Type (STD (LV1) or LONG


(LV2)), and then try creating the song again.

Solution 2: Delete any unneeded drum sounds in the


rhythm patterns (p. 129, p. 132).

MIDI Buffer Full!


Cause:

Cause:

There is a problem with the CD-R/RW disc,


preventing audio playback.

Excessive number of MIDI messages being


output.

Solution 1:

Solution:

If the disc is dirty, wipe the disc to clean it, then


try playing the disc again.

Either decrease the tempo of the Rhythm or reduce


the number of Note messages (p. 123, p. 126).

Solution 2: Set the RhyMIDI ch to OFF (p. 157).

Event Full!

No Card!

Cause:

The BR-900CD has used up all the events that


can be handled by one song.

Cause:

Solution:

Perform the Song Optimize operation (p. 78).

You have tried to operate the recorder, or


access the memory while the memory card
(CompactFlash) is not inserted, or is not
inserted properly.

Cause:

The memory card has been removed after


selection of data on that memory card.

Solution:

Turn off the BR-900CD, properly insert the


memory card, then turn the BR-900CD back on.

What is an event?
The smallest unit of memory used by the BR-900CD to store
recorded results on a memory card is the event. A newly
created song provides approximately 2,000 events per song.
For each track, one recording pass uses two events. Operations
such as punch-in/out or track copy also use up events.
The number of events that are used up will fluctuate in a
complex way.
Even if there is capacity remaining on the memory card, further
recording or track editing will not be possible if all of the events
are used up. In such cases, an error message such as Event
Full will appear.

No File!
Cause:

The file you are trying to import with WAV/


AIFF/SMF import or Tone Load was not found.

Solution:

Have the file you want to import ready.

No Song!
Cause:

There are no songs on the memory card.

Finalized Disc!

Solution:

Create a new song (p. 32).

Cause:

Data has already been written to the CD-R/RW


disc, and the data has been finalized.

Cause:

Incorrect data is in the song folder, or the


necessary data is not present.

Solution:

Place a CD-R/RW disc that has not been


finalized in the drive.

Solution:

Restore the data backed up on the computer to the


BR-900CD. In this case, restore each ROLAND
folder to the BR-900CD (p. 164, p. 175).

214

Error Messages

Not Available in Mastering Mode!

Stop P.Trainer!

Cause:

You cannot carry out this operation with


MASTERING selected as the recording mode.

Cause:

The operation you attempted cannot be done


while the Phrase Trainer (p. 192) is operating.

Solution:

First press the [REC MODE] button to switch


the recording mode to INPUT or BOUNCE,
then proceed with the operation.

Solution:

Press [PHRASE TRAINER] to turn off the


Phrase Trainer.

Not Blank Disc!


Cause:

The CD-R/RW disc already has data written to it.

Solution:

Place a CD-R/RW disc with no data written to it


(a blank disc) in the CD-R/RW drive.
If using a CD-RW disc, you can erase the data on
the disc in order to create a blank disc (p. 153).

Not CD-RW Disc!

Stop Recorder!
Cause:

The operation you attempted cannot be done


while the recorder is running (playing or
recording).

Solution:

Press [STOP] to stop playback or recording.

Too Many Songs!


Cause:

You are attempting to create more that 100 songs.

Solution:

Erase unneeded songs (p. 77).

Cause:

The disc is not a CD-R/RW disc, so the data


cannot be erased.

Unformatted!

Solution:

Use a CD-RW disc.

Cause:

The Memory card is not formatted by DOS.

Not Finalized Disc!

Solution 1: Turn off the BR-900CD, properly insert the


memory card, then turn the BR-900CD back on.

Cause:

The disc cannot be played back properly


because it has not been finalized.

Solution 2:

Solution:

Finalize the disc (p. 143).

Unsupported Card!

Power Down!
Cause:

Internal power source voltage is below than


guaranteed workable range.

Solution:

In case of using PSC adaptor:


Cable might be broken or adaptor itself might
be malfunctioning. Please contact Roland
Service or Roland authorized dealers.
In case of using batteries:
Please replace with new batteries (p. 23).

Protected!
Cause:

You are attempting to write data to a song that


has protection switched on.

Solution:

To write data to the song, switch Protect to OFF


(p. 79).

Set Bounce Target to Track!


Cause:

Solution:

You cannot use the Rhythm-related functions


(switching Arrangement/Pattern/Off, editing,
switching Rhythm pads, Tone Load) when a
CD is specified as the bounce destination.

Cause:

The memory card (CompactFlash) or


MicroDrive inserted is not compatible with the
BR-900CD.

Solution:

Use a memory card compatible with the BR900CD (32 MB to 1 GB CompactFlash with a
power-source voltage of 3.3 V).

Unsupported Format!
Cause 1:

Cause 2:

You have attempted to load an incompatible


WAV or AIFF file or SMF to the BR-900CD.

Solution 2:

Check the format of the WAV or AIFF file or SMF.

Use AC Adaptor!
You have attempted to use the CD-R/RW drive
while running on battery power.

Solution:

You cannot use the CD-R/RW drive while the


BR-900CD is powered by the batteries. If you
want to use the CD-R/RW drive, first save the
song, turn off the power to the BR-900CD,
connect the AC adaptor, then turn the power
back on.

Solution:

Set the Repeat A and B (p. 51).

Wrong Disc!
Cause:

A disc other than the required CD-R/RW disc


is placed in the drive.

Solution:

Place a CD-R/RW disc in the drive.

215

Section 9

Cause:

Set the Repeat!


Repeat A (Starting Point) and B (Ending Point)
is not set.

The BR-900CD cannot recognize or use the


format of the inserted memory card.

Solution 1: Insert a memory card initialized for use with the


BR-900CD (p. 196).

When using Rhythms, specify a track as the


bounce destination.

Cause:

Initialize the card (p. 196).

DIGITAL RECORDING STUDIO


Model BR-900CD

MIDI Implementation

1. TRANSMITTED DATA
*

Frame Count

This message is transmitted according to a SMF data regardless of the followings when
the data is played.

Channel Voice Message

Seconds Count

Note On
If the MIDI parameter RhyMIDI ch is set to 116, note numbers/velocities
corresponding to the Rhythm pattern will be transmitted on the MIDI channel that is
specified for the Rhythm.
Status
9nH

Second
mmH

n = MIDI Channel No.:


mm = Note No.:
ll = Velocity:

Third
llH
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
01H - 7FH (1 - 127)

Minutes Count

Hours Count

Note Off
If the MIDI parameter RhyMIDI ch is set to 116, note numbers corresponding to the
Rhythm pattern will be transmitted on the MIDI channel specified for the Rhythm.
Status
8nH

Second
mmH

n = MIDI Channel No.:


mm = Note No.:
ll = Velocity:

Third
llH
0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
40H (64)

Notes sounded by the Rhythm correspond to note numbers as follows.


Rhythm Tone
Cross Stick
Metronome (click)
Metronome (bell)
Kick
Snare
Tom 4
Closed hi-hat
Tom 3
Open hi-hat
Tom 2
Crash cymbal
Tom 1
Ride cymbal
Cowbell

Note Number
G 1 (31)
A 1 (33)
A#1 (34)
C 2 (36)
D 2 (38)
F 2 (41)
F#2 (42)
A 2 (45)
A#2 (46)
C 3 (48)
C#3 (49)
D 3 (50)
D#3 (51)
G#3 (56)

Status
F2H

216

Reserved (00)
Minutes (0-59)

xyyzzzzz
x
yy

Reserved (0)
Time Code type

Second
mmH

Third
nnH

Transmitted when Sync Gen is MCK in the SYNC parameter.

Timing Clock
Status
F8H

Active Sensing
Status
FEH

Status
FAH

Bit Field is assigned as follows.

xxyyyyyy
xx
yyyyyy

System Realtime Message

Start

dddd = 4 bit nibble data:

Reserved (00)
Seconds (0-59)

mm (LSB), nn (MSB) = Song Position Point: 00H 00H - 7FH 7FH

If the Sync parameter Sync Gen is set to MTC, quarter frame messages of the time code
type specified by MTC Type will be transmitted when the BR-900CD is running
(recording or playing). The transmitted time counts are summed to SMPTE (MTC) Offset
Time as the song top is 00:00:00:00.

0 = Frame count LS nibble


1 = Frame count MS nibble
2 = Seconds count LS nibble
3 = Seconds count MS nibble
4 = Minutes count LS nibble
5 = Minutes count MS nibble
6 = Hours count LS nibble
7 = Hours count MS nibble
0h - FH (0 - 15)

xxyyyyyy
xx
yyyyyy

The current position is transmitted by the Song Position Pointer Message when the BR900CD is stopped, or the locate operation has been performed, if the SYNC parameter Sync
Gen is set to MCK.

MIDI Time Code Quarter Frame Messages

nnn = Message type:

Reserved (000)
Frame No. (0-29)

Song Position Pointer

Second
mmH (= 0nnndddd)

xxxyyyyy
xxx
yyyyy

The time code types defined by the MIDI specification correspond to the BR-900CD Sync
parameter MTC Type as follows.
MTC Type setting
MIDI specification setting
0 = 24 Frames/Sec
24
1 = 25 Frames/Sec
25
2 = 30 Frames/Sec (Drop Frame)
29D
3 = 30 Frames/Sec (Non Drop Frame)
29N or 30
zzzzz Hours (023)

System Common Messages

Status
F1H

Date: Jan. 11, 2005


Version: 1.00

This is transmitted at intervals of approximately 200 msec.

Continue
Status
FBH

Stop
Status
FCH

MIDI Implementation
System Exclusive Message
Status
F0H

Data Bytes
iiH,ddH,..., eeH

Byte
F0H
iiH

Description
Status of Exclusive Message
ID Number
7EH Universal Non Realtime Message
7FH Universal Realtime Message
Data: 00H - 7FH (0-127)
:
Data
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)

ddH
:
eeH
F7H
*

2. MIDI Machine Control

Status
F7H

MIDI Machine Control Command Reference


STOP (MCS)

The BR-900CD can transmit and receive Universal System Exclusive messages.

Status
F0H

Data Bytes
7FH, Dev, 06H, 01H

Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
01H
F7H

Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
MMC Command Message
STOP (MCS)
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)

Universal System Exclusive Message

MIDI Machine Control Commands

DEFERRED PLAY (MCS)

Status
F0H

Data Bytes
7FH, Dev, 06H, aaH,..., bbH

Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
aaH
:
bbH
F7H

Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
MMC Command Message
Command
:
Command
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)

Status
F7H

see 2. MIDI Machine Control section

MIDI Time Code Commands


Full Message
Basic operation of quarter frame messages will be handled.
Status
F0H

Data Bytes
7FH,Dev,01H, 01H, hrH, mnH, scH, frH

Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
01H
01H
hrH

Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
sub-ID #1 (MIDI Time Code)
sub-ID #2 (MIDI Full Message)
Hours and Type 0 yy zzzzz
yy type
00 = 24 Frames/sec
01 = 25 Frames/sec
10 = 30 Frames/sec (Drop Format)
11 = 30 Frames/sec (Non Drop Format)
zzzzz hours (0023)
Minutes (0059)
Seconds (0059)
Frames (0029)
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)

mnH
mnH
frH
F7H
*

Status
F7H

When you change the song position, the device ID will be transmitted as 7FH.

If the transport switch [STOP] was pressed, the BR-900CD transmits this message.

Status
F0H

Data Bytes
7FH, Dev, 06H, 03H

Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
03H
F7H

Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
MMC Command Message
DEFERRED PLAY (MCS)
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)

Status
F7H

If the transport switch [PLAY] was pressed, the BR-900CD transmits this message.

RECORD STROBE
Status
F0H

Data Bytes
7FH, Dev, 06H, 06H

Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
06H
F7H

Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
MMC Command Message
RECORD STROBE
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)

Status
F7H

Transmitted when recording to the audio tracks begins.

RECORD EXIT
Status
F0H

Data Bytes
7FH, Dev, 06H, 07H

Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
07H
F7H

Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
MMC Command Message
RECORD EXIT
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)

Status
F7H

Transmitted when recording to the audio tracks ends.

MMC RESET
Status
F0H

Data Bytes
7FH, Dev, 06H, 0DH

Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
0DH
F7H

Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
MMC Command Message
MMC RESET
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)

Status
F7H

Section 9

------------------------------------------------------------------About Device ID
Exclusive messages are not assigned to any particular MIDI channel. Instead, they have
their own special control parameter called device ID. The Roland exclusive messages use
device IDs to specify various devices.
BR-900CD transmits 7FH as the device ID.
-------------------------------------------------------------------

Status
F7H

When powered on the BR-900CD transmits this message.

217

MIDI Implementation
LOCATE (MCP)
Format 2 - LOCATE [TARGET]
Status
F0H

Data Bytes
Status
7FH, Dev, 06H, 44H, 06H, 01H, hrH, mnH, scH, frH, ffH F7H

Byte
F0H
7FH
Dev
06H
44H
06H
01H

Description
Status of Exclusive Message
Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header
Device ID (7FH)
MMC Command Message
LOCATE(MCP)
Number of Bytes
TARGET sub command
hrH, mnH, scH, frH, ffH
Standard Time with Sub Frame
EOX (End of Exclusive Message)

F7H
*

This message is transmitted when the song position moves.

3. Supplementary material
Decimal/Hexadecimal table
(hexadecimal values are indicated by a following H)
MIDI uses 7-bit hexadecimal values to indicate data values and the address and size of
exclusive messages. The following table shows the correspondence between decimal and
hexadecimal numbers.
++++++++++++
| D
| H
|| D
| H
|| D
| H
|| D
| H
|
++++++++++++
|
0 | 00H ||
32 | 20H ||
64 | 40H ||
96 | 60H |
|
1 | 01H ||
33 | 21H ||
65 | 41H ||
97 | 61H |
|
2 | 02H ||
34 | 22H ||
66 | 42H ||
98 | 62H |
|
3 | 03H ||
35 | 23H ||
67 | 43H ||
99 | 63H |
|
4 | 04H ||
36 | 24H ||
68 | 44H || 100 | 64H |
|
5 | 05H ||
37 | 25H ||
69 | 45H || 101 | 65H |
|
6 | 06H ||
38 | 26H ||
70 | 46H || 102 | 66H |
|
7 | 07H ||
39 | 27H ||
71 | 47H || 103 | 67H |
|
8 | 08H ||
40 | 28H ||
72 | 48H || 104 | 68H |
|
9 | 09H ||
41 | 29H ||
73 | 49H || 105 | 69H |
|
10 | 0AH ||
42 | 2AH ||
74 | 4AH || 106 | 6AH |
|
11 | 0BH ||
43 | 2BH ||
75 | 4BH || 107 | 6BH |
|
12 | 0CH ||
44 | 2CH ||
76 | 4CH || 108 | 6CH |
|
13 | 0DH ||
45 | 2DH ||
77 | 4DH || 109 | 6DH |
|
14 | 0EH ||
46 | 2EH ||
78 | 4EH || 110 | 6EH |
|
15 | 0FH ||
47 | 2FH ||
79 | 4FH || 111 | 6FH |
|
16 | 10H ||
48 | 30H ||
80 | 50H || 112 | 70H |
|
17 | 11H ||
49 | 31H ||
81 | 51H || 113 | 71H |
|
18 | 12H ||
50 | 32H ||
82 | 52H || 114 | 72H |
|
19 | 13H ||
51 | 33H ||
83 | 53H || 115 | 73H |
|
20 | 14H ||
52 | 34H ||
84 | 54H || 116 | 74H |
|
21 | 15H ||
53 | 35H ||
85 | 55H || 117 | 75H |
|
22 | 16H ||
54 | 36H ||
86 | 56H || 118 | 76H |
|
23 | 17H ||
55 | 37H ||
87 | 57H || 119 | 77H |
|
24 | 18H ||
56 | 38H ||
88 | 58H || 120 | 78H |
|
25 | 19H ||
57 | 39H ||
89 | 59H || 121 | 79H |
|
26 | 1AH ||
58 | 3AH ||
90 | 5AH || 122 | 7AH |
|
27 | 1BH ||
59 | 3BH ||
91 | 5BH || 123 | 7BH |
|
28 | 1CH ||
60 | 3CH ||
92 | 5CH || 124 | 7CH |
|
29 | 1DH ||
61 | 3DH ||
93 | 5DH || 125 | 7DH |
|
30 | 1EH ||
62 | 3EH ||
94 | 5EH || 126 | 7EH |
|
31 | 1FH ||
63 | 3FH ||
95 | 5FH || 127 | 7FH |
++++++++++++
D: decimal
H: hexadecimal
*

Decimal expressions such as used for MIDI channel, Bank Select, and Program Change
will be the value 1 greater than the decimal value given in the above table.

Since each MIDI byte carries 7 significant data bits, each byte can express a maximum of
128 different values. Data for which higher resolution is required must be transmitted
using two or more bytes. For example a value indicated as a two-byte value of aa bbH
would have a value of aa x 128 + bb.
For a signed number (+/-), 00H = -64, 40H = +/-0, and 7FH = +63. I.e., the decimal
equivalent will be 64 less than the decimal value given in the above table. For a two-byte
signed number, 00 00H = -8192, 40 00H = +/-0, and 7F 7FH = +8191. For example the
decimal expression of aa bbH would be aa bbH - 40 00H = (aa x 128 + bb - 64 x 128.
Hexadecimal notation in two 4-bit units is used for data indicated as 'nibbled'. The
nibbled two-byte value of 0a 0b H would be a x 16 + b.

218

<Example 1>
What is the decimal equivalent of 5AH?
From the above table, 5AH = 90.
<Example 2>
What is the decimal equivalent of the 7-bit hexadecimal values 12 34H?
From the above table, 12H = 18 and 34H = 52
Thus, 18 x 128 + 52 = 2356
<Example 3>
What is the decimal equivalent of the nibbled expression 0A 03 09 0DH?
From the above table, 0AH = 10, 03H = 3, 09H = 9, 0DH = 13
Thus, the result is ((10 x 16 + 3) x 16 + 9) x 16 + 13 = 41885
<Example 4>
What is the nibbled equivalent of the decimal number 1258?
16 ) 1258
16 ) 78
16 ) 4
0

...10
...14
... 4

From the above table, 0=00H, 4=04H, 14=0EH, 10=0AH


Thus the result is 00 04 0E 0AH

MIDI Machine Control (MMC) Command,


Information Field / Response Reference
Commands Transmitted
Command
01H STOP
03H DEFERRED PLAY
06H RECORD STROBE
07H RECORD EXIT
0DH MMC RESET
44H 01H LOCATE TARGET

Action
STOP
PLAY
REC / PUNCH IN
PUNCH OUT
RESET
LOCATE

MIDI Implementation Chart

Date : Jan. 11, 2005

DIGITAL RECORDING STUDIO


Model BR-900CD

MIDI Implementation Chart


Transmitted

Function...

Basic
Channel

Default
Changed

116
116

Mode

Default
Messages
Altered

Mode 3
X
**************

Note
Number :

31, 33, 34, 36, 38, 41, 42,


45, 46, 4851, 56

True Voice

Recognized
*1
*1

Remarks

X
**************
X
X
X

*1

**************

Velocity

Note ON
Note OFF

O 9n V=1127
O 8n V=64
V=1127

*1
*1
*4

X
X

After
Touch

Key's
Ch's

O
O

*4
*4

X
X

*4

*4

O
**************

*4

X
**************

Pitch Bend

Version : 1.00

M
I
D
I
I
m
p
l
e
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
C
h
a
r
t

Control
Change

Prog
Change

: True #

System Exclusive

System
Common

: Quarter Frame
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune

O
O
X
X

*2
*3

X
X
X
X

System
Real Time

: Clock
: Command

O
O

*3
*3

X
X

Aux
Message

: All sound off


: Reset all controllers
: Local ON/OFF
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sense
: System Reset

X
X
X
X
O
X

Rhythm only.
SYNC parameter: Sync Gen = MTC only.
SYNC parameter: Sync Gen = MCK only.
Transmitted according to SMF data when the data is played back.

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

O : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

X : No

Section 9

Notes

*1
*2
*3
*4

X
X
X
X
X
X

219

Specifications
BR-900CD: Digital Recording Studio
Tracks

Nominal Input Level (Variable)

Track: 8
V-Track: 64 (8 V-Tracks per each Track)

GUITAR/BASS jack:

-20 dBu

MIC (TRS balanced/XLR) jack: -40 dBu

* Up to 2 tracks can be recorded simultaneously, and up to 8


tracks can be played back simultaneously.

LINE IN jack:

-10 dBu

Input Impedance

Useful Capacity

GUITAR/BASS jack:

1M

CompactFlash: 32 M1 G bytes

MIC 1/2 jack:

1.5 k (HOT-COLD)

Data Type

(TRS balanced/XLR)

1.0 k (HOT-GND, COLD-GND)

HiFi (MT2)

LINE IN jack:

10 k

STANDARD (LV1)

Nominal Output Level

LONG (LV2)

LINE OUT jack:

Signal Processing
AD Conversion:

24 bit, Modulation + AF-AD (Guitar/Bass)


24 bit, Modulation + AF-AD (Mic 1/2)
24 bit, Modulation (Line)
24 bit, Modulation (Simul)

DA Conversion:

24 bit, Modulation

Internal Processing: 24 bit (digital mixer section)


* AF method (Adaptive Focus method)
Adaptive Focus is a unique Roland/BOSS technology that
allows the signal noise (S/N) ratios of AD and DA converters
to be vastly improved.

Output Impedance
LINE OUT jack:

2k

Headphone jack:

140

Recommended Load Impedance


LINE OUT jack:

20 k or greater

Headphone jack:

32100

Residual Noise Level


LINE OUT jack:

(INPUT SELECT: GUITAR/BASS/MIC2, input terminated with


1 k , INPUT SENS: CENTER, IHF-A, typ., EFFECT: OFF)

44.1 kHz

Interface

Frequency Response

USB Connector
DIGITAL OUT: S/PDIF 1624 bit (Optical type)

20 Hz to 20 kHz (+1/-3 dBu)

Recording Time (conversion in one track)

32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
1 GB

HiFi (MT2)
16 min.
32 min.
65 min.
130 min.
260 min.
520 min.

-85 dBu or less

* 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms

Sample Rate

Capacity

-10 dBu

Data type
STD (LV1)
19 min.
39 min.
78 min.
156 min.
312 min.
624 min.

LONG (LV2)
24 min.
49 min.
98 min.
196 min.
392 min.
784 min.

Display
16 Characters x 2 Lines + Approx. 100 icons (Backlit LCD)

Connectors
GUITAR/BASS jack (1/4 inch phone type)
MIC 1 jacks (XLR balanced type, TRS balanced 1/4 inch
phone type)
MIC 2 jacks (XLR balanced type)
LINE IN jack (RCA Phono type)
LINE OUT jack (RCA Phono type)

* The above-listed recording times are approximate. Times may


be slightly shorter depending on the number of songs that were
created.

DIGITAL OUT connector (Optical type)

* The above number is the total for all the tracks that are used. If
each of the eight tracks contain an equal amount of data, the
length of the resulting song will be approximately 1/8 of the
above.

MIDI OUT connector

220

FOOT SW/EXP PEDAL jack (1/4 inch phone type)


PHONES jack (Stereo 1/4 inch phone type)
USB connector

Specifications

Power Supply
DC 9 V; Supply AC Adaptor (PSC series), Dry battery x 6

Current Draw
900 mA (Average using AC adapter and CD-R/RW)
300 mA (When powered by batteries; CD-R/RW drive not used)
* Expected battery life under continuous use:
Alkaline:

4 hours

These figures will vary depending on the actual conditions of use.

Dimensions
351 (W) x 225 (D) x 69 (H) mm
13-7/8 (W) x 8-7/8 (D) x 2-3/4 (H) inches

Weight
2.2 kg/4 lbs 14 oz (excluding batteries)

Accessories
AC Adaptor (PSC-series)
Demo Card (Already inserted when the BR-900CD is shipped)
Owners Manual
Separate sheet (About Memory Cards etc.)
Roland Service (information sheet)

Options
Foot Switch:

FS-5U

Pedal Switch:

DP-2 (Roland)

Expression Pedal: EV-5 (Roland), FV-300L

In the interest of product improvement, the specifications


and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without
prior notice.

Section 9
221

Index
Symbols

BANK
GUITAR ................................................................................ 88

+ ...................................................................................... 69, 72, 75

LINE ..................................................................................... 91
MIC ....................................................................................... 90

Numerics

SIMUL .................................................................................. 92

24 ...................................................................................... 159, 199

Bank ...................................................................................... 35, 84

25 ...................................................................................... 159, 199

Bass ............................................................................................. 99

29D .................................................................................... 158, 199

Bass Cut Filter ........................................................................... 106

29N ................................................................................... 158, 199

BASS MULTI ............................................................................... 89

30 ...................................................................................... 158, 199

BASS SIM .................................................................................... 89


Bass Simulator ............................................................................. 93

Battery ................................................................................. 23, 197

AB Qtz ................................................................................ 52, 198

Battery Cover .............................................................................. 23

AC ............................................................................................... 99

Battery Low! ................................................................................ 23

AC Adaptor .......................................................................... 22, 26

BG LEAD .................................................................................... 98

Access indicator .......................................................................... 21

Bit ................................................................................................ 97

ACOUSTIC GTR ......................................................................... 89

BLUES ......................................................................................... 98

Acoustic Guitar Simulator ........................................................... 93

Body ............................................................................................ 93

Acoustic Processor ...................................................................... 93

BOSS-Cmp .................................................................................. 94

ACOUSTIC SIM .......................................................................... 88

BOUNCE ......................................................................... 40, 45, 58

AIFF .................................................................................. 165, 176

Bounce ........................................................................................ 58

Algorithm ..................................................................... 35, 88, 105

Bouncing ..................................................................................... 45

ALL ....................................................... 72, 75, 137, 146147, 194

Input source .......................................................................... 60

All Backup ................................................................................ 146

To a CD-R/RW Disc ............................................................. 59

All Recover ............................................................................... 147

BPF .............................................................................................. 97

AMG ........................................................................................... 99

BR0 Folder ................................................................................ 162

ARRANGE .................................................................................. 37

BR-532 ......................................................................... 61, 173, 183

[ARRANGE/PATTERN/OFF] ............ 37, 121, 123, 126, 130, 134

BR-864 ......................................................................... 61, 173, 183

Arrangement ............................................................... 37, 120121

Bright .......................................................................................... 99

Arrangement Mode ............................................................. 37, 120


Arrangement Name .................................................................. 124

Attack ........................................................................... 9495, 107

C.Adjust .................................................................................... 193

Attack Time ................................................................................ 94

Calib .......................................................................................... 189

AUDIO ...................................................................................... 140

Calibrate .................................................................................... 189

Audio CD menu screen ............................................................. 140

CARD ....................................................................... 172, 182, 196

Audio CD player screen ............................................................ 142

Card Cover .................................................................................. 16

Audio CD Write screen ............................................................. 141

Card Protector ............................................................................. 16

Audio Sub Mix .......................................................................... 190

CD menu screen ........................................................................ 140

AUTO PUNCH [IN] .................................................................... 54

[CD-R/RW] ....................................................................... 140, 145

AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] ......................................................... 55

CD-R/RW disc .............................................................................. 6

AUTO PUNCH [OUT] ................................................................ 54

Compatibility .......................................................................... 6

Auto Punching In/Out ............................................................... 54

Inserting ................................................................................. 7
Precautions ............................................................................. 6

B
BACKUP ........................................................... 145146, 164, 175
Backup ...................................................................... 145, 164, 175

Removing ............................................................................... 7
CD-R/RW Drive ........................................................... 6, 140, 145
CD-R/RW Write ....................................................................... 154
CD-RW Erase ............................................................................ 153
Center Cancel ............................................................................ 192
CentrCncel ................................................................................ 192
Charct ......................................................................................... 93

222

Index

CHO/DLY ............................................................ 4344, 108109

De-esser ...................................................................................... 95

CHORUS ..................................................................... 44, 108, 111

Defretter ...................................................................................... 95

Chorus ................................................................................ 94, 108

DELAY ........................................................................ 44, 108, 111

Chromatic Tuner ....................................................................... 188

Delay ................................................................................... 95, 108

CLEAN ....................................................................................... 98

[DELETE/MUTE] ....................................................... 41, 129, 132

Click .......................................................................................... 129

Deleting

CompactFlash ............................................................. 5, 16, 27, 31

Drum sounds .............................................................. 129, 132

Compatible OS .......................................................................... 162

Locator .................................................................................. 64

Compressor ......................................................................... 94, 107

Demo Song .................................................................................. 29

Condenser mic .............................................................................. 7

Depth .................................................................... 9497, 100, 111

Condenser microphone ............................................................. 191

DETUNE ..................................................................................... 98

Connecting .................................................................... 26, 33, 163

DIGITAL ..................................................................................... 96

Converting ........................................................................ 165, 176

Digital Copy ................................................................................ 80

COPY ........................................................................ 125, 133, 137

Digital Copy Protect .................................................................... 80

Copy Prtct ................................................................................... 81

DIGITAL OUT connector ............................................................ 22

Copying

Dir Level ....................................................................... 97, 99100

Arrangement ...................................................................... 125

Direct CD Bounce ........................................................................ 59

Drum Kit ............................................................................ 137

Disc tray ...................................................................................... 21

Pattern ................................................................................ 133

Display ........................................................................................ 21

Song ...................................................................................... 77

Display Contrast ....................................................................... 186

Track ............................................................................... 6769

Dither ........................................................................................ 107

Waveform data ................................................................... 148

Dly Time ................................................................................... 106

Copyright .................................................................................. 154

Dly Tme .............................................................................. 95, 111

Cord Hook .................................................................................. 22

Doubling ............................................................... 44, 95, 108, 111

Correction Event Map ............................................................... 116

DOWN ...................................................................................... 101

Correction Event Map screen .................................................... 116

Driver ........................................................................................ 162

COSM ......................................................................................... 15

Drum Kit ................................................................................... 134

COSM BASS AMP ....................................................................... 90

Drum sounds ............................................................................ 149

COSM COMP BSS ....................................................................... 90

Dynamic microphone ................................................................ 191

COSM COMP GTR ..................................................................... 89


COSM COMP VCL ..................................................................... 91
COSM Comp/Limiter ................................................................. 94
COSM GTR AMP ........................................................................ 88
CPY ................................................................................. 6768, 77
Creating

E
E ................................................................................................ 120
E.Level .......................................................................... 9495, 111
[EDIT] ............................................................... 123, 126, 130, 134

Arrangement ...................................................................... 123

EDIT ............................................................................ 85, 103, 115

Audio CD ........................................................................... 140

Edit Effect screen ......................................................................... 85

Drum Kit ............................................................................ 135

Editing

Pattern ........................................................................ 126, 130

Insert effects .......................................................................... 85

CRUNCH .................................................................................... 98

Mastering Tool Kit .............................................................. 103

Cutoff F ....................................................................................... 97

D
DATA ............................................................................... 145, 148
Data CD menu screen ............................................................... 145
DBLN .......................................................................... 44, 108, 111
DC IN jack .................................................................................. 22
D-Comp ...................................................................................... 94
D:E ........................................................................................ 96, 98

EDT ............................................................................................. 78
Effect Patch ............................................................. 35, 8485, 202
Effect screen ................................................................................ 85
[EFFECTS] ....................................................................... 35, 85, 87
Effects ......................................................................................... 35
EJECT button .......................................................................... 7, 21
Emergency eject hole ............................................................... 7, 21
Ending ...................................................................................... 120
ENHANCE ................................................................................. 93
Enhancer ............................................................................. 95, 106

223

Section 9

Data type ..................................................................................... 32

Track ..................................................................................... 67

Index

EQ ....................................................................................... 43, 110

Equalizer ....................................................................... 43, 96, 105

Gain .............................................................................. 97, 99, 106

ERASE ....................................................... 124125, 133, 138, 153

GAP .......................................................................................... 140

Erasing

Ground terminal ......................................................................... 23

Arrangement ...................................................................... 125


Data from a CD-RW ............................................................ 153
Drum sounds ...................................................................... 138
Pattern ................................................................................ 133
Song ...................................................................................... 77

GTR ............................................................................... 36, 85, 202


GUITAR/BASS ........................................................................... 33
GUITAR/BASS jack .................................................................... 22
[GUITAR/BASS/MIC2] ............................................ 34, 39, 48, 84

Step ..................................................................................... 124


Track ............................................................................... 7475

ERS ....................................................................................... 73, 77

HALL .......................................................................... 44, 108, 111

Exchanging

Headphones jack ......................................................................... 20

Track ..................................................................................... 76

HI ...................................................................................... 127, 130

Expander ................................................................................... 106

Hi Attack ........................................................................... 106107

EXPORT .................................................................... 150, 165, 176

Hi F ........................................................................................... 112

Expression Pedal ................................................................. 27, 187

Hi G .......................................................................................... 112

EXTERNAL ................................................................................. 34

Hi Gain ....................................................................................... 96

External MIDI Device ................................................................ 190

Hi Level .................................................................................... 107


Hi Ratio ............................................................................. 106107

Hi Release ......................................................................... 106107

F ................................................................................................ 120

Hi Thres ............................................................................ 106107

Feedback ............................................................................. 95, 111

HI.FEML ................................................................................... 115

[FF] ........................................................................................ 29, 66

HI.MALE .................................................................................. 115

Fill ............................................................................................. 120

HiFi (MT2) ............................................................................ 32, 62

Filter ............................................................................................ 96

High Freq .................................................................................. 105

FINAL ....................................................................................... 144

High Gain ................................................................................. 105

Finalize ............................................................................. 141, 143

High Mid Freq .......................................................................... 105

Flanger ........................................................................................ 96

High Mid Gain .......................................................................... 105

Foot SW ....................................................................... 54, 187, 198

High Mid Q ............................................................................... 105

FOOT SW/EXP PEDAL ............................................................ 187

High Q ...................................................................................... 105

FOOT SW/EXP PEDAL jack ....................................................... 22

High Type ................................................................................. 105

Foot Switch ................................................................... 27, 54, 187

Hi-M F ......................................................................................... 96

Foot Volume ............................................................................... 96

Hi-M Gin ..................................................................................... 96

Formant1 ................................................................................... 100

Hi-M Q ........................................................................................ 96

Formant2 ................................................................................... 100

HPF ............................................................................................. 97

Formatting

HUMBUCK ................................................................................. 93

Memory card ........................................................................ 31


FRAME ....................................................................................... 21
Freq ..................................................................................... 95, 106

I
Idling screen ...................................................................... 164, 175

Frequency ........................................................................... 99, 101

IMP ........................................................................................... 154

FROM ....................................................................................... 199

IMPORT ............................................................ 148, 153, 167, 178

From/To ................................................................................... 199

Importing

FS-6 ........................................................................................... 187

SMF ............................................................................ 169, 179

FX .............................................................................................. 187

IN .................................................................................. 35, 49, 120

Fx Level ................................................................................. 97, 99

In Send ...................................................................................... 109

FX Type ....................................................................... 43, 108, 111

INF ................................................................................ 62, 94, 106

FX1 Level .................................................................................. 100

INI ............................................................................... 31, 194196

FX2 Level .................................................................................. 100

224

Index

Initializing ................................................................................. 194

Loading

All ....................................................................................... 194

Drum pattern ...................................................................... 152

Effect setting ....................................................................... 195

Drum sounds .............................................................. 171, 181

Memory card ................................................................ 31, 196

Drum tones from the tracks ................................................ 135

Rhythm ............................................................................... 195

Song from CD-R/RW disc .................................................. 154

System setting ..................................................................... 194

Songs to memory card ........................................................ 147

INPUT .............................................................................. 40, 50, 87

WAV/AIFF file ........................................................... 167, 178

Input ................................................................................... 94, 106

LOCAT ............................................................................... 87, 114

Input Gain ................................................................................. 105

[LOCATOR] ................................................................................ 64

INPUT LEVEL knob .................................................................... 35

Locator ........................................................................................ 64

INPUT SELECT ..................................................................... 39, 48

Locator Point ............................................................................... 64

INPUT SELECT button ............................................................... 34

LO-FI BOX .................................................................................. 91

Input sensitivity .......................................................................... 35

Lo-Fi Box ..................................................................................... 96

INSERT ..................................................................................... 124

Lo-M F ........................................................................................ 96

Insert Effect ............................................................... 3536, 84, 88

Lo-M Gin ..................................................................................... 96

Inserting

Lo-M Q ........................................................................................ 96

Step ..................................................................................... 124

LONG (LV2) ......................................................................... 32, 62

Internal microphone .................................................................... 34

Loop Effect .................................................................. 43, 108, 111

Intro .......................................................................................... 120

[LOOP EFFECTS] ................................................................ 43, 108

ISO9660 ..................................................................................... 151

Loop Recording ........................................................................... 56


Low Boost ................................................................................. 193

Low Freq ................................................................................... 105

JC-120 .......................................................................................... 98

Low Gain ............................................................................ 96, 105

JUMBO ........................................................................................ 93

Low Mid Freq ........................................................................... 105


Low Mid Gain ........................................................................... 105

K
KIT ............................................................................................ 134

Low Mid Q ................................................................................ 105


Low Q ....................................................................................... 105
Low Type .................................................................................. 105
LPF .............................................................................................. 97
LR ............................................................................................... 35

LCD Contrast .................................................................... 186, 198


Level ............................................................... 9396, 99, 101, 107
Level Meter ........................................................................... 21, 35
Limiter ...................................................................................... 107
LIN ...................................................................................... 36, 203
[LINE] ............................................................................. 34, 39, 84
LINE ..................................................................................... 33, 48
LINE IN jacks .............................................................................. 22
LINE OUT jacks .......................................................................... 22
Lo Attack .......................................................................... 106107
Lo F ........................................................................................... 112
Lo G .......................................................................................... 112
Lo Level .................................................................................... 107
Lo Mix Lvl ................................................................................... 95
Lo Ratio ............................................................................. 106107
Lo Thres ............................................................................ 106107
LO.FEML .................................................................................. 115
LO.MALE .................................................................................. 115
LOAD ....................................................................................... 136

Mac OS 9.1.x .............................................................................. 162


Mac OS 9.2.x .............................................................................. 162
Mac OS X .................................................................................. 162
Macintosh ......................................................................... 162, 175
MANUAL ................................................................................... 98
Manual .................................................................................. 9697
Manually Punching In/Out ........................................................ 53
MASTER ..................................................................................... 87
Master ................................................................................. 99, 158
MASTER fader ...................................................................... 28, 35
Master Tape/Disc ....................................................................... 80
MASTERING ...................................................................... 40, 102
Mastering .................................................................................. 102
Mastering screen ....................................................................... 102
Mastering Tool Kit ...................................................... 40, 102105
Mastering Tool Kit Patch ........................................................... 205
MATCH ...................................................................................... 98
Matrix ............................................................................... 127, 131

225

Section 9

Lo Release ......................................................................... 106107

Index

MCK ......................................................................................... 158

Moving ........................................................................................ 30

MEAS .......................................................................................... 21

To Locator ............................................................................. 64

Measure ............................................................................ 127, 130

Track ............................................................................... 7072

MEMORY CARD ........................................................................ 20

MS ............................................................................................... 98

Memory Card............................................................... 5, 16, 27, 31

MTC .................................................................................. 158159

Composition of data ........................................................... 162

MTC Type ......................................................................... 158, 199

Remaining memory .............................................................. 62

MTK .......................................................................................... 205

Saving memory ..................................................................... 78

Mute ............................................................................................ 41

METAL ....................................................................................... 98
METAL D .................................................................................... 98
Metronome ............................................................................... 129
[MIC] .................................................................................... 34, 39
MIC ................................................................... 20, 36, 48, 85, 203

N
NAM ........................................................................................... 78
NAME ......................................................... 86, 104, 115, 124, 132
Naming

Mic ........................................................................................ 7, 198

Arrangement ...................................................................... 124

Mic Dist ....................................................................................... 93

Pattern ................................................................................ 132

Mic Level .................................................................................. 100

Song ...................................................................................... 78

Mic Select screen ......................................................................... 34

NEW ........................................................................................... 33

Mic Set ...................................................................................... 100

Noise ........................................................................................... 96

MIC1 ........................................................................................... 33

Noise Suppressor ........................................................................ 97

MIC1 jacks .................................................................................. 22

Note .......................................................................................... 116

MIC2 ........................................................................................... 33
MIC2 jack .................................................................................... 22
Microphone pre-amp ................................................................ 191
Mid Attack ........................................................................ 106107
Mid Level .................................................................................. 107
Mid Ratio .......................................................................... 106107
Mid Release ....................................................................... 106107
Mid Thres .......................................................................... 106107
Middle ........................................................................................ 99
MIDI ................................................................................. 156157
MIDI channel ............................................................................ 156
MIDI connector ......................................................................... 156
MIDI Implementation Chart ..................................................... 156
MIDI IN .................................................................................... 156
MIDI OUT ................................................................................. 156
MIDI OUT connector .................................................................. 22
MIDI Sequencer ........................................................................ 158
MIDI Sound Module ................................................................. 157
MIDI THRU .............................................................................. 156
Mix Level .................................................................................... 95
Mix Lvl ...................................................................................... 106
Mixer ......................................................................................... 107
MMC ......................................................................................... 160
MMC Master ..................................................................... 160, 198
Mode ......................................................................................... 100
Modify Fil ................................................................................... 97
Mono recording .............................................................. 39, 48, 59
MOV ..................................................................................... 7172

226

O
Oct Level ..................................................................................... 97
Octave ......................................................................................... 97
OFF ............................................................................................. 37
Offset ................................................................................ 159, 199
On/Off ........................................................ 93101, 105107, 112
ONBRD+EXT .............................................................................. 34
OPT ............................................................................................. 78
OS ............................................................................................. 162
Output ...................................................................................... 107
Output Gain .............................................................................. 105
Overdubbing ............................................................................... 41

P
P.MAP ....................................................................................... 116
PAN .............................................................................. 42, 49, 138
Pan ........................................................................................ 42, 49
Drum sounds ...................................................................... 138
[PAN/EQ] ............................................................... 4243, 49, 110
PAN-SQR .................................................................................. 100
PAN-TRI ................................................................................... 100
Patch ........................................................................................... 35
Patch Name ................................................................. 86, 104, 115
PATTERN ................................................................................... 37
Pattern ................................................ 37, 120, 122, 126, 169, 179
Pattern Mode ...................................................................... 37, 120
Pattern Name ............................................................................ 132

Index

Pattern Number ........................................................................ 123

PUNCH ............................................................................... 54, 187

PCR ........................................................................................... 205

Punch-in/out .............................................................................. 53

PEAK ........................................................................................ 105

Punching In ................................................................................. 53

Peak .......................................................................................... 101

Punching Out .............................................................................. 53

PEAK indicator ........................................................................... 35

PVW .......................................................... 136, 148149, 172, 182

PEDAL ................................................................................ 98, 101


Phantom power .................................................................... 7, 191

Phantom SW ..................................................................... 191, 198

Quantize ..................................................................... 52, 127, 130

Phaser ......................................................................................... 97
[PHRASE TRAINER] ................................................................ 192
Phrase Trainer ........................................................................... 192
PickUp ........................................................................................ 93
PIEZO ......................................................................................... 93
Pitch ............................................................................................ 98
[PITCH CORRECTION] ............................................................ 114
Pitch Correction ................................................................ 113114
Pitch Correction Edit ................................................................. 115
Pitch Correction Patch ............................................................... 205
Pitch Shifter ................................................................................. 98
[PLAY] ........................................................................ 29, 143, 152
PLAY ........................................................................................ 187
Play Screen .................................................................................. 28
PLAY/IMP ........................................................................ 142, 154
Playback
Audio CD ........................................................................... 142
Demo song ............................................................................ 29

R
Rack160 ....................................................................................... 94
RADIO ........................................................................................ 96
Rate ................................................................. 94, 9697, 100, 111
Ratio ............................................................................................ 94
REAL ........................................................................................ 126
Realtime Recording ................................................................... 126
[REC] .................................................................................... 50, 53
[REC MODE] .................................................................. 40, 45, 50
REC MODE ............................................................. 21, 39, 58, 102
REC TRACK .................................................................... 39, 41, 48
REC TRACK buttons ................................................. 127, 131, 134
Recording ........................................................................ 32, 48, 80
Rhythm ............................................................................... 121
Track ..................................................................................... 39
Recording Standby screen ................................................. 123, 126

Repeat ................................................................................... 51

Recording Time ........................................................................... 32

PLAYER ...................................................................................... 96

RECOVER ................................................................................. 147

Playing

Recover ..................................................................... 147, 164, 175


Recover menu screen ................................................................ 147

Polarity ..................................................................................... 101

Redo ............................................................................................ 57

Post Fltr ....................................................................................... 97

Reference Pitch .................................................................. 188189

Power .......................................................................................... 28

Rehearse .................................................................................... 128

Power Save ............................................................................... 197

Release ................................................................................ 97, 107

POWER switch ...................................................................... 22, 28

Release Time ............................................................................... 94

PowerSave ........................................................................ 197198

REMAIN ................................................................................... 142

Pre Dly ................................................................................ 94, 111

Remain Inf .......................................................................... 62, 198

Pre Filter ..................................................................................... 97

Remaining available recording time ............................................ 62

Preamp ........................................................................................ 98

Remaining time for recording on Audio CDs ............................ 142

Pre-gap ...................................................................................... 140

[REPEAT] .................................................................................... 51

Presence ...................................................................................... 99

Repeat ................................................................................... 5152

Preset Arrangement .................................................... 38, 120, 206

Resonance ............................................................................. 9697

Preset Drum Kit ........................................................................ 134

REV ....................................................................... 4344, 108109

Preset Patch ................................................................... 36, 84, 113

Rev Send ................................................................................... 111

Preset Pattern .............................................................. 38, 120, 207

Rev Time ................................................................................... 111

Preview ............................................... 65, 136, 148149, 172, 182

REVERB .................................................................................... 111

Preview SW ............................................................................... 199

Reverb ....................................................................................... 108

Protecting

[REW] ................................................................................... 29, 66

Song ...................................................................................... 79

RHR .......................................................................................... 128

PRT ............................................................................................. 79

RHY .......................................................................................... 195

227

Section 9

SMF .................................................................................... 151

Index

Rhy Send ................................................................................... 109

Song Backup ............................................................................. 145

RhyMIDI ch ...................................................................... 157, 199

Song Copy ................................................................................... 77

RHYTHM .............................................................................. 35, 87

Song Drum Kit .......................................................................... 134

Rhythm ....................................................................... 37, 120, 157

Song Erase ................................................................................... 77

RHYTHM fader ........................................................... 37, 121122

Song Information ........................................................................ 62

Rhythm Mode ........................................................................... 121

Song Name .................................................................................. 78

[RHYTHM PAD] ....................................................... 127, 131, 134

Song New .................................................................................... 32

Ring Modulator ........................................................................... 99

Song Optimize ...................................................................... 57, 78

RiseTme ...................................................................................... 99

Song Patch .................................................................... 36, 84, 113

ROLAND Folder ....................................................................... 162

Song Pattern ........................................................................ 38, 120

ROOM ......................................................................... 44, 108, 111

Song Protect ................................................................................ 79


Song Recover ............................................................................ 147

Song Select .................................................................................. 29

S EFX ......................................................................................... 195

Song Select screen ....................................................................... 29

Saving ................................................................................... 29, 79

Speaker Simulator ..................................................................... 100

Insert Effects ......................................................................... 86

SplitH ........................................................................................ 106

Mastering Tool Kit .............................................................. 104

SplitL ......................................................................................... 106

Pitch Correction .................................................................. 115

Starting Measure ....................................................................... 123

To CD-R/RW disc .............................................................. 145

STD ............................................................................................. 93

Track data in WAV/AIFF format ............................... 165, 176

STD (LV1) ............................................................................. 32, 62

SCMS ........................................................................................ 154

STEP .................................................................................. 123, 130

SCR ........................................................................................... 199

Step ........................................................................................... 123

Scrub ........................................................................................... 65

Step Recording .................................................................. 126, 130

SCRUB FROM ............................................................................. 65

STEREO MULTI .......................................................................... 91

Scrub Parameter ........................................................................ 199

Stereo recording .................................................................... 39, 48

Scrub Point .................................................................................. 65

Sub Mixer .......................................................................... 190, 198

SCRUB TO .................................................................................. 65

Sustain ........................................................................................ 94

SEL .............................................................................................. 29

SYNC ........................................................................ 157160, 198

Send Level ........................................................................... 44, 109

Sync Gen ................................................................... 158, 160, 198

Sens ............................................................................. 95, 101, 106

Sync Parameter ......................................................................... 198

SENS knob .................................................................................. 35

Synchronizing ........................................................................... 157

Separation ....................................................................... 9596, 98

SYS .................................................................................... 194, 198

SHELVG ................................................................................... 105

System Parameter ..................................................................... 198

Sibilant ........................................................................................ 95
[SIMUL] .......................................................................... 34, 39, 48
SIMUL ........................................................................................ 85
SINGLE ................................................................................. 93, 95
SLDN .......................................................................................... 98
Slow Attack ................................................................................. 99
SMF ........................................................... 151153, 169170, 179
SMF Folder ................................................................................ 162
SMF import ............................................................................... 152
SMF player ................................................................................ 151
SML .................................................................................... 36, 204
Smooth ...................................................................................... 115
Smpl Rate .................................................................................... 97
Smth .......................................................................................... 117
Soft Clip .................................................................................... 107
SONG ................................................................................ 145, 147
Song Arrangement ...................................................... 38, 120, 123

228

T
[TAP] .................................................................................. 38, 122
TAP ............................................................................................. 95
TEMPO ....................................................................................... 21
Tempo ......................................................... 38, 122123, 127, 130
Thres ......................................................................................... 107
Threshold .............................................................................. 94, 97
TIME ........................................................................................... 21
Time between songs (Pre Gap) .................................................. 140
Time Signature .......................................................... 123, 127, 130
Time Stretch .............................................................................. 192
TimeStrtch ................................................................................. 192
TME/MES ....................................................................... 68, 71, 74
TMP ............................................................................................ 85
TO ............................................................................................. 199

Index

TONE ........................................................................................ 149

VO+GT AMP .............................................................................. 92

Tone .................................................................................... 94, 111

VOCAL MULTI ........................................................................... 90

Tone Load ......................................................... 135, 149, 171, 181

VOICE TRANS ............................................................................ 90

TONELOAD Folder .................................................................. 162

Voice Transformer .................................................................... 100

Top-Hi ........................................................................................ 93

Volume ....................................................................................... 99

Top-Mid ...................................................................................... 93

VtgRack ...................................................................................... 94

TOUCH ..................................................................................... 101

[V-TRACK] ................................................................................. 49

TRACK ............................................................................... 87, 135

V-Track ................................................................................. 14, 49

Track ............................................................................... 39, 41, 48

V-Track Selection screen ............................................................. 49

Track At Once ........................................................................... 140


Track Copy ................................................................................. 67
Track Editing .............................................................................. 67

W
Wah ........................................................................................... 101

Track EQ ..................................................................... 43, 110, 112

WAV ................................................................. 148, 150, 165, 176

Track Erase ................................................................................. 73

WAV/AIFF Export ................................................... 150, 165, 176

Track Exchange ........................................................................... 76

WAV/AIFF File ................................................................ 171, 181

TRACK fader ......................................................................... 18, 29

WAV/AIFF Import ................................................... 148, 167, 178

TRACK MIXER ........................................................................... 18

WAV/AIFF menu screen .......................................................... 148

Track Move ................................................................................. 70

Windows ........................................................................... 162, 164

Track Mute .................................................................................. 41

Windows 2000 ........................................................................... 162

Treble .......................................................................................... 99

Windows Me ............................................................................. 162

Tremolo/Pan ............................................................................ 100

Windows XP ............................................................................. 162

TRK ..................................................................... 67, 70, 73, 7576

Wow Flt ...................................................................................... 96

TRM-SQR .................................................................................. 100

WRITE ................................................................ 86, 104, 115, 141

TRM-TRI ................................................................................... 100

Writing

[TUNER] ................................................................................... 188

Insert effects .......................................................................... 86

Tuner ........................................................................................ 188

Mastering Tool Kit .............................................................. 104

Tuning ........................................................................ 96, 188189

Pitch Correction .................................................................. 115

Tuning guide ............................................................................ 188

Audio CD ........................................................................... 140

Type .................................. 43, 9496, 98, 100101, 108, 111, 115

Waveform data ................................................................... 148

U EFX ........................................................................................ 195

XCG ............................................................................................ 76

Undo ........................................................................................... 57
[UNDO/REDO] .......................................................................... 57

UP ............................................................................................. 101

[ZERO] ........................................................................................ 30

USB ........................................................................... 162, 164, 175


USB connector ............................................................................. 22
USB Folder ................................................................................ 163
USB screen ................................................................................ 164
User Patch ............................................................................. 36, 84
[UTILITY] ......................................................................... 198199

Section 9

V ............................................................................................... 120
Velocity ..................................................................... 127, 131132
Verse ......................................................................................... 120
VO DRV ...................................................................................... 98
VO+AC.SIM ................................................................................ 92
VO+ACOUSTIC .......................................................................... 92

229

PAN

EQ Low

EQ High

CHO/DLY Send

REV Send

EQ Low

EQ High

CHO/DLY Send

REV Send

REV Send

CHO/DLY Send

EQ High

EQ Low

REV Send

CHO/DLY Send

EQ High

EQ Low

PAN

TRACK 4

Song Name

TRACK 3

PAN

EFFECTS

TRACK 2

PAN

TRACK 1

Track Sheet

Project

REV Send

CHO/DLY Send

EQ High

EQ Low

PAN

TRACK 5

Artist

REV Send

CHO/DLY Send

EQ High

EQ Low

PAN

REV Send

CHO/DLY Send

EQ High

EQ Low

PAN

RHYTHM

REV Send

CHO/DLY Send

EQ High

EQ Low

PAN

PATTERN
Tempo:

ARRANGE
Tempo:

Date

TRACK 7/8

COMMENTS

TRACK 6

Client

Track Sheet

USING THE UNIT SAFELY

The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.

Used for instructions intended to alert


the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers
other adverse effects
respect to the home
furnishings, as well
animals or pets.

The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.

to damage or
caused with
and all its
to domestic

The symbol alerts the user to things that must be


carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

001

009

Before using this unit, make sure to read the


instructions below, and the Owners Manual.

Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,


nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements and
short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock
hazards!
...........................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................
002c

Do not open (or modify in any way) the unit or its


AC adaptor.
..........................................................................................................
003

Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts


within it (except when this manual provides
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the Information sheet.
..........................................................................................................
004

Never use or store the unit in places that are:


Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or
are
Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are
Humid; or are
Exposed to rain; or are
Dusty; or are
Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
007

Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is


level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
..........................................................................................................
008c

Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with


the unit. Also, make sure the line voltage at the
installation matches the input voltage specified on
the AC adaptor's body. Other AC adaptors may
use a different polarity, or be designed for a
different voltage, so their use could result in
damage, malfunction, or electric shock.
..........................................................................................................

010

This unit, either alone or in combination with an


amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
audiologist.
...........................................................................................................
011

Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material,


coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft
drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.

...........................................................................................................
012c

Immediately turn the power off, remove the AC


adaptor from the outlet, and request servicing by
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or
an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the
Information sheet when:
The AC adaptor or the power-supply cord has
been damaged; or

For the U.K.


IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
BLUE:
NEUTRAL
BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.

For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.

For the USA

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION


RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada

NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

AVIS

If smoke or unusual odor occurs


Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or

Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada.
For the USA

The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise


has become wet); or

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement

The unit does not appear to operate normally or


exhibits a marked change in performance.
...........................................................................................................

Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :

BR-900CD
Digital Recording Studio
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S.Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938
(323) 890-3700

Owners Manual
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the BOSS
BR-900CD Digital Recording Studio.
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled:
USING THE UNIT SAFELY (page 23)
IMPORTANT NOTES (page 45)
These sections provide important information concerning
the proper operation of the unit.
Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a
good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit,
Owners manual should be read in its entirety. The manual
should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
Owners Manual

Printing Conventions in This Manual


Text or numerals enclosed in square brackets [ ] indicate buttons.
[PLAY]
PLAY button
[REC]
REC button
Reference such as (p. **) indicate pages in this manual to which
you can refer.
Copyright 2005 BOSS CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of BOSS CORPORATION.

**********

4SX

You might also like